(Cisco Press) CallManager Admin Guide

Cisco CallManager
Administration Guide
Release 3.1
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 526-4100
Customer Order Number: DOC-7813310=
Text Part Number: 78-13310-01
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT
ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR
THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION
PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO
LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as
part of UCBs public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE
PROVIDED AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
AccessPath, AtmDirector, Browse with Me, CCDE, CCIP, CCSI, CD-PAC, CiscoLink, the Cisco NetWorks logo, the Cisco Powered Network logo,
Cisco Systems Networking Academy, the Cisco Systems Networking Academy logo, Fast Step, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, FrameShare,
GigaStack, IGX, Internet Quotient, IP/VC, iQ Breakthrough, iQ Expertise, iQ FastTrack, the iQ Logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, MGX, the
Networkers logo, Packet, RateMUX, ScriptBuilder, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, TransPath, Unity, Voice LAN, Wavelength Router, and
WebViewer are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, Discover All Thats Possible, and Empowering
the Internet Generation, are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco,
the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo,
Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, FastHub, FastSwitch, IOS, IP/TV, LightStream, MICA, Network Registrar, PIX, Post-Routing,
Pre-Routing, Registrar, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its
affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Web site are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply
a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0105R)
Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Copyright 2001, Cisco Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
C O N T E N T S
Preface xxi
Purpose xxi
Audience xxii
Organization xxii
Related Documentation xxiii
Conventions xxiii
Obtaining Documentation xxv
World Wide Web xxv
Documentation CD-ROM xxv
Ordering Documentation xxvi
Documentation Feedback xxvi
Obtaining Technical Assistance xxvii
Cisco.com xxvii
Technical Assistance Center xxvii
Contacting TAC by Using the Cisco TAC Website xxviii
Contacting TAC by Telephone xxviii
PART
Cisco CallManager
CHAPTER
Introduction 1-1
Key Features and Benefits 1-2
Where to Find More Information 1-2

78-13310-01
iii
Contents
PART
System Configuration
CHAPTER
Server Configuration 2-1

Adding a Server 2-2
Updating a Server 2-3
Deleting a Server 2-4
Server Configuration Settings 2-5
CHAPTER
Cisco CallManager Configuration 3-1

Adding a Cisco CallManager 3-1
Updating a Cisco CallManager 3-3
Deleting a Cisco CallManager 3-4
Cisco CallManager Configuration Settings 3-5
Viewing Cisco CallManager Component Versions 3-8
CHAPTER
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration 4-1

Adding a Cisco CallManager Group 4-2
Updating a Cisco CallManager Group 4-3
Copying a Cisco CallManager Group 4-4
Deleting a Cisco CallManager Group 4-5
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration Settings 4-6
CHAPTER
Date/Time Group Configuration 5-1

Adding a Date/Time Group 5-2
Updating a Date/Time Group 5-2
Deleting a Date/Time Group 5-3
Date/Time Group Configuration Settings 5-4
iv
78-13310-01
Contents
CHAPTER
Device Defaults Configuration 6-1

Updating Device Defaults 6-2
Device Defaults Configuration Settings 6-3
Finding Devices With Non-Default Firmware Loads 6-4
CHAPTER
Region Configuration 7-1

Adding a Region 7-2
Updating a Region 7-3
Deleting a Region 7-4
Region Configuration Settings 7-5
CHAPTER
Device Pool Configuration 8-1

Adding a Device Pool 8-2
Updating a Device Pool 8-4
Deleting a Device Pool 8-5
Device Pool Configuration Settings 8-6
CHAPTER
Enterprise Parameters Configuration 9-1
CHAPTER
10
Location Configuration 10-1

Adding a Location 10-2
Updating a Location 10-3
Deleting a Location 10-3
Location Configuration Settings 10-5

78-13310-01
Contents
CHAPTER
11
Auto-Registration Configuration 11-1

Enabling Auto-Registration 11-1
Disabling Auto-Registration 11-3
Auto-Registration Configuration Settings 11-4
Reusing Auto-Registration Numbers 11-7
PART
Route Configuration
CHAPTER
12
Partition Configuration 12-1

Finding a Partition 12-1
Adding a Partition 12-3
Updating a Partition 12-4
Deleting a Partition 12-5
CHAPTER
13
Calling Search Space Configuration 13-1

Finding a Calling Search Space 13-2
Adding a Calling Search Space 13-3
Updating a Calling Search Space 13-4
Copying a Calling Search Space 13-5
Deleting a Calling Search Space 13-6
Calling Search Space Configuration Settings 13-7
CHAPTER
14
Route Filter Configuration 14-1

Finding a Route Filter 14-2
Adding a Route Filter 14-4
Updating a Route Filter 14-5
Copying a Route Filter 14-6
vi
78-13310-01
Contents
Route Filter Configuration Settings 14-7

Adding Route Filter Clauses 14-8
Removing Route Filter Clauses 14-9
Deleting a Route Filter 14-10
Route Filter Tag Descriptions 14-11
CHAPTER
15
Route Group Configuration 15-1

Finding a Route Group 15-1
Adding a Route Group 15-3
Adding Devices to a Route Group 15-4
Removing Devices from a Route Group 15-5
Updating a Route Group 15-6
Deleting a Route Group 15-7
Route Group Configuration Settings 15-8
CHAPTER
16
Route List Configuration 16-1

Finding Route Lists 16-2
Adding a Route List 16-3
Adding Route Groups to a Route List 16-4
Removing Route Groups from a Route List 16-6
Changing the Order of Route Groups in a Route List 16-7
Deleting a Route List 16-8
CHAPTER
17
Route Pattern Configuration 17-1

Finding a Route Pattern 17-1
Adding a Route Pattern 17-3
Updating a Route Pattern 17-5

78-13310-01
vii
Contents
Copying a Route Pattern 17-6

Deleting a Route Pattern 17-7
Route Pattern Configuration Settings 17-8
CHAPTER
18
Translation Pattern Configuration 18-1

Finding a Translation Pattern 18-1
Adding a Translation Pattern 18-3
Updating a Translation Pattern 18-4
Copying a Translation Pattern 18-5
Deleting a Translation Pattern 18-6
Translation Pattern Configuration Settings 18-7
CHAPTER
19
External Route Plan Wizard 19-1

Creating an External Route Plan 19-2
Setting the Routing Options 19-3
Providing Tenant Information 19-4
Entering Location Information 19-5
Selecting Gateways 19-6
Providing Gateway Information 19-8
Generating the External Route Plan 19-9
Confirming the External Route Plan 19-10
Finishing the External Route Plan 19-11
Deleting an External Route Plan 19-12
viii
78-13310-01
Contents
CHAPTER
20
Special Characters and Settings 20-1

Route Pattern Wildcards and Special Characters 20-1
Discard Digits Instructions 20-5
Calling Party Transformations Settings 20-19
Called Party Transformations Settings 20-21
CHAPTER
21
Route Plan Report 21-1

Viewing All Route Plan Records 21-2
Viewing Route Plan Reports in a File 21-3
PART
Service Configuration
CHAPTER
22
Cisco Messaging Interface Configuration 22-1

Adding the Cisco Messaging Interface Service to a Server 22-2
Deleting the Cisco Messaging Interface Service From a Server 22-4
Configuring Cisco Messaging Interface Service Parameters 22-5
CHAPTER
23
Cisco TFTP Configuration 23-1

Inserting Cisco TFTP Service on a Server 23-2
Deleting Cisco TFTP Service From a Server 23-3
Configuring Cisco TFTP Parameters 23-4
CHAPTER
24
Cisco WebAttendant Configuration 24-1

Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Users 24-2
Adding a Cisco WebAttendant User 24-2
Viewing, Updating, and Deleting Cisco WebAttendant Users 24-3
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration Settings 24-4

78-13310-01
ix
Contents
Configuring Pilot Points 24-4

Adding a Pilot Point 24-5
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting a Pilot Point 24-6
Pilot Point Configuration Settings 24-7
Configuring Hunt Groups 24-9
Adding Hunt Group Members 24-9
Configuring Linked Hunt Groups 24-12
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting Hunt Group Members 24-13
Hunt Group Configuration Settings 24-14
Installing the Cisco WebAttendant Client 24-16
Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Client Settings 24-18
Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings 24-20
Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration 24-22
Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for Cisco WebAttendant 24-24
Starting the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher 24-26
Viewing Cisco WebAttendant Performance Monitors 24-27
CHAPTER
25
Conference Bridge Configuration 25-1

Adding a Software Conference Device 25-2
Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings 25-4
Adding a Hardware Conference Device 25-5
Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings 25-6
Updating a Conference Device 25-7
Deleting a Conference Device 25-8
Updating Conference Bridge Parameters 25-9
Adding a Meet-Me Number/Pattern 25-10
Updating a Meet-Me Number/Pattern 25-12
78-13310-01
Contents
Deleting a Meet-Me Number/Pattern 25-13

Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration Settings 25-14
CHAPTER
26
Media Termination Point Configuration 26-1

Adding a Media Termination Point 26-2
Updating a Media Termination Point 26-3
Deleting a Media Termination Point 26-4
Media Termination Point Configuration Settings 26-5
CHAPTER
27
Music On Hold Configuration 27-1

Configuring Music On Hold Audio Sources 27-2
Adding a Music On Hold Audio Source 27-2
Updating a Music On Hold Audio Source 27-3
Copying a Music On Hold Audio Source 27-4
Deleting a Music On Hold Audio Source 27-6
Configuring the Music On Hold Fixed Audio Source 27-7
Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings 27-9
Configuring Music On Hold Servers 27-12
Adding a Music On Hold Server 27-12
Updating a Music On Hold Server 27-13
Copying a Music On Hold Server 27-14
Deleting a Music On Hold Server 27-16
Resetting a Music On Hold Server 27-17
Music On Hold Server Configuration Settings 27-19
CHAPTER
28
Media Resource Group Configuration 28-1

Adding a Media Resource Group 28-2
Updating a Media Resource Group 28-3
Copying a Media Resource Group 28-4
78-13310-01
xi
Contents
Deleting a Media Resource Group 28-6

Media Resource Group Configuration Settings 28-7
CHAPTER
29
Media Resource Group List Configuration 29-1

Adding a Media Resource Group List 29-2
Updating a Media Resource Group List 29-3
Copying a Media Resource Group List 29-4
Deleting a Media Resource Group List 29-5
Media Resource Group List Configuration Settings 29-7
CHAPTER
30
Service Parameters Configuration 30-1

Adding a New Service on a Server 30-2
Deleting a Service From a Server 30-3
Updating a Service Parameter 30-4
CHAPTER
31
Transcoder Configuration 31-1

Configuring a Transcoder 31-2
Updating a Transcoder 31-3
Copying a Transcoder 31-4
Deleting a Transcoder 31-5
Transcoder Configuration Settings 31-6
CHAPTER
32
Starting and Stopping Services 32-1

Using Windows 32-2
xii
78-13310-01
Contents
PART
Feature Configuration
CHAPTER
33
Call Park Configuration 33-1

Adding a Call Park Number 33-2
Updating a Call Park Number 33-3
Deleting a Call Park Number 33-4
Call Park Configuration Settings 33-5
CHAPTER
34
Call Pickup and Group Call Pickup Configuration 34-1

Adding a Call Pickup Group Number 34-2
Updating a Call Pickup Group Number 34-3
Deleting a Call Pickup Group Number 34-4
Call Pickup Configuration Settings 34-5
Assigning Directory Numbers to a Call Pickup Group 34-6
CHAPTER
35
Cisco IP Phone Services Configuration 35-1

Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service 35-2
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service 35-3
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service 35-4
Cisco IP Phone Service Configuration Settings 35-5
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter 35-6
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter 35-7
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter 35-8
Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter Settings 35-9

78-13310-01
xiii
Contents
PART
Device Configuration
CHAPTER
36
Device Configuration 36-1

Adding Devices to Cisco CallManager 36-2
Restarting or Resetting a Device 36-2
CHAPTER
37
CTI Route Point Configuration 37-1

Adding a CTI Route Point 37-2
Modifying a CTI Route Point 37-3
Deleting a CTI Route Point 37-4
Finding CTI Route Points 37-5
Resetting a CTI Route Point 37-6
CTI Route Point Configuration Settings 37-8
CHAPTER
38
Cisco Voice Mail Configuration 38-1

Using the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard 38-2
Adding a New Cisco Voice Mail Server and Ports 38-2
Adding Ports to an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server 38-6
Deleting Ports from an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server 38-8
Setting up the MWI Device 38-9
MWI Device Configuration Settings 38-10
Configuring Cisco Voice Mail Ports 38-11
Adding Cisco Voice Mail Ports 38-12
Deleting a Cisco Voice Mail Port 38-13
Updating a Cisco Voice Mail Port 38-14
Copying an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Port 38-15
Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration Settings 38-16
xiv
78-13310-01
Contents
CHAPTER
39
Device Profile Configuration 39-1

Finding a Device Profile 39-2
Adding a New User Device Profile 39-3
Updating User Device Profiles 39-5
Deleting a User Device Profile 39-6
Configuring New Directory Numbers for Autogenerated Device Profiles 39-7
Directory Number Configuration Settings 39-8
CHAPTER
40
Gatekeeper Configuration 40-1

Adding a Gatekeeper 40-2
Deleting the Gatekeeper 40-3
Modifying the Gatekeeper 40-3
Resetting the Gatekeeper 40-4
Gatekeeper Configuration Settings 40-6
CHAPTER
41
Gateway Configuration 41-1

Adding Gateways to Cisco CallManager 41-2
Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway 41-3
Adding Ports to an MGCP Gateway 41-6
Adding FXS Ports to an MGCP Gateway 41-6
Adding FXO Ports to an MGCP Gateway 41-8
Adding T1-CAS Ports to an MGCP Gateway 41-9
Adding a T1 PRI or E1 PRI Port to an MGCP Gateway 41-10
Adding a Non-IOS MGCP Gateway 41-10
Adding a Cisco IOS H.323 Gateway or Intercluster Trunk 41-12
Adding an Analog Access Gateway and Ports 41-13

78-13310-01
xv
Contents
Gateway Configuration Settings 41-15

MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings 41-16
FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings 41-18
E1/T1 PRI Gateway Configuration Settings 41-21
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings 41-33
H.323 Gateway and Intercluster Trunk Configuration Settings 41-35
Analog Access Gateway Configuration Settings 41-44
Port Configuration Settings 41-45
POTS Port Configuration Settings 41-46
Loop Start Port Configuration Settings 41-49
Ground Start Port Configuration Settings 41-51
E & M Port Configuration Settings 41-52
Finding Specific Gateways 41-56
Searching by Device Name 41-56
Searching by Description 41-58
Searching by Directory Number 41-59
Searching by Calling Search Space 41-60
Searching by Device Pool 41-62
Searching by Route Group 41-64
Modifying Gateways and Ports 41-65
Deleting Gateways 41-66
Resetting and Restarting Gateways 41-67
Updating Gateways and Ports 41-68
CHAPTER
42
Cisco IP Phone Configuration 42-1

Configuring Cisco IP Phones 42-2
Displaying the MAC Address of a Phone 42-3
Adding a Phone 42-4
Copying an Existing Phone 42-6
Resetting a Phone 42-7
xvi
78-13310-01
Contents
Updating a Phone 42-9

Deleting a Phone 42-10
Phone Configuration Settings 42-12
Configuring Speed Dial Buttons 42-20
Speed Dial Configuration Settings 42-22
Configuring Cisco IP Phone Services 42-22
Subscribing to a Service 42-23
Updating Services 42-24
Unsubscribing from a Service 42-25
Finding a Phone 42-26
Configuring Directory Numbers 42-27
Adding a Directory Number 42-28
Updating a Directory Number 42-29
Deleting a Directory Number 42-30
Directory Number Configuration Settings 42-32
CHAPTER
43
Phone Button Template Configuration 43-1

Adding Phone Button Templates 43-2
Phone Button Configuration Settings 43-3
Modifying Phone Button Templates 43-3
Renaming a Phone Button Template 43-4
Deleting a Phone Button Template 43-5
Updating a Phone Button Template 43-6

78-13310-01
xvii
Contents
PART
User Configuration
CHAPTER
44
Adding a New User 44-1

Adding a User 44-2
User Configuration Settings 44-2
Configuring Application Profiles 44-3
Associating Devices to a User 44-4
Auto Attendant 44-6
Extension Mobility 44-6
SoftPhone 44-7
CHAPTER
45
Searching the Global Directory 45-1

Using Basic Search 45-2
Using Advanced Search 45-3
PART
Application Configuration
CHAPTER
46
Plugin Configuration 46-1

Installing Plugins 46-1
CHAPTER
47
Cisco TAPI Service Provider Installation and Configuration 47-1

Installing the Cisco TSP 47-3
Activating the Cisco TSP 47-4
Configuring the Cisco TSP 47-6
Cisco TSP Configuration Settings 47-7
General Tab 47-8
User Tab 47-9
CTI Manager Tab 47-11
xviii
78-13310-01
Contents
Wave Tab 47-13

Trace Tab 47-16
Advanced Tab 47-19
Installing the Wave Driver 47-21
Saving Wave Driver Information 47-23
Verifying the Wave Driver Exists 47-24
Verifying the Cisco TSP Installation 47-25
Setting up Client-Server Configuration 47-26
Uninstalling the Wave Driver 47-26
Removing the Cisco TSP 47-28
Managing the Cisco TSP 47-29
Reinstalling the Cisco TSP 47-29
Upgrading the Cisco TSP 47-30
Uninstalling the Cisco TSP 47-31
CHAPTER
48
Cisco JTAPI Installation and Configuration 48-1

Installing the Cisco JTAPI Software 48-2
Verifying the Installation 48-4
Configuring Cisco JTAPI Tracing 48-4
Trace Levels 48-5
Log Destination 48-7
Cisco CallManager 48-10
Advanced 48-11
JTAPI Preferences on non-Microsoft environments 48-14
Administering User Information for JTAPI and TAPI Applications 48-15

78-13310-01
xix
Contents
PART
Appendix
APPENDIX
Personal Directory A-1

Understanding Personal Directory A-1
System Requirements A-3
Configuring Personal Directory A-3
Configuring the Personal Address Book Service A-3
Personal Address Book Service Parameter Settings A-6
Configuring the Personal Fast Dials Service A-6
Personal Fast Dials Service Parameter Settings A-8
Downloading the Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer A-9
Preparing the Phone User for Personal Directory A-9
INDEX
xx
78-13310-01
Preface
This preface describes the purpose, audience, organization, and conventions of
this guide, and provides information on how to obtain related documentation.
The preface covers these topics:
Purpose, page xxi
Audience, page xxii
Organization, page xxii
Related Documentation, page xxiii
Conventions, page xxiii
Obtaining Documentation, page xxv
Obtaining Technical Assistance, page xxvii
Purpose
The Cisco CallManager Administration Guide provides instructions for
administering the Cisco CallManager system. This guide includes descriptions of
procedural tasks you complete using Cisco CallManager. It also provides
references for commands to assist you in using Cisco CallManager. This book
acts as a companion to the Cisco CallManager System Guide which provides
conceptual information about the Cisco CallManager and its components as well
as tips for setting up features using the Cisco CallManager Administration web
pages.

78-13310-01
xxi
Preface
Audience
Audience
The Cisco CallManager Administration Guide is written for network
administrators responsible for managing the Cisco CallManager system. This
guide requires knowledge of telephony and IP networking technology.
Organization
This guide is organized as shown in the following table:
Part
Description
Part 1
Cisco CallManager
Contains information about general topics related to the
configuration and operation of Cisco CallManager.
Part 2
Contains information on how to configure the system parameters
used by Cisco CallManager.
Part 3
Route Configuration
Contains information on how to configure route plans in
Cisco CallManager.
Part 4
Contains information on how to configure services used in
conjunction with Cisco CallManager.
Part 5
Contains information on how to configure user features.
Part 6
Contains information on how to configure devices in
Cisco CallManager.
Part 7
User Configuration
Contains information on how to configure user and directory
information.
xxii
78-13310-01
Preface
Related Documentation
Part
Description
Part 8
Contains information on how to configure plugin applications and
application interfaces.
Part 9
Appendix
Contains information on how to configure Personal Directory.
Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for further information about related
Cisco IP telephony applications and products:
Installing Cisco CallManager Release 3.1
Release Notes for Cisco CallManager Release 3.1
Cisco CallManager System Guide
Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration Guide
Cisco IP Phone 7900 Family Administration Guide
Balk Administration Tool Guide for Cisco CallManager
Conventions
This document uses the following conventions:
Convention
Description
boldface font
Commands and keywords are in boldface.
italic font
Arguments for which you supply values are in italics.
[ ]
Elements in square brackets are optional.
{x|y|z}
Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated

by vertical bars.
[x|y|z]
Optional alternative keywords are grouped in brackets

and separated by vertical bars.

78-13310-01
xxiii
Preface
Conventions
Convention
Description
string
A nonquoted set of characters. Do not use quotation

marks around the string or the string will include the
quotation marks.
screen
font
boldface screen
Terminal sessions and information the system displays

are in screen font.
Information you must enter is in boldface
screen
font.
font
italic screen font
Arguments for which you supply values are in italic

screen font.
This pointer highlights an important line of text in an
example.
The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Controlfor

example, the key combination ^D in a screen display
means hold down the Control key while you press the
D key.
< >
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, are in angle

brackets.
Notes use the following conventions:
Note
Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to

material not covered in the publication.
Timesavers use the following conventions:
Timesaver
Means the described action saves time. You can save time by performing the
action described in the paragraph.
Tips use the following conventions:
Tips
Means the information contains useful tips.
xxiv
78-13310-01
Preface
Obtaining Documentation
Cautions use the following conventions:
Caution
Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could
result in equipment damage or loss of data.
Warnings use the following conventions:
Warning
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause
bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, you must be aware of the
hazards involved with electrical circuitry and familiar with standard
practices for preventing accidents.
The following sections provide sources for obtaining documentation from Cisco
Systems.
World Wide Web

You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at
the following sites:
http://www-china.cisco.com
http://www-europe.cisco.com
Documentation CD-ROM
Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM
package, which ships with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM is updated
monthly and may be more current than printed documentation. The CD-ROM
package is available as a single unit or as an annual subscription.

78-13310-01
xxv
Preface
Ordering Documentation
Cisco documentation is available in the following ways:
Registered Cisco Direct Customers can order Cisco Product documentation

from the Networking Products MarketPlace:
http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl
Registered Cisco.com users can order the Documentation CD-ROM through

the online Subscription Store:
http://www.cisco.com/go/subscription
Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local

account representative by calling Cisco corporate headquarters (California,
USA) at 408 526-7208 or, in North America, by calling 800
553-NETS(6387).
Documentation Feedback
If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web, you can
submit technical comments electronically. Click Feedback in the toolbar and
select Documentation. After you complete the form, click Submit to send it to
Cisco.
You can e-mail your comments to [email protected].
To submit your comments by mail, use the response card behind the front cover
of your document, or write to the following address:
Attn Document Resource Connection
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-9883
We appreciate your comments.
xxvi
78-13310-01
Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance

Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance.
Customers and partners can obtain documentation, troubleshooting tips, and
sample configurations from online tools. For Cisco.com registered users,
additional troubleshooting tools are available from the TAC website.
Cisco.com
Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that
provides immediate, open access to Cisco information and resources at anytime,
from anywhere in the world. This highly integrated Internet application is a
powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with Cisco.
Cisco.com provides a broad range of features and services to help customers and
partners streamline business processes and improve productivity. Through
Cisco.com, you can find information about Cisco and our networking solutions,
services, and programs. In addition, you can resolve technical issues with online
technical support, download and test software packages, and order Cisco learning
materials and merchandise. Valuable online skill assessment, training, and
certification programs are also available.
Customers and partners can self-register on Cisco.com to obtain additional
personalized information and services. Registered users can order products, check
on the status of an order, access technical support, and view benefits specific to
their relationships with Cisco.
To access Cisco.com, go to the following website:
Technical Assistance Center

The Cisco TAC website is available to all customers who need technical assistance
with a Cisco product or technology that is under warranty or covered by a
maintenance contract.

78-13310-01
xxvii
Preface
Contacting TAC by Using the Cisco TAC Website

If you have a priority level 3 (P3) or priority level 4 (P4) problem, contact TAC
by going to the TAC website:
http://www.cisco.com/tac
P3 and P4 level problems are defined as follows:
P3Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is

noticeably impaired, but most business operations continue.
P4You need information or assistance on Cisco product capabilities,

product installation, or basic product configuration.
In each of the above cases, use the Cisco TAC website to quickly find answers to
your questions.
To register for Cisco.com, go to the following website:
http://www.cisco.com/register/
If you cannot resolve your technical issue by using the TAC online resources,
Cisco.com registered users can open a case online by using the TAC Case Open
tool at the following website:
http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen
Contacting TAC by Telephone

If you have a priority level 1(P1) or priority level 2 (P2) problem, contact TAC by
telephone and immediately open a case. To obtain a directory of toll-free numbers
for your country, go to the following website:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml
P1 and P2 level problems are defined as follows:
P1Your production network is down, causing a critical impact to business

operations if service is not restored quickly. No workaround is available.
P2Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant

aspects of your business operations. No workaround is available.
xxviii
78-13310-01
A R T
Cisco CallManager
C H A P T E R
Introduction
Cisco CallManager serves as the software-based call-processing component of
the Cisco IP Telephony Solutions for the Enterprise, part of Cisco AVVID
(Architecture for Voice, Video and Integrated Data). The Cisco IP Telephony
Applications Server provides a high-availability server platform for
Cisco CallManager call processing, services, and applications.
The Cisco CallManager system extends enterprise telephony features and
functions to packet telephony network devices such as IP phones, media
processing devices, Voice-over-IP (VoIP) gateways, and multimedia applications.
Additional data, voice, and video services such as unified messaging, multimedia
conferencing, collaborative contact centers, and interactive multimedia response
systems interact through Cisco CallManager open telephony application
programming interface (API).
Cisco CallManager provides signaling and call control services to Cisco
integrated telephony applications as well as third-party applications. It performs
the following primary functions:
Call processing
Signaling and device control
Dial plan administration
Phone feature administration
Directory services

78-13310-01
1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Key Features and Benefits
Operations, administration, maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P)
Programming interface to external voice-processing applications such as

Cisco SoftPhone, Cisco IP Interactive Voice Recognition (IP IVR), Cisco
Personal Assistant, and Cisco WebAttendant
Key Features and Benefits

The Cisco CallManager system includes a suite of integrated voice applications
that perform voice conferencing and manual attendant console functions. This
suite of voice applications means that no need exists for special-purpose
voice-processing hardware. Supplementary and enhanced services such as hold,
transfer, forward, conference, multiple line appearances, automatic route
selection, speed dial, last-number redial, and other features extend to IP phones
and gateways. Because Cisco CallManager is a software application, enhancing
its capabilities in production environments only requires upgrading software on
the server platform, thereby avoiding expensive hardware upgrade costs.
Distribution of Cisco CallManager and all Cisco IP phones, gateways, and
applications across an IP network provides a distributed, virtual telephony
network. This architecture improves system availability and scalability. Call
admission control ensures that voice quality of service (QoS) is maintained across
constricted WAN link and automatically diverts calls to alternate public switched
telephone network (PSTN) routes when WAN bandwidth is not available.
A web-browsable interface to the configuration database provides the capability
for remote device and system configuration. This interface also provides access
to HTML-based online help for users and administrators.
Where to Find More Information
Cisco CallManager System Guide
Cisco IP Telephony Network Design Guide

http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/ip_tele/network/
1-2
78-13310-01
A R T
C H A P T E R
Server Configuration
Use server configuration to specify the address of the server where
Cisco CallManager is installed. If your network uses Domain Name System
(DNS) services, you can specify the DNS name of the server. If your network does
not use DNS services, you must specify the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the
server.
Note
You must update the DNS server with the appropriate Cisco CallManager
name and address information before using that information to configure the
Cisco CallManager server.
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete a server address in the
Cisco CallManager database:
Adding a Server, page 2-2
Updating a Server, page 2-3
Deleting a Server, page 2-4
Server Configuration Settings, page 2-5

78-13310-01
2-1
Chapter 2
Adding a Server
Adding a Server
This section describes how to add a server address to the Cisco CallManager
database.
Note
Installing the Cisco CallManager software automatically configures server

information in the database.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Server.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate settings as described in Table 2-1.
Step 3
Click Insert.
Related Topics
Adding a Cisco CallManager, page 3-1
Starting and Stopping Services, page 32-1
2-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 2
Updating a Server
Updating a Server
This section describes how to update server information in the Cisco CallManager
database.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Servers list, choose the server you want to update.
Step 3
Update the appropriate settings as described in Table 2-1.
Step 4
Click Update to save the changes in the database.

Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart
Cisco CallManager. For information on restarting the Cisco CallManager, see the
Starting and Stopping Services section on page 32-1.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
2-3
Chapter 2
Deleting a Server
Deleting a Server
This section describes how to delete a server from the Cisco CallManager
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a server that has a specific Cisco CallManager running on it. If
you try to delete a server that is in use, Cisco CallManager displays an error
message. Before deleting a server that is currently in use, you must perform at
least one of the following tasks:
Update the Cisco CallManager in question and assign it to a different server.

See the Updating a Cisco CallManager section on page 3-3.
Delete the Cisco CallManager assigned to the server you want to delete. See
the Deleting a Cisco CallManager section on page 3-4.
Deactivate the services running on that server. Refer to the Service

Installation and Configuration section in the Cisco CallManager System
Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the Servers list, choose the server you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
If the server is not in use, Cisco CallManager deletes it. If it is in use, an error
message displays.
Changes to the server configuration do not take effect until you restart
Cisco CallManager. For information on restarting the Cisco CallManager, see the
Starting and Stopping Services section on page 32-1.
Related Topics
2-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 2
Server Configuration Settings

Table 2-1 describes the server configuration settings.
Table 2-1
Field
Description
DNS/IP Address
If your network uses DNS services, you can enter the DNS
name of the Cisco CallManager server. Otherwise, you
must enter the full IP address of the server.
Note
MAC Address
You must update the DNS server with the

appropriate Cisco CallManager name and
address information before using that
information here.
Enter the media access control (MAC) address of the

network interface card (NIC) in the Cisco CallManager
server. The MAC address is the permanent hardware
address of the NIC. If you plan to move the server
periodically to different locations on the network, Cisco
recommends that you enter the MAC address so that other
devices on the network can always identify the server. If
you do not plan to relocate the server, you can omit the
MAC address.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
2-5
Chapter 2
2-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Cisco CallManager Configuration

Use Cisco CallManager configuration to specify the ports and other properties for
each Cisco CallManager installed in the same cluster. A cluster comprises a set of
Cisco CallManagers that share the same database.
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete a Cisco CallManager
configuration or to view system component version information:
Updating a Cisco CallManager, page 3-3
Deleting a Cisco CallManager, page 3-4
Cisco CallManager Configuration Settings, page 3-5
Viewing Cisco CallManager Component Versions, page 3-8
Adding a Cisco CallManager

This section describes how to add a new Cisco CallManager to the database.
Note
Installing the Cisco CallManager automatically configures information in the

database. After installing the software, you normally do not have to add a new
Cisco CallManager configuration to the database, but you might want to
update the configuration information for an existing Cisco CallManager. See
the Updating a Cisco CallManager section on page 3-3.

78-13310-01
3-1
Chapter 3
Adding a Cisco CallManager
Before You Begin
Before adding a new Cisco CallManager to the database, perform the following
tasks:
Configure the address of the server where this Cisco CallManager is

installed. See the Adding a Server section on page 2-2.
If you want to specify a partition for directory numbers used in

auto-registration with this Cisco CallManager, configure that partition. See
the Adding a Partition section on page 12-3.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Cisco CallManager.
Step 2
Use one of the following methods to add a Cisco CallManager:
If there is an existing Cisco CallManager with settings that are similar to the
one you want to add, choose the existing Cisco CallManager to display its
settings, click Copy, and modify the settings as needed.
To add a Cisco CallManager without copying an existing one, continue with

Step 3.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert to save the Cisco CallManager configuration in the database.
Related Topics
Adding a Cisco CallManager Group, page 4-2
3-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 3

Updating a Cisco CallManager
Updating a Cisco CallManager

This section describes how to update a Cisco CallManager configuration.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco CallManagers list, choose the Cisco CallManager you want to
update.
Step 3

Before saving the changes, you can click Cancel Changes to reset all fields to
their original value.
Step 4

Changes to the settings for auto-registration partition, external phone number
mask, and voice message box mask do not take effect until you restart
Cisco CallManager. Refer to the Starting and Stopping Services section on
page 32-1.
Caution
The Restart Devices button restarts all devices registered with this
Cisco CallManager and can temporarily interrupt call processing for those
devices. Use this button only if you have made configuration changes to most
of the devices on this Cisco CallManager and you want to restart all of them
at once. For configuration changes to smaller groupings of devices, restart
only the affected devices. If possible, avoid restarting devices during peak
hours.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
3-3
Chapter 3
Deleting a Cisco CallManager
Deleting a Cisco CallManager

This section describes how to delete a Cisco CallManager configuration from the
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a Cisco CallManager while it is running. If you try to delete a
Cisco CallManager that is in use, an error message displays. Before deleting a
Cisco CallManager that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the
following tasks:
Note
Update the Cisco CallManager group so that it no longer contains the

Cisco CallManager you want to delete. See the Updating a
Cisco CallManager Group section on page 4-3.
Delete the Cisco CallManager group that contains the Cisco CallManager
you want to delete. See the Deleting a Cisco CallManager Group section on
page 4-5.
If you delete a Cisco CallManager configuration from the database, the

Cisco CallManager service continues to run in background on the server. To
deactivate the service, use the Cisco Service Configuration utility. Refer to the
Service Installation and Configuration section in the Cisco CallManager
System Guide for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco CallManagers list, choose the Cisco CallManager you want to
delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When asked to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel
to cancel the delete operation.
3-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 3

Cisco CallManager Configuration Settings
Related Topics

Table 3-1 describes the Cisco CallManager configuration settings.
Table 3-1
Field
Description
Cisco CallManager
Server
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the server where

this Cisco CallManager is installed.
Note
Assign each Cisco CallManager server

address only once (that is, there can be only
one Cisco CallManager per server). After you
assign a server address to a particular
Cisco CallManager, that address disappears
from the list.
Cisco CallManager
Name
Enter the name you want to assign to this

Cisco CallManager.
Description
Enter a description of the Cisco CallManager.
Starting Directory
Number
Enter the first directory number to use for

auto-registration of devices.
Ending Directory
Number
Enter the last directory number to use for

Specifying a valid range of directory numbers in the
Starting Directory Number and Ending Directory
Number fields automatically enables auto-registration.
Setting the starting and ending directory numbers to the
same value disables auto-registration.

78-13310-01
3-5
Chapter 3
Table 3-1
Cisco CallManager Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Partition
Choose the partition to which auto-registered directory

numbers belong.
If you are not using partitions, choose None.
You must choose a range for auto-registration before you
can choose a partition, external phone number mask, or
voice message box mask.
External Phone
Number Mask
Specify the mask used to format caller ID information for

external (outbound) calls made from the auto-registered
devices. The mask can contain up to 50 characters. Enter
the literal digits that you want to appear in the caller ID
information, and use Xs to represent the directory
number of the auto-registered device.
For example, if you specify a mask of 972813XXXX, an
external call from extension 1234 displays a caller ID
number of 9728131234 if the Use External Phone
Number Mask option is checked on the route pattern
used to make the external call.
If you specify a mask of all literal digits, such as
9728135000 to represent a main attendant number, then
that literal number (9728135000) displays as the caller
ID for an external call from any auto-registered device.
Voice Message Box

Mask
Specify the mask used to format the Voice Message Box

number for auto-registered phones. When forwarding a
call to voice mail from a directory line on an
auto-registered phone, Cisco CallManager applies this
mask to the number configured in the Voice Message
Box field for that directory line.
For example, if you enter 3XXXX in the Voice Message
Box Mask field and you enter 4567 in the Voice Message
Box field of a directory line on an auto-registered phone,
Cisco CallManager identifies the voice message box for
this directory line as 34567.
3-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 3

Table 3-1
Field
Description
Auto-registration
Disabled on this
Cisco CallManager
Cisco CallManager disables the auto-registration by

default to prevent unauthorized connections to the
network:
Uncheck the Auto-registration Disabled check box

to enable auto-registration for this
Cisco CallManager.
Check the Auto-registration Disabled check box to

disable auto-registration for this Cisco CallManager.
When auto-registration is disabled, you must configure

the directory numbers manually whenever you add new
devices to your network.
Setting the Starting Directory Number and Ending
Directory Number to the same value also disables
auto-registration.
If starting and ending directory numbers are currently
specified when you disable auto-registration by checking
this option, Cisco CallManager sets the starting and
ending directory numbers to the same value.
Cisco CallManager resets the partition, and external
phone mask information fields are reset when
Auto-registration is disabled.
Ethernet Phone Port
Cisco CallManager uses this TCP port to communicate

with the Cisco IP phones on the network. Accept the
default port of 2000 unless this port is already in use on
your system. Ensure all port entries are unique. Valid
port numbers range from 1024 to 49151.
Digital Port

with Cisco Access Digital Trunk Gateways (such as the
DT-24+ or DE-30+) on the network. Accept the default
port of 2001 unless this port is already in use on your
system. Ensure all port entries are unique. Valid port
numbers range from 1024 to 49151.

78-13310-01
3-7
Chapter 3
Viewing Cisco CallManager Component Versions
Table 3-1
Field
Description
Analog Port

with Cisco Access Analog Gateways (such as the
WS-6624 FXS) on the network. Accept the default port
of 2002 unless this port is already in use on your system.
Ensure all port entries are unique. Valid port numbers
range from 1024 to 49151.
MGCP Listen Port
Cisco CallManager uses this TCP port to detect

messages from its associated MGCP gateway. Accept the
default port of 2427 unless this port is already in use on
your system. Ensure all port entries are unique. Valid
port numbers range from 1024 to 49151.
MGCP Keep-alive
Port
Cisco CallManager uses this TCP port to exchange

keep-alive messages with its associated MGCP gateway.
Accept the default port of 2428 unless this port is already
in use on your system. Ensure all port entries are unique.
Valid port numbers range from 1024 to 49151.
Related Topics

The Cisco CallManager Component Versions page in Cisco CallManager
Administration displays view-only software component version information for
any Cisco CallManager server, lists servers in the cluster with out-of-sync
software components, and displays latest installed component version
information across all Cisco CallManager servers in the cluster.
Use the following procedure to display version information for system software
components.
3-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 3

Procedure
Step 1
Choose Help > Component Versions.
Step 2
Choose a server from the Servers list to display component version information
for that server.
The information displayed includes the name of the component, the version
number of the component, and the installation ID of the program that installed the
component. The list will vary, depending on which components are currently
installed on that server.
Step 3
Click Out of Sync to locate any system components installed on

Cisco CallManager servers in the cluster that do not match the latest installed
component version in the cluster.
Step 4
Click Latest Installed Version to list the most recent (highest numbered)
installed version of each system component across all servers in the cluster.
Related Topics
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration, page 4-1
Device Pool Configuration, page 8-1
Device Defaults Configuration, page 6-1

78-13310-01
3-9
Chapter 3
3-10
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Cisco CallManager Group

Configuration
A Cisco CallManager group specifies a prioritized list of up to three
Cisco CallManagers. The first Cisco CallManager in the list serves as the primary
Cisco CallManager for that group, and the other members of the group serve as
secondary (backup) Cisco CallManagers.
Each device pool has one Cisco CallManager group assigned. When a device
registers, it attempts to connect to the primary (first) Cisco CallManager in the
group assigned to its device pool. If the primary Cisco CallManager is not
available, the device tries to connect to the next Cisco CallManager listed in the
group, and so on.
Cisco CallManager groups provide important features for your system:
RedundancyThis feature enables you to designate a primary and backup

Cisco CallManagers for each group.
Call processing load balancingThis feature enables you to distribute the

control of devices across multiple Cisco CallManagers.
For most systems, you need to assign a single Cisco CallManager to multiple
groups to achieve better load distribution and redundancy.
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete a Cisco CallManager group:
Updating a Cisco CallManager Group, page 4-3
Copying a Cisco CallManager Group, page 4-4

78-13310-01
4-1
Chapter 4
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration
Adding a Cisco CallManager Group
Deleting a Cisco CallManager Group, page 4-5
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration Settings, page 4-6
Adding a Cisco CallManager Group

This section describes how to configure a new Cisco CallManager group. You can
also create a new Cisco CallManager group by copying an existing one. See the
Copying a Cisco CallManager Group section on page 4-4 for more information.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a Cisco CallManager group, you must configure the

Cisco CallManagers that you want to assign as members of that group. See the
Adding a Cisco CallManager section on page 3-1 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Cisco CallManager Group.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert to save the Cisco CallManager group in the database.

Once you have configured the Cisco CallManager group, you can use it to
configure device pools. Devices obtain their Cisco CallManager group list setting
from the device pool to which they are assigned.
Related Topics
4-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 4

Updating a Cisco CallManager Group
Updating a Cisco CallManager Group

This section describes how to update an existing Cisco CallManager group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco CallManager Group list, choose the group you want to update.
Step 3
Update the appropriate settings as described in Table 4-1. Before saving the
changes, you can click Cancel Changes to reset all fields to their original value.
Note
To designate a group as the default Auto-registration

Cisco CallManager Group, check the Auto-registration
Cisco CallManager Group check box.
If the currently selected group is the default group for
auto-registration, you cannot change it by unchecking the
Auto-registration Cisco CallManager Group check box. You must
choose a different default auto-registration group. When you do so,
the Cisco CallManager automatically changes the currently selected
default auto-registration group.
Step 4

You must reset the devices that use the updated Cisco CallManager group to apply
the changes. To reset all the devices that use this Cisco CallManager group, click
Reset Devices.
Tips
Caution
For your convenience in resetting devices, the Reset Devices button resets all
devices in the device pool that uses this Cisco CallManager group.
Resetting devices can cause them to drop calls.

78-13310-01
4-3
Chapter 4
Copying a Cisco CallManager Group
Related Topics
Copying a Cisco CallManager Group

Use the following procedure to add a new Cisco CallManager group by copying
settings from an existing group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco CallManager Group list, choose the name of the group you want
to copy.
Step 3
Click Copy.
Step 4
In the Cisco CallManager Group field, enter the name of the new group. You must
change the name of the group.
Step 5
Edit the fields you want to change as described in Table 4-1.
Step 6
Click Insert to apply the changes and add the new Cisco CallManager group to
the database.
Related Topics
4-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 4

Deleting a Cisco CallManager Group
Deleting a Cisco CallManager Group

This section describes how to delete a Cisco CallManager group from the
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a Cisco CallManager group if it is assigned to any device pools
or MGCP gateways or if it is the current Auto-registration Cisco CallManager
Group for the cluster. If you try to delete a Cisco CallManager group that is in use,
an error message displays. Before deleting a Cisco CallManager group that is
currently in use, you must perform some or all of the following tasks:
Assign a different Cisco CallManager group to the device pools that are
currently using this Cisco CallManager group. See the Updating a Device
Pool section on page 8-4.
Create or choose a different Cisco CallManager group to be the

Auto-registration Cisco CallManager Group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco CallManager Group list, choose the group you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When asked to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or Cancel
to cancel the delete operation.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
4-5
Chapter 4
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration Settings

Table 4-1 describes the configuration settings for Cisco CallManager groups.
Table 4-1
Field
Description
Cisco CallManager
Group
Enter the name of the new group.
Auto-registration
Cisco CallManager
Group
Check the Auto-registration Cisco CallManager Group

check box if you want this Cisco CallManager group to
be the default Cisco CallManager group when
auto-registration is enabled.
Leave this check box unchecked if you do not want
devices to auto-register with this Cisco CallManager
group.
Note
Each Cisco CallManager cluster can have

only one default auto-registration group. If
you select a different Cisco CallManager
group as the default auto-registration group,
the previously chosen auto-registration group
no longer serves as the default for the cluster.
4-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 4

Table 4-1
Cisco CallManager Group Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Available
Cisco CallManagers
This field displays the list of available

Cisco CallManager that are not a part of the
Cisco CallManager group.
Choose the Cisco CallManager names, and use the left
and right arrows to move Cisco CallManagers between
the Selected list and the Available list.
Selected
Cisco CallManagers
This field displays the Cisco CallManagers that are in the

Cisco CallManager group. The Selected list can contain
up to three Cisco CallManagers. Cisco CallManagers in
the Selected list become members of the group when you
click Insert.
Choose the Cisco CallManager names, and use the left
and right arrows to move Cisco CallManagers between
the Selected list and the Available list. Use the up and
down arrows to arrange the groups in the Selected list in
the order that you want.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
4-7
Chapter 4
4-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Date/Time Group Configuration

Use Date/Time Groups to define time zones for the various devices connected to
Cisco CallManager. Each device exists as a member of only one device pool, and
each device pool has only one assigned Date/Time Group.
Installing Cisco CallManager automatically configures a default Date/Time
Group called CMLocal. CMLocal synchronizes to the active date and time of the
operating system on the server where Cisco CallManager is installed. After
installing Cisco CallManager, you can change the settings for CMLocal as
desired. Normally, adjust server date/time to the local time zone date and time.
Note
CMLocal resets to the operating system date and time whenever you restart
Cisco CallManager or upgrade the Cisco CallManager software to a new
release. Do not change the name of CMLocal.
Tips
For a worldwide distribution of Cisco IP phones, create one named Date/Time

Group for each of the 24 time zones.
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete Date/Time Groups:
Adding a Date/Time Group, page 5-2
Updating a Date/Time Group, page 5-2
Deleting a Date/Time Group, page 5-3
Date/Time Group Configuration Settings, page 5-4

78-13310-01
5-1
Chapter 5
Adding a Date/Time Group
Adding a Date/Time Group

This section describes how to add a new date/time group to the
Cisco CallManager database.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Date/Time Group.
Step 2
To create a new date/time group from an existing group, choose the date/time
group with settings that are similar to the group you want to create, and click
Copy.
Step 3
Enter or edit the appropriate settings as described in Table 5-1.
Step 4
Click Insert to save the new date/time group in the database.
Next Steps
After adding a new date/time group to the database, you can assign it to a device
pool to configure the date and time information for that device pool. For more
information, see Adding a Device Pool section on page 8-2.
Related Topics
Updating a Date/Time Group

This section describes how to update a date/time group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Date/Time Group list, choose the date/time group you want to update.
5-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 5

Deleting a Date/Time Group
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
To apply the changes, restart the devices in the device pool that uses this date/time
group. See the Updating a Device Pool section on page 8-4 for information on
restarting devices.
Related Topics
Deleting a Date/Time Group

This section describes how to delete a date/time group from the
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a date/time group that is used by any device pool. If you try to
delete a date/time group that is in use, Cisco CallManager displays an error
message. Before deleting a date/time group that is currently in use, you must
perform either or both of the following tasks:
Assign a different date/time group to any device pools that are using the
date/time group you want to delete. See the Updating a Device Pool section
on page 8-4.
Delete the device pools that are using the date/time group you want to delete.
See the Deleting a Device Pool section on page 8-5.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Date/Time Group list, choose the date/time group you want to delete.

78-13310-01
5-3
Chapter 5
Date/Time Group Configuration Settings
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or

Cancel to cancel the delete operation.
Related Topics

Table 5-1 describes the date/time group configuration settings.
Table 5-1
Field
Description
Group Name
Enter the name you want to assign to the new date/time

group.
Time Zone
Choose the time zone for the group you are adding. The
option local time zone of CallManager copies the time
zone information from the operating system of the server
where Cisco CallManager is installed.
Separator
Choose the separator character to use between the date

fields.
Date Format
Choose the date format for the date displayed on the

Cisco IP phones.
Time Format
Choose 12-hour or 24-hour time.
Related Topics
5-4
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Device Defaults Configuration

Use device defaults to set the system-wide default characteristics of each type of
device that registers with a Cisco CallManager. The system-wide device defaults
for a device type apply to all auto-registered devices of that type within a
Cisco CallManager cluster. You can set the following device defaults for each
device type to which they apply:
Device load
Device pool
Phone button template
When a device auto-registers with a Cisco CallManager, it acquires the

system-wide device default settings for its device type. After a device registers,
you can update its configuration individually to change the device settings.
Installing Cisco CallManager automatically sets device defaults. You cannot
create new device defaults or delete existing ones, but you can change the default
settings by using the following topics:
Updating Device Defaults, page 6-2
Device Defaults Configuration Settings, page 6-3
Finding Devices With Non-Default Firmware Loads, page 6-4
Device Firmware Loads, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
6-1
Chapter 6
Updating Device Defaults
Updating Device Defaults

This section describes how to modify the device defaults in the
Cisco CallManager configuration database.
Before You Begin
Before updating the device defaults, perform any of the following tasks that apply
to your system:
Add new firmware files for the devices to the TFTP server. For each available
firmware load, a .bin file exists in the Program Files\Cisco\TFTPPath folder
on the Cisco CallManager server.
For example, for the firmware load P002A0305556, a file named
P002A0305556.bin exists in the Program Files\Cisco\TFTPPath folder.
Configure new device pools. See the Adding a Device Pool section on
page 8-2.
If the device is a phone, configure new phone templates. See the Adding
Phone Button Templates section on page 43-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Device Defaults.
Step 2
Update the appropriate settings for the device you want to change as described in
Table 6-1.
Step 3
Click Update to save the changes in the Cisco CallManager configuration

database.
Step 4
Click the Reset icon to the left of the device name to reset all the devices of that
type and load the new defaults on all Cisco CallManagers in the cluster.
If you choose not to reset all devices of that type, only new devices added after
you change the device defaults receive the latest defaults.
Related Topics
Device Defaults Configuration Settings, page 6-3
6-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 6

Device Defaults Configuration Settings

Table 6-1 describes the configuration settings for device defaults.
Table 6-1
Field Name
Description
Load Information
Enter the ID number of the firmware load used with a

particular type of hardware device. If you install an
upgrade or patch load, you must update the load
information for each type of device that uses the new
load.
Device Pool
Choose the device pool associated with each type of

device. The device pool defines common characteristics
for all devices in the pool.
Phone Template
Choose the phone button template used by each type of

Cisco IP phone. The template defines that keys on the
phone perform that function.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
6-3
Chapter 6
Finding Devices With Non-Default Firmware Loads
Finding Devices With Non-Default Firmware Loads

The Firmware Load Information page in Cisco CallManager Administration
enables you to quickly locate devices that are not using the default firmware load
for their device type.
Use the following procedure to locate devices that are not using the default
firmware load.
Step 1
Select Device > Firmware Load Information.

The page updates to display a list of device types that require firmware loads. For
each device type, the Devices Not Using Default Load column links to
configuration settings for any devices that use a non-default load.
Step 2
Click view details in the Devices Not Using Default Load column to view a list
of devices of that type that are using a non-default device load.
Related Topics
6-4
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Region Configuration
Use regions to specify the voice codec used for calls within a region and between
existing regions. The voice codec determines the type of compression and
maximum amount of bandwidth used per call.
Note
The default voice codec for all calls through Cisco CallManager is G.711. If
you do not plan to use any other voice codec, you do not need to use regions.
Use the following procedures to add, update, or delete regions:
Adding a Region, page 7-2
Updating a Region, page 7-3
Deleting a Region, page 7-4
Region Configuration Settings, page 7-5
Refer to the Regions section in the Cisco CallManager System Guide for more
information about configuring regions and selecting voice codecs.

78-13310-01
7-1
Chapter 7
Adding a Region
Adding a Region
This section describes how to add a new region to the Cisco CallManager
database.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Region.
Step 2
In the Region Name field, enter the name you want to assign to the new region and
click Insert.
Step 3
Using the drop-down list boxes, choose the voice codec to use for calls within the
new region and between the new region and existing regions. The voice codec
determines the type of compression and the maximum amount of bandwidth
allocated for these calls.
See Table 7-1 for a summary of the available codec types and bandwidth usage.
Before saving the changes, you can click Cancel Changes to reset all fields to
original values.
Step 4
Click Update to save the new region in the database.
Next Step
After adding a new region to the database, you can use it to configure device
pools. Devices acquire a region setting from the device pool to which they are
assigned. See the Adding a Device Pool section on page 8-2 for information on
configuring device pools.
Related Topics
Adding a Device Pool, page 8-2
7-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 7
Updating a Region
Updating a Region
This section describes how to update the configuration for a region.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Region list, choose the region you want to update.
Update the codec settings for calls within the region and between other regions.
See Table 7-1 for a summary of the available codec types and bandwidth usage.
Before saving the changes, you can click Cancel to reset all fields to original
values.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Restart Devices to apply the changes to all devices that use the updated
region.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
7-3
Chapter 7
Deleting a Region
Deleting a Region
This section describes how to delete a region from the Cisco CallManager
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a region that is being used by any device pools. If you try to
delete a region that is in use, Cisco CallManager displays an error message.
Before deleting a region that is currently in use, you must perform either or both
of the following tasks:
Update the device pools to use a different region. See the Updating a Device
Pool section on page 8-4.
Delete the device pools that are using the region you want to delete. See the
Deleting a Device Pool section on page 8-5.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Region list, choose the region you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Related Topics
7-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 7
Region Configuration Settings

Table 7-1 summarizes the available voice codecs that can be specified for regions.
The total bandwidth used per call depends on the voice codec type as well as
factors such as data packet size and overhead (packet header size). The bandwidth
figures shown in Table 7-1 apply for 30-ms data packets and include IP headers.
Table 7-1
Bandwidth Used Per Call

(Including IP Headers)
Voice Codec With 30-ms Data Packets
Description
G.711
80 kbps
Default codec for all calls in

Cisco CallManager.
G.723
24 kbps
Low-bit-rate codec supported for use

with older Cisco IP Phone model
12 SP Series and Cisco IP Phone
model 30 VIP.
G.729
24 kbps
Low bit-rate codec supported for

Cisco IP Phone 7900 family models.
Wideband
272 kbps
High-quality, high-bandwidth voice

codec for IP-phone to IP-phone calls
supported by Cisco IP Phone 7900
family models.
GSM
29 kbps
The Global System for Mobile

Communications (GSM) codec that
enables the MNET system for GSM
wireless handsets to interoperate with
Cisco CallManager.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
7-5
Chapter 7
7-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Device Pool Configuration

Use device pools to define sets of common characteristics for devices. You can
specify the following device characteristics for a device pool:
Cisco CallManager group
Date/time group
Region
Media resource group list
Music On Hold (MOH) audio sources
Calling search space for auto-registration
Auto-answer enable for Cisco IP phones that support this feature
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete a device pool:
Updating a Device Pool, page 8-4
Deleting a Device Pool, page 8-5
Device Pool Configuration Settings, page 8-6
Refer to the System-Level Configuration Settings section in the

Cisco CallManager System Guide for more information about device pools and
the device settings that are assigned through device pools.

78-13310-01
8-1
Chapter 8
Adding a Device Pool

This section describes how to add a new device pool to the Cisco CallManager
database. After adding a new device pool to the database, you can use it to
configure devices such as Cisco IP phones, gateways, conference bridges,
transcoders, media termination points, voice mail ports, CTI route points, and so
on.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a device pool, you must configure the following items if you
want to choose them for the device pool:
Cisco CallManager group (required). See the Adding a Cisco CallManager

Group section on page 4-2.
Date/time group (required). See the Adding a Date/Time Group section on

page 5-2.
Region (required). See the Adding a Region section on page 7-2.
Media resource group list (optional). See the Adding a Media Resource
Group List section on page 29-2.
MOH audio sources (optional). See the Adding a Music On Hold Audio
Source section on page 27-2.
Calling search space for auto-registration (optional). See the Adding a

Calling Search Space section on page 13-3.
8-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 8

Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Device Pool.
Step 2
To create a device pool from an existing device pool with settings that are similar
to the one you want to configure, choose the existing device pool and click Copy.
Step 3
Enter or edit the appropriate fields as described in the Device Pool Configuration
Settings section on page 8-6.
Step 4
Click Insert to save the device pool information in the database.
Step 5
Click either Auto Answer On or Auto Answer Off to enable or disable the Auto
Answer feature on all phones that support it in this device pool. For more
information on configuring the Auto Answer feature, see the Configuring
Directory Numbers section on page 42-27.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
8-3
Chapter 8
Updating a Device Pool
Updating a Device Pool

This section describes how to modify the configuration of an existing device pool.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the Device Pools list, choose the device pool you want to update.
Step 3
changes, you can click Cancel to reset all fields to original values.
Step 4
Step 5
Restart the devices to apply the changes. To restart all the devices in the selected
device pool, click Restart Devices.
Tips
Caution
For your convenience in restarting devices, the Restart Devices button restarts
all devices in the selected device pool.
Restarting devices can cause them to drop calls.
Related Topics
8-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 8

Deleting a Device Pool
Deleting a Device Pool

This section describes how to delete a device pool from the Cisco CallManager
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a device pool if it has any devices assigned to it, if it is used for
Device Defaults configuration, or if it is the only device pool in the database. If
you try to delete a device pool that is in use, an error message displays. Before
deleting a device pool that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of
the following tasks:
Update the devices to assign them to a different device pool. See the
Updating a Phone section on page 42-9.
Delete the devices assigned to the device pool you want to delete. See the
Deleting a Phone section on page 42-10.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the Device Pools list, choose the device pool you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to delete or

Cancel to cancel the delete operation.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
8-5
Chapter 8
Device Pool Configuration Settings

Table 8-1 lists and describes device pool configuration settings.
Table 8-1
Field Name
Description
Device Pool Name
Enter the name of the new device pool you are creating.
Cisco CallManager
Group
Choose the Cisco CallManager group to assign to

devices in this device pool. A Cisco CallManager group
specifies a prioritized list of up to three
Cisco CallManagers. The first Cisco CallManager in the
list serves as the primary Cisco CallManager for that
group, and the other members of the group serve as
backup Cisco CallManagers for redundancy.
Date/Time Group
Choose the date/time group to assign to devices in this

device pool. The date/time group specifies the time zone
and the display formats for date and time.
Region
Choose the Cisco CallManager region to assign to

devices in this device pool. The Cisco CallManager
region settings specify voice codec that can be used for
calls within a region and between other regions.
Media Resource
Group List
Choose a media resource group list from the drop-down

list box. A media resource group list specifies a
prioritized list of media resource groups. An application
selects the required media resource (for example, a music
on hold server, transcoder, or conference bridge) from
the available media resource groups according to the
priority order defined in a media resource group list.
User Hold MOH

Audio Source
Choose the audio source to use for music on hold (MOH)

when a user initiates a hold action.
Network Hold MOH Choose the audio source to use for music on hold (MOH)
Audio Source
when the network initiates a hold action.
8-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 8

Table 8-1
Device Pool Configuration Settings (continued)
Field Name
Description
Calling Search Space Choose the calling search space to assign to devices in
for Auto-registration this device pool that auto-registers with
Cisco CallManager. The calling search space specifies
partitions devices that can search when attempting to
complete a call.
Auto-Answer
Feature Control
Choose enable/disable for the auto-answer feature on

Cisco IP phones that support this feature:
Auto Answer On enables auto-answer for all lines

on all phones in the device pool.
Auto Answer Off disables auto-answer for all lines

on all phones in the device pool.
The auto-answer feature automatically delivers calls to

agents who are available and ready to take calls. Agents
receive a notification that the call has arrived (for
example, a zip tone or a beep tone) but do not have to
press a button to answer the call.
You must reset the phones to apply changes to Auto
Answer settings.
You can override the device pool setting for auto-answer
when configuring individual lines (directory numbers)
on the phones in the device pool.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
8-7
Chapter 8
8-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
Enterprise Parameters Configuration

Enterprise parameters provide default settings that apply to all devices and
services in the same cluster. (A cluster is a set of Cisco CallManagers that share
the same database.) When you install a new Cisco CallManager, it uses the
enterprise parameters to set the initial values of its device defaults. For more
information on device defaults, see the Device Defaults Configuration section
on page 6-1 and refer to the System-Level Configuration Settings section of the
Cisco CallManager System Guide.
You cannot add or delete enterprise parameters, but you can use the following
procedure to update existing enterprise parameters.
Note
Many of the enterprise parameters rarely require change. Do not change an

enterprise parameter unless you fully understand the feature that you are
changing or unless the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) specifies the
change.

78-13310-01
9-1
Chapter 9
Enterprise Parameters Configuration
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Enterprise Parameters.
Step 2
Update the appropriate parameter settings.

To view the description of a particular enterprise parameter, click on the
parameter name. To view the descriptions of all the enterprise parameters, click
the i button.
Step 3
9-2
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
10
Location Configuration
Use locations to implement call admission control in a centralized call processing
system. Call admission control enables you to regulate voice quality by limiting
the amount of bandwidth available for calls over links between the locations. For
more information, refer to the Call Admission Control section in the
Note
If you do not use call admission control to limit the voice bandwidth on an IP
WAN link, an unlimited number of calls can be active on that link at the same
time. This can cause the voice quality of each call to degrade as the link
becomes oversubscribed.
In a centralized call processing system, a single Cisco CallManager cluster
provides call processing for all locations on the IP telephony network. The
Cisco CallManager cluster usually resides at the main (or central) location, along
with other devices such as phones and gateways. The remote locations contain
additional devices but no Cisco CallManager. IP WAN links connect the remote
locations to the main location.
The following topics explain locations in more detail:
Adding a Location, page 10-2
Updating a Location, page 10-3
Deleting a Location, page 10-3
Location Configuration Settings, page 10-5
Locations, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
10-1
Chapter 10
Adding a Location
Adding a Location
This section describes how to add a new location to the Cisco CallManager
database.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a location, you must configure the Cisco CallManagers that
form the cluster. For details, see the Adding a Cisco CallManager section on
page 3-1
Procedure
Step 1
Choose System > Location.
Step 2
If there is an existing location with settings that are similar to the new location
you want to configure, click the existing location to display its settings. If you
want to use a copy of the existing location to configure the new one, click Copy.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert to save the location information in the database.
Next Steps
After adding a new location to the database, you can assign devices to that
location. For example, see:
Gateway Configuration, page 41-1
Cisco IP Phone Configuration, page 42-1
Related Topics
10-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 10
Updating a Location
Updating a Location
This section describes how to modify the configuration of a location.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Locations list, choose the location you want to update.
Step 3
changes, you can click Cancel to reset all fields to original values.
Step 4
Related Topics
Deleting a Location
This section describes how to delete a location from the Cisco CallManager
database.
Before You Begin
You cannot delete a location that has any devices assigned to it. If you try to delete
a location that is in use, Cisco CallManager displays an error message. Before
deleting a location that is currently in use, you must perform either or both of the
following tasks:
Update the devices to assign them to a different location.
Delete the devices assigned to the location you want to delete.

78-13310-01
10-3
Chapter 10
Deleting a Location
Note
Deleting a location allocates infinite bandwidth for the links connected to that
location and allows an unlimited number of calls on those links. Deleting a
location can cause voice quality on the links to degrade.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Locations list, choose the location you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Step 4
When prompted to confirm the delete operation, click either OK to confirm

deletion or Cancel to cancel the delete operation.
Related Topics
10-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 10
Location Configuration Settings

Table 10-1 describes the location configuration settings.
Table 10-1 Location Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Location Name
Enter the name of the new location you are creating
Bandwidth
Enter the maximum amount of voice bandwidth (in kbps)

available for all calls on the link between this location
and other locations.
For purposes of location bandwidth calculations only,
assume that each call consumes the following amount of
bandwidth:
G.711 call uses 80 kbps
GSM call uses 29 kbps
Wideband call uses 272 kbps
Note
To improve voice quality, lower the

bandwidth setting, so that fewer active calls
are allowed on the link to this location.
Entering a value of zero allocates infinite
bandwidth and allows an unlimited number of
calls on the link.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
10-5
Chapter 10
10-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
11
Auto-Registration Configuration
Use auto-registration if you want Cisco CallManager to assign directory numbers
automatically to new phones as they connect to the IP telephony network. Once a
phone has auto-registered, you can move it to a new location and assign it to a
different device pool without affecting its directory number.
This section covers the following topics:
Enabling Auto-Registration, page 11-1
Disabling Auto-Registration, page 11-3
Auto-Registration Configuration Settings, page 11-4
Reusing Auto-Registration Numbers, page 11-7
Enabling Auto-Registration
This section describes how to enable auto-registration for new devices.
Caution
Cisco CallManager disables auto-registration by default. Enabling

auto-registration carries a security risk in that rogue phones can
automatically register with Cisco CallManager. You should enable
auto-registration only for brief periods when you want to perform bulk phone
adds.

78-13310-01
11-1
Chapter 11
Enabling Auto-Registration
Procedure
Step 1
Open Cisco CallManager Administration.
Step 2
Step 3
From the list of Cisco CallManagers, choose the Cisco CallManager you want to
enable for auto-registration.
Step 4
Enter the appropriate Auto-registration Information, as described in Table 11-1.
Step 5
Click Update to save any changes in the database.
Step 6
Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 for each Cisco CallManager that you want to enable
for auto-registration. You can designate only one primary Cisco CallManager for
auto-registration, but you can designate other Cisco Call Managers as backups for
purposes of auto-registration. See the Redundancy section in the
Step 7
Step 8
From the list of Cisco CallManager groups, choose the group that is enabled for
auto-registration. (In most systems, the name of this group is Default.) This group
serves as the default Cisco CallManager group for devices that auto-register.
Make sure the Selected list for this group contains the Cisco CallManagers you
configured for auto-registration in Step 3.
Step 9
If you made any changes to the group configuration, click Update to save the
changes in the database.
Step 10
Step 11
From the list of device pools, choose one of the default device pools assigned in
the Device Defaults (see the Device Defaults Configuration section on
page 6-1). Cisco CallManager assigns each auto-registered device to a default
device pool based on the device type.
Step 12
From the drop-down list box for Cisco CallManager Group, choose the
Cisco CallManager group you configured for auto-registration in Step 8. This step
assigns the default device pool to the default Cisco CallManager group for
auto-registration.
Step 13
From the drop-down list box for Calling Search Space for Auto-Registration,
choose the calling search space to assign to the devices in this device pool that
auto-register with Cisco CallManager. The calling search space specifies the route
partitions used by the devices in the pool.
11-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 11
Disabling Auto-Registration
Step 14
Click Update to save the device pool changes in the database.
Step 15
Repeat Step 11 through Step 14 for each device pool listed in the Device Defaults.
Related Topics
Disabling Auto-Registration
This section describes how to disable auto-registration.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
From the Cisco CallManager list, choose the Cisco CallManager where you want
to disable auto-registration.
Step 4
Click the Auto-registration Disabled option to disable auto-registration for this

Cisco CallManager (when this box is checked, auto-registration is disabled).
Note
You can also disable auto-registration by setting the Starting Directory

Number and Ending Directory Number to the same value.
Step 5
Step 6
Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 for each Cisco CallManager where you want to
disable auto-registration.

78-13310-01
11-3
Chapter 11
Auto-Registration Configuration Settings
Related Topics

Table 11-1 describes the auto-registration configuration settings.
Table 11-1
Field Name
Description
Starting Directory
Number
Enter the first directory number to use for

Specifying a range of directory numbers in the Starting
Directory Number and Ending Directory Number fields
automatically enables auto-registration.
Ending Directory
Number
Enter the last directory number to use for auto-registration

of devices.
Specifying a range of directory numbers in the Starting
Directory Number and Ending Directory Number fields
automatically enables auto-registration.
Partition
Choose the partition to which auto-registered directory

numbers belong. If you are not using partitions, choose
None.
You must choose a valid directory number range for
auto-registration before you can choose a partition and
external phone number mask.
The partition field resets if you disable auto-registration.
11-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 11
Table 11-1
Auto-Registration Configuration Settings (continued)
Field Name
Description
External Phone
Number Mask
Specify the mask used to format caller ID information for

external (outbound) calls made from the auto-registered
devices. The mask can contain up to 50 characters. Enter
the literal digits that you want to appear in the caller ID
information, and use Xs to represent the directory number
of the auto-registered device.
For example, if you specify a mask of 972813XXXX and
enable the Use External Phone Number Mask option on
the route pattern used to make the external call, an external
call from extension 1234 displays a caller ID number of
9728131234. If you specify a mask of all literal digits
(such as 9728135000) to represent a main attendant
number, that literal number becomes the caller ID
displayed for an external call from any auto-registered
device.

78-13310-01
11-5
Chapter 11
Table 11-1
Field Name
Auto-Registration Configuration Settings (continued)
Description
Voice Message Box Enter a mask used to format the voice message box
Mask
number for auto-registered phones. For example, if you
specify a mask of 972813XXXX, then the voice message
box number for directory number 7253 becomes
9728137253. If you do not enter a mask, then the voice
message box number is the same as the directory number
(7253 in this example).
By default, Cisco CallManager sets the voice message box
number to the same value as the directory number. You can
change the voice message box number when configuring
the directory number. See the Configuring Directory
Numbers section on page 42-27 for more information.
Auto-registration
Cisco CallManager disables auto-registration by default
Disabled on this
to prevent unauthorized connections to the network. When
Cisco CallManager auto-registration is disabled, you must configure the
directory numbers manually whenever you add new
devices to your network.
Uncheck the auto-registration Disabled option to

enable auto-registration for this Cisco CallManager.
Check the Auto-registration Disabled option to

disable auto-registration for this Cisco CallManager.
You can disable auto-registration by setting the Starting

Directory Number and Ending Directory Number to the
same value.
If starting and ending directory numbers are specified
when you disable auto-registration by checking this
option, Cisco CallManager sets the starting and ending
directory numbers to the same value.
The partition and external phone mask information fields
also reset when you disable auto-registration.
11-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 11
Reusing Auto-Registration Numbers
Related Topics

When you connect a new device to the network, Cisco CallManager assigns the
next available (unused) auto-registration directory number to that device. If you
manually change the directory number of an auto-registered device, or if you
delete that device from the database, Cisco CallManager can reuse the
auto-registration directory number of that device.
When a device attempts to auto-register, Cisco CallManager searches the range of
auto-registration numbers you specified and tries to find the next available
directory number to assign to the device. It begins the search with the next
directory number in sequence after the last one assigned. If it reaches the ending
directory number in the range, Cisco CallManager continues to search from the
starting directory number in the range.
You can use the following procedure to reset the range of auto-registration
directory numbers and force Cisco CallManager to search from the starting
number in the range.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Choose the Cisco CallManager where you want to reset auto-registration.
Step 4
Write down the current settings for Starting Directory Number and Ending
Directory Number.
Step 5
Click Auto-registration Disabled on this Cisco CallManager.
Caution
New phones cannot auto-register while auto-registration is disabled.

78-13310-01
11-7
Chapter 11
Step 6
Click Update.
Step 7
Set the Starting Directory Number and Ending Directory Number to their previous
values (or to new values, if desired).
Step 8
Click Update.
Related Topics
11-8
78-13310-01
A R T
Route Configuration
C H A P T E R
12
Partition Configuration
A partition contains a list of route patterns (directory number (DN) and route
patterns). Partitions facilitate call routing by dividing the route plan into logical
subsets based on organization, location, and call type. For more information about
partitions, refer to Partitions and Calling Search Spaces in the
Use the following topics to add or delete route partitions:
Finding a Partition, page 12-1
Adding a Partition, page 12-3
Updating a Partition, page 12-4
Deleting a Partition, page 12-5
Partition Configuration Settings, page 12-3
Finding a Partition
Because you might have several partitions in your network, Cisco CallManager
lets you locate specific partitions based on specific criteria. Use the following
procedure to locate partitions.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Partition.

The Find and List Partitions pane displays.

78-13310-01
12-1
Chapter 12
Finding a Partition
Step 2
Step 3
From the drop-down list box, choose one of the following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Specify the appropriate search text, if applicable and click Find. You can also
specify how many items per page to display.
Note
To find all partitions registered in the database, click Find without

entering any search text.
A list of discovered partitions displays by:
Partition name
Description
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple partitions from the Find and List Partitions
pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate partitions
and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all of the partitions on
the pane by checking the check box in the matching records title bar
and clicking Delete Selected.
Click the partition from the list of records that matches your search criteria.
The pane displays the partition you choose.
Related Topics
12-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 12
Adding a Partition
Adding a Partition
Perform the following procedure to add a partition.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Partition in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Add a New Partition.
Step 3

Table 12-1 Partition Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Partition Name
Enter a name in the Partition Name field. Ensure each

partition name is unique to the route plan.
Description
Enter a description in the Description field. The

description can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and can contain any combination of spaces,
periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). If
you do not enter a description, the Cisco CallManager
automatically enters a partition name in this field.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your partitions. The

CompanynameLocationCalltype format usually provides a sufficient level of
detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily identify a
partition. For example, CiscoDallasMetroPT identifies a partition for toll-free,
interlocal access and transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in
Dallas.
Tips
You can enter multiple partitions at the same time by entering the partition
name and description, if applicable, in the Partition Name & Description text
box. Remember to use one line for each partition entry and separate the
partition name and description with a comma.

78-13310-01
12-3
Chapter 12
Updating a Partition
Step 4
Click Insert to add the new partition(s).
Note
You can only configure one partition at a time. To configure a different

partition than the one that displays, click Back to Find/List
Partitions and follow the instructions in the Finding a Partition
section on page 12-1 to locate the partition you want to configure.
Related Topics
Updating a Partition
This section describes how to update a partition.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Route Plan > Partition in the menu bar.
Step 2
Locate the partition you want to update. See the Finding a Partition section on
page 12-1.
Step 3
Update the partition name and/or description and click Update.
Related Topics
12-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 12
Deleting a Partition
The following procedure describes how to delete a partition.
Note
You cannot delete a partition if it is assigned to a calling search space.

Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Partition in the menu bar.
Step 2
Locate the partition you want to delete. See the Finding a Partition section on
page 12-1.
Step 3
Check the check box of the partition you want to delete and click Delete Selected.
Tips
You can delete all the partition in the list by checking the check box in the
Matching Record(s) title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
A message displays, stating that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Click OK to delete the partition or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Caution
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct partition before
initiating this action. You cannot retrieve deleted partitions. If a partition is
accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
Tips
You can also delete a partition by locating and displaying the partition you
want to delete and clicking Delete.

78-13310-01
12-5
Chapter 12
Related Topics
12-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
13
Calling Search Space Configuration

A calling search space comprises an ordered list of route partitions, typically
assigned to devices. Calling search spaces determine the partitions where calling
devices search when attempting to complete a call. For more detailed information
on calling search spaces and partitions, refer to Partitions and Calling Search
Spaces in the Cisco CallManager System Guide.
Use the following topics to add, update, copy, or delete a calling search space:
Finding a Calling Search Space, page 13-2
Adding a Calling Search Space, page 13-3
Updating a Calling Search Space, page 13-4
Copying a Calling Search Space, page 13-5
Deleting a Calling Search Space, page 13-6
Calling Search Space Configuration Settings, page 13-7

78-13310-01
13-1
Chapter 13
Finding a Calling Search Space
Finding a Calling Search Space

Because you might have several calling search spaces in your network,
Cisco CallManager lets you locate specific calling search spaces based on specific
criteria. Use the following procedure to locate calling search spaces.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Calling Search Space.

The Find and List Calling Search Spaces pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all calling search spaces registered in the database, click Find
without entering any search text.
A list of discovered calling search spaces displays by:
CSS name
Description
Note
You can delete multiple calling search spaces from the Find and List
Calling Search Spaces pane by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate calling search spaces and clicking Delete Selected. You
can choose all of the calling search spaces on the pane by checking the
check box in the matching records title bar and clicking
Delete Selected.
13-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 13

Adding a Calling Search Space
Step 4
Click the calling search space from the list of records that matches your search
criteria.
The pane displays the calling search space you choose.
Related Topics
Adding a Calling Search Space

The following procedure describes how to add a calling search space.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Calling Search Space in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Add a New Calling Search Space.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert to add the new calling search space.

The message Status: Insert completed displays.
Step 5
To add more calling search spaces, click Add a New Calling Search Space and
repeat this procedure.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
13-3
Chapter 13
Updating a Calling Search Space
Updating a Calling Search Space

The following procedure describes how to update a calling search space.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the calling search space you want to update. See the Finding a Calling
Search Space section on page 13-2.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Update.
Related Topics
13-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 13

Copying a Calling Search Space
Copying a Calling Search Space

The following procedure describes how to copy a calling search space.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the calling search space you want to copy. See the Finding a Calling
Step 3
Check the check box next to the calling search space you want to copy.
Step 4
Click the Copy icon of that calling search space.

The pane displays the copy of the calling search space.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Insert to add the new calling search space.
Tips
You can also copy a calling search space by locating and displaying the calling
search space you want to copy and clicking Copy. Then, follow the
instructions in Step 5 through Step 6.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
13-5
Chapter 13
Deleting a Calling Search Space
Deleting a Calling Search Space

The following procedure describes how to delete a calling search space.
Note
You cannot delete calling search spaces that are being used by devices or
translation patterns.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the calling search space you want to delete. See the Finding a Calling
Step 3
Check the check box of the calling search space you want to delete and click
Delete Selected.
Step 4
Click OK to delete the calling search space or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Caution
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct calling search space
before initiating this action. You cannot retrieve deleted calling search spaces.
If a calling search space is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
Tips
You can also delete a calling search space by locating and displaying the
calling search space you want to delete and clicking Delete.
Related Topics
13-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 13

Calling Search Space Configuration Settings

Table 13-1 describes the calling search space configuration settings.
Table 13-1 Calling Search Space Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Calling Search Space Enter a name in the Calling Search Space Name field.
Name
The name can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric characters
and can contain any combination of spaces, periods (.),
hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure each
calling search space name is unique to the plan.
Note
Use concise and descriptive names for your

calling search spaces. The
CompanynameLocationCalltype format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail
and is short enough to enable you to quickly
and easily identify a calling search space. For
example, CiscoDallasMetroCS identifies a
calling search space for toll-free, interlocal
access and transport area (LATA) calls from
the Cisco office in Dallas.
Description
Enter a description in the Description field. The

description can comprise up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and can contain any combination of spaces,
periods (.), hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_).
Available Partitions
Choose partitions in the Available Partition list box and

add them to the Selected Partition list box by clicking the
arrow buttons between the two list boxes.
Selected Partition
To change the priority of a partition, choose a partition

name in the Selected Partitions list box. Move the
partition up or down in the list by clicking the arrows on
the right side of the list box.

78-13310-01
13-7
Chapter 13
Related Topics
13-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
14
Route Filter Configuration

Route filters, along with route patterns, use dialed-digit strings to determine how
a call is handled.
You can only use route filters with North American Numbering Plan (NANP)
route patterns; that is, route patterns that use an at symbol (@) wildcard. Route
filters allow you to determine which route patterns your users can dial; for
example, whether your users can manually select a long-distance carrier (by
dialing 101 plus a carrier access code).
See Understanding Route Plans in the Cisco CallManager System Guide for
more information.
Tips
Always add and define the route filter first and then add the route filter to the
route pattern.
Use the following topics to add, update, copy, or delete a route filter:
Finding a Route Filter, page 14-2
Adding a Route Filter, page 14-4
Updating a Route Filter, page 14-5
Copying a Route Filter, page 14-6
Adding Route Filter Clauses, page 14-8
Removing Route Filter Clauses, page 14-9
Deleting a Route Filter, page 14-10

78-13310-01
14-1
Chapter 14
Finding a Route Filter
Route Filter Tag Descriptions, page 14-11
Route Filter Configuration Settings, page 14-7

Because you might have several route filters in your network, Cisco CallManager
lets you locate specific route filters based on specific criteria. Use the following
procedure to locate route filters.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Filter.

The Find and List Route Filters pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all route filters registered in the database, click Find without
A list of discovered route filters displays by:
Route filter name
Clause
14-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple route filters from the Find and List Route
Filters pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate route
filters and clicking Delete Selected. You can choose all of theroute
filters on the pane by checking the check box in the matching records
title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Click the route filter from the list of records that matches your search criteria.
The pane displays the route filter you choose.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
14-3
Chapter 14
Adding a Route Filter
Adding a Route Filter

The following procedure describes how to add a route filter.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Filter in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Add a New Route Filter.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Continue.
Step 5
Choose the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where appropriate, to
create a clause for this route filter.
Note
Step 6
For help with entering data for route filter tags and operators, refer to
the Route Filter Tag Descriptions section on page 14-11.
Click Insert to add the filter.

The message Status: Insert completed displays.
Related Topics
Understanding Route Plans, Cisco CallManager System Guide
14-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Updating a Route Filter
Updating a Route Filter

The following procedure describes how to update a route filter.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route filter you want to update. See the Finding a Route Filter section
on page 14-2.
Step 3
In the Dial Plan drop-down list box, choose North American Numbering Plan.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Update.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
14-5
Chapter 14
Copying a Route Filter
Copying a Route Filter

The following procedure describes how to copy a route filter.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to copy. See the Finding a Route Filter section
on page 14-2.
Step 3
Check the check box next to the route filter you want to copy.
Step 4
Click the Copy icon of that route filter.

The pane displays the copy of the route filter.
Step 5
In the Route Filter Name field, enter the name for this route filter.
Step 6
Note
Step 7
Tips
Click Insert to add the new route filter.
You can also copy a route filter by locating and displaying the route filter you
want to copy and clicking Copy. Then, follow the instructions in Step 5
through Step 6.
Related Topics
14-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Route Filter Configuration Settings
Route Filter Configuration Settings

Table 14-1 describes the route filter configuration settings.
Table 14-1 Route Filter Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Dial Plan
Choose North American Numbering Plan from the

drop-down list.
Route Filter Name
Enter a name in the Route Filter Name field. The name

can contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters and can
contain any combination of spaces, periods (.), hyphens
(-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure each route
filter name is unique to the route plan.
Note
Use concise and descriptive names for your

route filters. The
CompanynameLocationCalltype format
usually provides a sufficient level of detail
and is short enough to enable you to quickly
and easily identify a route filter. For example,
CiscoDallasMetro identifies a route filter for
toll-free interlocal access and transport area
(LATA) calls from the Cisco office in Dallas.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
14-7
Chapter 14
Adding Route Filter Clauses
Adding Route Filter Clauses

Adding route filter clauses allows you to expand upon an existing route filter by
incorporating additional operators and entries for existing tags using a logical OR.
You can add route filter clauses either when initially adding a new route filter or
when updating an existing route filter. This procedure describes adding a route
filter clause to an existing route filter.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route filter to which you want to add route filter clauses. See the
Finding a Route Filter section on page 14-2.
Step 3
Click Add Clause to display a new route filter clause data entry pane. All the
operator fields for this new clause display NOT-SELECTED.
Step 4
Select the route filter tags and operators and enter data, where appropriate, to
create an additional clause for this route filter.
Note
Step 5
Click Insert to add the clause.

The message Status: Insert completed displays. The new clause displays below
the existing clauses on the pane. (Scroll down, if necessary, to view the new
information.)
Related Topics
14-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Removing Route Filter Clauses
Removing Route Filter Clauses

You can remove route filter clauses either when setting up a new route filter or
when updating an existing route filter. This procedure describes removing a route
filter clause from an existing route filter.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route filter from which you want to remove route filter clauses.
Step 3
Scroll down to the top of the clause you want to remove and click
Remove Clause.
A dialog box appears warning you that you cannot undo removing this route filter
clause.
Caution
Step 4
Each Remove Clause button applies to the clause immediately below the
button. Check carefully to ensure that you are removing the correct clause
before initiating this action. If you accidentally remove a clause, you cannot
returieve it, and you must rebuild it.
Click OK to remove the clause or click Cancel to cancel the action. If you click
OK, the Cisco CallManager removes the clause from the route filter, and the
message Status: Ready displays.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
14-9
Chapter 14
Deleting a Route Filter
Deleting a Route Filter

The following procedure describes how to delete a route filter.
Note
You cannot delete route filters that are being used in route patterns or
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Filter
section on page 14-2.
Step 3
Check the check box of the route filter you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
A message displays stating that you cannot undo this action.
Caution
Step 4
Tips
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct route filter before
initiating this action. You cannot retrieve deleted route filters. If a route filter
is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
Click OK to delete the route filter or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
You can also delete a route filter by locating and displaying the route filter you
want to delete and clicking Delete.
14-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Route Filter Tag Descriptions
Related Topics

The tag serves as the core component of a route filter. A tag applies a name to a
subset of the dialed-digit string. For example, the NANP number 972-555-1234
comprises LOCAL-AREA-CODE (972), OFFICE-CODE (555), and
SUBSCRIBER (1234) route filter tags.
Route filter tags require operators and can require additional values to decide
which calls are filtered.
The values for route filter tag fields can contain the wildcard characters X, *, #, [,
], -, ^, and the numbers 0 through 9. The descriptions in Table 14-2 use the
notations [2-9] and XXXX to represent actual digits. In this notation, [2-9]
represents any single digit in the range 2 through 9, and X represents any single
digit in the range 0 through 9. Therefore, the description The three-digit area
code in the form [2-9]XX means you can enter the actual digits 200 through 999,
or all wildcards, or any mixture of actual digits and wildcards that results in a
pattern with that range.
Table 14-2 Route Filter Tags
Tag
Description
AREA-CODE
This three-digit area code in the form

[2-9]XX identifies the area code for
long-distance calls.
COUNTRY CODE
These one-, two-, or three-digit codes

specify the destination country for
international calls.

78-13310-01
14-11
Chapter 14
Table 14-2 Route Filter Tags (continued)
Tag
Description
END-OF-DIALING
This single character identifies the end

of the dialed-digit string. The # character
serves as the end-of-dialing signal for
international numbers dialed within the
NANP.
INTERNATIONAL-ACCESS
This two-digit access code specifies

international dialing. Calls originating in
the U.S. use 01 for this code.
INTERNATIONAL-DIRECT-DIAL
This one-digit code identifies a

direct-dialed international call. Calls
originating in the U.S. use 1 for this
code.
INTERNATIONAL-OPERATOR
This one-digit code identifies an

operator-assisted international call. This
code is 0 for calls originating in the U.S.
LOCAL-AREA-CODE
This three-digit local area code in the

form [2-9]XX identifies the local area
code for 10-digit local calls.
LOCAL-DIRECT-DIAL

direct-dialed local call. NANP calls use
1 for this code.
LOCAL-OPERATOR
This one-digit code identifies an

operator-assisted local call. NANP calls
use 0 for this code.
LONG-DISTANCE-DIRECT-DIAL

direct-dialed long distance call. NANP
calls use 1 for this code.
LONG-DISTANCE-OPERATOR
These one- or two-digit codes identify an

operator-assisted, long-distance call
within the NANP. Operator-assisted calls
use 0 for this code, and operator access
uses 00.
14-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Table 14-2 Route Filter Tags (continued)
Tag
Description
NATIONAL-NUMBER
This tag specifies the nation-specific

part of the digit string for an
international call.
OFFICE-CODE
This tag designates the first three digits

of a seven-digit directory number in the
form [2-9]XX.
SATELLITE-SERVICE
This one-digit code provides access to

satellite connections for international
calls.
SERVICE
This three-digit code designates services

such as 911 for emergency, 611 for
repair, and 411 for information.
SUBSCRIBER
This tag specifies the last four digits of a

seven-digit directory number in the form
XXXX.
TRANSIT-NETWORK
This four-digit value identifies a

long-distance carrier.
Do not include the leading 101 carrier
access code prefix in the
TRANSIT-NETWORK value. Refer to
TRANSIT-NETWORK-ESCAPE for
more information.
TRANSIT-NETWORK-ESCAPE
This three-digit value precedes the

long-distance carrier identifier. The
value for this field is 101. Do not include
the four-digit carrier identification code
in the TRANSIT-NETWORK-ESCAPE
value. Refer to TRANSIT-NETWORK
for more information.
Route filter tag operators determine whether a call is filtered based on the
existence, and sometimes the contents, of the dialed-digit string associated with
that tag. The operators EXISTS and DOES-NOT-EXIST simply check for the

78-13310-01
14-13
Chapter 14
existence of that part of the dialed-digit string. The operator == matches the actual
dialed digits with the specified value or pattern. Table 14-3 describes the
operators that can be used with route filter tags.
Table 14-3 Route Filter Operators
Operator
Description
NOT-SELECTED
Specifies do not filter calls based on the dialed-digit

string associated with this tag.
Note
EXISTS
Specifies filter calls when the dialed-digit string

associated with this tag is found.
Note
DOES-NOT-EXIST
Cisco CallManager routes the call only if the

dialed-digit string does not contain a sequence
of digits associated with the tag.

associated with this tag matches the specified value.
Note
Caution

dialed-digit string contains a sequence of
digits associated with the tag.

associated with this tag is not found.
Note
==
The presence or absence of the tage with

which the operator is associated does not
prevent Cisco CallManager from routing the
call.

dialed-digit string contains a sequence of
digits associated with the tag and within the
numbering range specified in the attached
field.
Do not enter route filter tag values for tags using the operators EXISTS,
DOES-NOT-EXIST, or NOT-SELECTED.
14-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 14

Examples
Example 1: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE and the operator

DOES-NOT-EXIST selects all dialed-digit strings that do not include an area
code.
Example 2: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE, the operator ==, and the entry
515 selects all dialed-digit strings that include the 515 area code.
Example 3: A route filter that uses AREA-CODE, the operator ==, and the entry
5[2-9]X selects all dialed-digit strings that include area codes in the range of 520
through 599.
Example 4: A route filter that uses TRANSIT-NETWORK, the operator ==, and
the entry 0288, along with TRANSIT-NETWORK-ESCAPE, the operator ==, and
the entry 101, selects all dialed-digit strings with the carrier access code 1010288.

78-13310-01
14-15
Chapter 14
14-16
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
15
Route Group Configuration

A route group allows you to designate the order in which gateways are selected.
It allows you to prioritize a list of gateways and ports for outgoing trunk selection.
For example, if you use two long-distance carriers, you could add a route group
so that long-distance calls to the less expensive carrier are given priority. Calls
only route to the more expensive carrier if the first trunk is unavailable.
Use the following topics to add or delete a route group or to add devices to or
remove devices from a route group:
Finding a Route Group, page 15-1
Adding a Route Group, page 15-3
Adding Devices to a Route Group, page 15-4
Removing Devices from a Route Group, page 15-5
Updating a Route Group, page 15-6
Deleting a Route Group, page 15-7
Route Group Configuration Settings, page 15-8
Finding a Route Group


78-13310-01
15-1
Chapter 15
Finding a Route Group
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Group.

The Find and List Route Groups pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all route groups registered in the database, click Find without
A list of discovered route groups displays by:
Note
Step 4
Route group name
You can delete multiple route groups from the Find and List Route
Groups pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate route
groups and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all of the route
groups on the pane by checking the check box in the matching records
Click the route group from the list of records that matches your search criteria.
The pane displays the route group you choose.
Related Topics
15-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 15

Adding a Route Group
Adding a Route Group

The following procedure describes how to add a route group.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Group in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Add a New Route Group.
Step 3
Enter a name in the Route Group Name field. The name can contain up to 50
alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces, periods (.),
hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure each route group name is
unique to the route plan.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your route groups. The
CompanynameLocationGroup format usually provides a sufficient level of
detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily identify a route
group. For example, CiscoDallasAA1 identifies a Cisco Access Analog route
group for the Cisco office in Dallas.
Step 4
Click Continue.
Step 5
Choose the appropriate settings as described in Table 15-1.
Step 6
Click Insert to add this route group with one device.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
15-3
Chapter 15
Adding Devices to a Route Group
Adding a Route List, page 16-3
Adding Route Groups to a Route List, page 16-4
Adding Devices to a Route Group

You can add devices to a new route group or to an existing route group. The
following procedure describes adding a device to an existing route group.
Before You Begin
You must define one or more gateway devices before performing this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group to which you want to add a device. See the Finding a
Route Group section on page 15-1.
Step 3
Click Add Device.
Step 4
Choose the appropriate settings as described in Table 15-1.
Step 5
Click Insert to add this gateway and selected ports to the route group.
Step 6
In the Order drop-down list box, choose the order in which the new device is to
be accessed in this route group.
Step 7
Click Update to update the device order for this route group.
Related Topics
15-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 15

Removing Devices from a Route Group
Removing Devices from a Route Group

You can remove devices from a new route group or from an existing route group.
The following procedure describes removing a device from an existing route
group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group from which you want to remove a device. See the Finding
a Route Group section on page 15-1.
Step 3
Under the Route Group Members subheading, check the check boxes to the left of
the devices to be deleted.
Step 4
Click Remove Device.

A dialog box appears warning you that you cannot undo removing devices from a
route group.
Step 5
Click OK to remove the devices or click Cancel to cancel the action. If you click
OK, Cisco CallManager removes the devices from the route group.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
15-5
Chapter 15
Updating a Route Group
Updating a Route Group

The following procedure describes how to update a route group.
Before You Begin
Before performing this procedure, ensure the route group to be updated is already
configured.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group that you want to update. See the Finding a Route Group
Step 3
Update the appropriate fields as described in Table 15-1.
Step 4
Click Update.
Related Topics
15-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 15

Deleting a Route Group
Deleting a Route Group

The following procedure describes how to delete a route group.
Note
You cannot delete a route group that is referenced by one or more route lists.
You must remove the route group from all route lists to which it belongs before
deleting the route group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route group you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Group
Step 3
Check the check box next to the route group you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
A dialog box appears warning you that you cannot undo deleting route groups.
Step 4
Click OK to delete the group or click Cancel to cancel the action. If you click
OK, the Cisco CallManager removes the route group from the route group list.
Other route groups or route patterns can now select the gateways that belonged to
the deleted route group, provided that all ports were available with the gateways.
Note
You can delete multiple route groups from the Find and List Route
Groups pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate route
groups and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all of the route
groups on the pane by checking the check box in the matching records
Related Topics

78-13310-01
15-7
Chapter 15
Route Group Configuration Settings
Route Group Configuration Settings

Table 15-1 describes the route group configuration settings.
Table 15-1 Route Group Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Device Name
From the Device Name drop-down list box, choose the

device you want to add to the group.
Port
If this device supports individually configurable ports,

choose the port . (Cisco Access Analog and Cisco MGCP
Analog gateways allow you to choose individual ports.)
Otherwise, choose All (default value).
Order
Choose the order in which you want to access this port or

device (1 having the highest priority).
Related Topics
Understanding Route Plans, Cisco CallManager Administration Guide
15-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
16
Route List Configuration

Route groups consisting of a list of resources (gateways) make up route lists. A
route list associates a set of route groups with a route pattern and determines the
order in which those route groups are accessed. The order controls the progress of
the search for available trunk devices for outgoing calls.
A route list comprises a collection of resources (gateways, route groups) that route
calls that match the defined route pattern. Once the Cisco CallManager
determines a call that is to be routed through a defined route list, the
Cisco CallManager finds the first available device based on the order of the route
group(s) defined in a route list. Each route list should have at least one route
group. Within each route group, at least one device, such as a gateway, is
available. Cisco CallManager can select some, or all, ports as resources in each
route group based on device type. Some devices, such as digital access, only allow
you to select all ports.
Each route list can contain the same route groups that other route lists have
already selected.
Use the following topics to add or remove route lists or to add, remove, or change
the order of route groups in a route list:
Finding Route Lists, page 16-2
Removing Route Groups from a Route List, page 16-6
Changing the Order of Route Groups in a Route List, page 16-7
Deleting a Route List, page 16-8

78-13310-01
16-1
Chapter 16
Finding Route Lists
Finding Route Lists

Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route List.

The Find and List Route Lists pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all route lists registered in the database, click Find without
A list of discovered route lists displays by:
Route list name
Description
Note
You can delete multiple route lists from the Find and List Route Lists
pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate route lists
and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all of the route lists on
the pane by checking the check box in the matching records title bar
and clicking Delete Selected.
16-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 16

Adding a Route List
Step 4
Click the route list from the list of records that matches your search criteria.
The pane displays the route list you choose.
Related Topics
Adding a Route List

The following procedure describes how to add a route list.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route List in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Add a New Route List.
Step 3
Enter a name in the Route List Name field. The name can comprise up to 50
alphanumeric characters and can contain any combination of spaces, periods (.),
hyphens (-), and underscore characters (_). Ensure each route list name is unique
to the route plan.
Timesaver
Use concise and descriptive names for your route lists. The
CompanynameLocationCalltype format usually provides a sufficient level of
detail and is short enough to enable you to quickly and easily identify a route
list. For example, CiscoDallasMetro identifies a route list for toll-free, interlocal access transport area (LATA) calls from the Cisco office in Dallas.
Cisco CallManager automatically inserts a description in the Description field.
You can, however, edit this field.

78-13310-01
16-3
Chapter 16
Adding Route Groups to a Route List
Step 4
Click Insert to add this route list.
Step 5
To add a route group to this list, click Add Route Group and perform Steps 4
through 8 of the Adding Route Groups to a Route List section on page 16-4 .
Note
For called party and calling party transformation information, you can
click on the Route Details for Route Groups link on the left side of
the pane. This takes you to the Route Details Configuration pane.
Related Topics

You can add route groups to a new route list or to an existing route list. The
following procedure describes adding a route group to an existing route list.
Before You Begin
You must build one or more route groups and add a route list before performing
this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list to which you want to add a route group. See the Finding
Route Lists section on page 16-2.
Step 3
Click Add Route Group.
16-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 16

Step 4
From the Select Route Group drop-down list box, choose a route group to add to
the list.
Step 5
Click Add.
Step 6
If you need to manipulate the calling party number on calls routed through this
route group, set up the calling party transformations in the appropriate fields.
Note
Step 7
If you need to manipulate the dialed digits on calls routed through this route
group, set up the called party transformations in the appropriate fields.
Note
Step 8
For more information on calling party transform, see Calling Party

Transformations Settings section on page 20-19.
For more information on calling party transform, see Called Party

Transformations Settings section on page 20-21
Click Insert to add the route group.

The route details information appears in the Route Details for Route Groups list
on the left side of the pane.
Step 9
To add more route groups to this list, click Add Route Group to the Current
Route List and repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
16-5
Chapter 16
Removing Route Groups from a Route List
Removing Route Groups from a Route List

You can remove route groups from a new route list or from an existing route list.
The following procedure describes removing a route group from an existing route
list.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list from which you want to remove a route group. See the
Finding Route Lists section on page 16-2.
Step 3
From the Selected Route Groups list, choose one or more route group names.
Note
Step 4
To select multiple route groups from the list, press the Shift key and
click on the desired route groups.
Click Remove Route Groups.

A dialog box appears warning you that you cannot undo removing route groups
from a route list.
Step 5
Click OK to remove the route group or click Cancel to cancel the action. If you
click OK, when the pane refreshes, the route group no longer appears in the route
list, and the message Status: Update Completed displays.
Related Topics
16-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 16

Changing the Order of Route Groups in a Route List
Changing the Order of Route Groups in a Route List

Cisco CallManager accesses route groups in the order in which they appear in the
route list. The following procedure allows you to change the access order of route
groups.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list in which you want to change the order of a route group. See
the Finding Route Lists, page 16-2.
Step 3
From the Selected Route Groups list, choose a route group name.
Step 4
Click the up or down arrows on the right side of the list box to move the route
group up or down in the list.
Step 5
Click Update.
Note
For called party and calling party transformation information, you can
click on the Route Details for ... link in the Route Details for Route
Groups list. This takes you to the Route Details Configuration pane.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
16-7
Chapter 16
Deleting a Route List
Deleting a Route List

Cisco CallManager associates route lists with both route groups and route
patterns; however, deletion of route groups and route patterns does not occur when
the route list is deleted.
The following procedure describes how to delete a route list.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route list you want to delete. See the Finding Route Lists section on
page 16-2.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A dialog box appears warning you that you cannot undo removing a route list.
Step 4
Click OK to remove the route list or click Cancel to cancel the action.
Caution
A route list cannot be deleted if it is associated with one or more route

patterns.
Related Topics
16-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
17
Route Pattern Configuration

A route pattern comprises a string of digits (an address) and a set of associated
digit manipulations that can be assigned to a route list or a gateway. Route patterns
provide flexibility in network design. They work in conjunction with route filters
and route lists to direct calls to specific devices and to include, exclude, or modify
specific digit patterns.
Refer to Understanding Route Plans in Cisco CallManager System Guide for
more detailed route pattern information.
Use the following topics to add, update, copy, or delete a route pattern:
Finding a Route Pattern, page 17-1
Adding a Route Pattern, page 17-3
Updating a Route Pattern, page 17-5
Copying a Route Pattern, page 17-6
Deleting a Route Pattern, page 17-7
Route Pattern Configuration Settings, page 17-8
Finding a Route Pattern

Because you might have several route patterns in your network,
Cisco CallManager lets you locate specific route patterns based on specific
criteria. Use the following procedure to locate route patterns.

78-13310-01
17-1
Chapter 17
Finding a Route Pattern
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Pattern.

The Find and List Route Patterns pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all route patterns registered in the database, click Find without
A list of discovered route patterns displays by:
Route pattern
Partition
Route filter
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple route patterns from the Find and List Route
Patterns pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate
route patterns and clicking Delete Selected. You can delete all of the
route patterns on the pane by checking the check box in the matching
records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Click the route pattern from the list of records that matches your search criteria.
The pane displays the route pattern you choose.
17-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 17

Adding a Route Pattern
Related Topics

This section describes how to add a route pattern.
Before You Begin
Ensure that the following items are configured in Cisco CallManager:
Timesaver
Gateway
Route list
Partition
Route filter
Assigning 8XXX to a gateway routes all directory numbers 8000 to 8999 out
the gateway. Similarly, 82XX routes directory numbers 8200 to 8299. See the
Special Characters and Settings section on page 20-1 for more information
about wildcards.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Add a New Route Pattern.
Step 3

78-13310-01
17-3
Chapter 17
Step 4
Click Insert.
Note
Once you click Insert and the pane refreshes, an (Edit) link appears
on the pane next to the Gateway/Route List field. This link takes you
to the Gateway Configuration or Route List Configuration pane for
reference; depending on whether the Gateway/Route List field
contains a gateway or a route list; so you can see the route group(s)
included in that route list, if route group(s) was specified. If not, you
see devices.
Related Topics
Route Pattern Wildcards and Special Characters, page 20-1
17-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 17

Updating a Route Pattern
Updating a Route Pattern

This section describes how to update a route pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to update. See the Finding a Route Pattern
Note
If you change the gateway/route list, you must hit Update prior to
selecting the Edit link. Otherwise, youre linked to the previous
gateway/route list.
Step 3
Update the appropriate settings as described in the Route Pattern Configuration

Settings section on page 17-8.
Step 4
Click Update.
The updated route pattern displays.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
17-5
Chapter 17
Copying a Route Pattern
Copying a Route Pattern

This section describes how to copy a route pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Pattern in the menu bar.
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to copy. See the Finding a Route Pattern
Step 3
Check the check box next to the route pattern you want to copy.
Step 4
Click the Copy icon of that route pattern.

The pane displays the copy of the route pattern.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Insert to add the new route pattern.
Note
Tips
Once you click Insert and the pane refreshes, an (Edit) link appears
on the pane next to the Gateway/Route List field. This link takes you
to the Gateway Configuration or Route List Configuration pane for
reference; depending on whether the Gateway/Route List field
contains a gateway or a route list; so you can see the route group(s)
included in that route list, if route group(s) was specified. If not, you
see devices.
You can also copy a route pattern by locating and displaying the route pattern
you want to copy and clicking Copy. Then, follow the instructions in Step 5
through Step 6.
Related Topics
17-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 17

Deleting a Route Pattern
Deleting a Route Pattern

This section describes how to delete a route pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to delete. See the Finding a Route Pattern
Step 3
Check the check box of the route pattern you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
Step 4
Tips
Click OK to delete the route pattern or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
You can also delete a route pattern by locating and displaying the route pattern
you want to delete and clicking Delete.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
17-7
Chapter 17
Route Pattern Configuration Settings

Table 17-1 describes the avaiable fields on the Route Pattern Configuration pane.
Table 17-1 Route Pattern Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Route Pattern
Enter the route pattern, including numbers and wildcards

(do not use spaces); for example, 9.@ for typical local
access, or 8XXX for a typical private network numbering
plan.
Note
Ensure the directory route pattern, using the

chosen partition, route filter, and numbering
plan combination, is unique. Check the route
pattern, translation pattern, directory number,
call park number, call pickup number, or
Meet Me number if you receive an error
indicating duplicate entries.
See the Route Pattern Wildcards and Special

Characters section on page 20-1 for more information
about wildcards.
Partition
Choose a partition. If you do not want to assign a

partition, choose None. See the Partition
Configuration section on page 12-1 for more
information on how to use partitions.
Numbering Plan
Choose a numbering plan.
Route Filter
If your route pattern includes the @ wildcard, you may

choose a route filter. Choosing a route filter restricts
certain number patterns and are optional.
17-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 17

Table 17-1 Route Pattern Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Gateway/Route List
Choose the gateway or route list for which you are

adding a route pattern.
Note
Route Option
If at least one port of the defined gateway

included in a route group does not exist, or
has an assigned DN, this drop-down list box
does not include that gateway. When a
gateway is chosen in the drop-down list box,
all the ports are being used to route/block this
route pattern. This is not true for MGCP
gateways.
The Route Option designation indicates whether you

want this route pattern used for routing calls (such as 9.@
or 8[2-9]XX) or for blocking calls. Choose the Route this
pattern or Block this pattern radio button.
Provide Outside Dial Check the check box if appropriate.

Tone
Urgent Priority
Check the check box if appropriate.
Use Calling Party's

External Phone
Number Mask
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone
number used for CLID on outgoing calls. You may also
configure an External Phone Number Mask on all phone
devices.
Note
Calling Party
Transform Mask
The calling party transformation settings

assigned to the route groups in a route list
override any calling party transformation
settings assigned to a route pattern associated
with that route list.
Enter a transformation mask value. Valid entries include

the digits 0 through 9, the wildcard character X, and
blank. If this field is blank and the preceding field is not
checked, no calling party transformation takes place. See
the Calling Party Transformations Settings section on
page 20-19 for more information.

78-13310-01
17-9
Chapter 17
Table 17-1 Route Pattern Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Discard Digits
Choose the discard digits instructions you want

associated with this route pattern from the Discard Digits
drop-down list box. See the Discard Digits Instructions
section on page 20-5 for more information.
Called Party
Transform Mask

blank. If the field is blank, no transformation takes place.
Cisco CallManager sends the dialed digits exactly as
dialed.
Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls)
Enter prefix digits in the Prefix Digits (Outgoing Calls)

field. Valid entries include the digits 0 through 9, #, *,
and blank.
Note
The appended prefix digit does not affect

which directory numbers route to the
assigned device.
Related Topics
17-10
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
18
Translation Pattern Configuration

The Cisco CallManager uses translation patterns to manipulate dialed digits
before routing a call. In some cases, the system does not use the dialed number.
In other cases, the public switched telephone network (PSTN) does not recognize
the dialed number.
Refer to Understanding Route Plans in the Cisco CallManager Administration
Guide for more detailed translation pattern information.
Use the following topics to add, update, copy, or delete a translation pattern:
Finding a Translation Pattern, page 18-1
Adding a Translation Pattern, page 18-3
Updating a Translation Pattern, page 18-4
Copying a Translation Pattern, page 18-5
Deleting a Translation Pattern, page 18-6
Translation Pattern Configuration Settings, page 18-7
Finding a Translation Pattern

Because you might have several translation patterns in your network,
Cisco CallManager lets you locate specific translation patterns based on specific
criteria. Use the following procedure to locate translation patterns.

78-13310-01
18-1
Chapter 18
Finding a Translation Pattern
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Translation Pattern.

The Find and List Translation Patterns pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
Note
To find all translation patterns registered in the database, click Find

without entering any search text.
A list of discovered translation patterns displays by:
Translation pattern
Partition
Route filter
Note
Step 4
You can delete multiple translation patterns from the Find and List
Translation Patterns pane by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate translation patterns and clicking Delete Selected. You can
delete all of the translation patterns on the pane by checking the check
box in the matching records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Click the translation pattern from the list of records that matches your search
criteria.
The pane displays the translation pattern you choose.
18-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 18

Adding a Translation Pattern
Related Topics
Adding a Translation Pattern

This section describes how to add a translation pattern.
Before You Begin
Configure the following Cisco CallManager items before adding a translation

pattern:
Partition
Route filter
Calling search space
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Add a New Translation Pattern.
Step 3
Enter the appropriate cofiguration settings as described in Table 18-1.
Step 4
Click Insert.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
18-3
Chapter 18
Updating a Translation Pattern
Updating a Translation Pattern

This section describes how to update a translation pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the translation pattern you want to update. See the Finding a Translation
Pattern section on page 18-1.
Step 3
Update the appropriate settings as described in the Translation Pattern

Configuration Settings section on page 18-7.
Note
Step 4
Ensure the route pattern, using the selected partition, route filter, and
numbering plan combination, is unique. Check the route pattern,
translation pattern, directory number, call park number, call pickup
number, or Meet-Me number configuration panes if you receive an
error indicating duplicate entries.
Click Update.
The pane displays the updated translation pattern and displays Status: Update
Completed.
Related Topics
18-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 18

Copying a Translation Pattern
Copying a Translation Pattern

This section describes how to copy a translation pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the route pattern you want to copy. See the Finding a Translation Pattern
Step 3
Check the check box next to the translation pattern you want to copy.
Step 4
Click the Copy icon of that translation pattern.

The pane displays the copy of the translation pattern.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Insert to add the new route pattern.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
18-5
Chapter 18
Deleting a Translation Pattern
Deleting a Translation Pattern

This section describes how to delete a translation pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Locate the translation pattern you want to delete. See the Finding a Translation
Pattern section on page 18-1.
Step 3
Check the check box of the translation pattern you want to delete and click Delete
Selected.
Step 4
Caution
Tips
Click OK to delete the translation pattern or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Check carefully to ensure that you are deleting the correct translation pattern
before initiating this action. You cannot retrieve deleted translation patterns.
If a translation pattern is accidentally deleted, you must rebuild it.
You can also delete a translation pattern by locating and displaying the
translation pattern you want to delete and clicking Delete.
Related Topics
18-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 18

Translation Pattern Configuration Settings

Table 18-1 describes the available fields on the Translation Pattern Configuration
pane.
Table 18-1 Translation Pattern Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Translation Pattern
Enter the translation pattern, including numbers and

wildcards (do not use spaces) in the Translation Pattern
field. For example, enter 9.@ for typical local access or
8XXX for a typical private network numbering plan.
Note
Ensure the translation pattern, using the

chosen partition, route filter, and numbering
plan combination, is unique. Check the route
pattern, translation pattern, directory number,
call park number, call pickup number, or
Meet Me number if you receive an error
indicating duplicate entries.
Partition
Choose a partition. If you do not want to assign a

partition, choose None.
Numbering Plan
Choose a numbering plan.
Route Filter
Choosing an optional route filter restricts certain number

patterns. Refer to the Route Pattern Wildcards and
Special Characters section on page 20-1 and the Route
Filter Configuration section on page 14-1 for more
information.
Calling Search Space Choose the calling search space for which you are adding
a translation pattern, if necessary.
Route Option
The Route Option designation indicates whether you

want this translation pattern used for routing calls (such
as 9.@ or 8[2-9]XX) or for blocking calls. Choose
Route this pattern or Block this pattern radio button.
Provide Outside Dial Check the check box if appropriate.

Tone

78-13310-01
18-7
Chapter 18
Table 18-1 Translation Pattern Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Urgent Priority
Cisco CallManager sets all translation patterns with

urgent priority, and you cannot change the priority of the
Use Calling Party's

External Phone
Number Mask
Check the check box if you want the full, external phone
number used for calling line ID (CLID) on outgoing
calls.
Calling Party
Transform Mask

blank. If this field is blank and the preceding field is not
checked, no calling party transformation takes place. See
the Adding a Route List section on page 16-3 for more
detailed information.
Discard Digits
Choose the discard digits instructions you want

associated with this route pattern. Refer to the Discard
Digits Instructions section on page 20-5 for more
information.
Called Party
Transform Mask

blank. If the field is blank, no transformation takes place.
The dialed digits are sent exactly as dialed.
Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls)
Enter prefix digits . Valid entries include the digits 0

through 9, #, *, and blank.
Note
The appended prefix digit does not affect

which directory numbers route to the
assigned device.
Related Topics
18-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
19
External Route Plan Wizard

The external route plan wizard allows Cisco CallManager administrators to
quickly configure external routing to the public switched telephone network
(PSTN), to private branch exchanges (PBXs), or to other Cisco CallManager
systems.
Refer to the Understanding Route Plans section in Cisco CallManager System
Guide for more detailed information about how the wizard generates the external
route plan.
Use the following topics to set up a route plan with the external route plan wizard:
Creating an External Route Plan, page 19-2
Setting the Routing Options, page 19-3
Providing Tenant Information, page 19-4
Entering Location Information, page 19-5
Selecting Gateways, page 19-6
Providing Gateway Information, page 19-8
Generating the External Route Plan, page 19-9
Confirming the External Route Plan, page 19-10
Finishing the External Route Plan, page 19-11
Deleting an External Route Plan, page 19-12

78-13310-01
19-1
Chapter 19
Creating an External Route Plan
Creating an External Route Plan

The following procedure describes how to begin to create an external route plan.
Before You Begin
Define all gateways before using the external route plan wizard. Choose Device >
Gateway in the menu bar to set up new gateways.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > External Route Plan Wizard in the menu bar.
Step 2
Click Next on the External Route Plan Wizard introduction pane to create an
external route plan.
Related Topics
19-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 19

Setting the Routing Options
Setting the Routing Options

The following procedure describes how to set routing options for the external
route plan.
Procedure
Step 1
Check the check boxes for Local call fallback, toll bypass call fallback, long
distance call fallback, International call fallback, and Equal access suppression as
appropriate.
Note
Step 2
If you choose local call fallback, toll bypass call fallback, long
distance call fallback, or international call fallback, the external route
plan wizard includes route groups with remote gateways in the
associated route lists.
In the Access code for toll bypass and fallback calls field, enter the access code
for calls that are routed to remote or local gateways. Use only numeric values.
(Many systems use 9 for external calls.)
If the access code is entered for toll bypass and fallback calls, that access code is
used in the prefix digits entry for route groups associated with those call types.
Note
Step 3
The access code entered in this field applies to the entire dial plan.
Cisco CallManager allows only one access code per dial plan.
In the Access code for extensions served by a connected PBX field, enter the
access code for calls between the Cisco CallManager and the adjacent PBX.
(Many systems use 8 for calls to adjacent PBX systems.)
If the access code is entered for the extensions served by a connected PBX, that
access code, followed by a dot (.), is appended to the route patterns associated
with these extensions.
Step 4
Click Next.

78-13310-01
19-3
Chapter 19
Providing Tenant Information
Related Topics
Providing Tenant Information

The following procedure describes how to add tenant information for the external
route plan.
Procedure
Step 1
In the Tenant Name field, enter the tenant name. (Generally use the name of the
organization for which the route plan is being built.)
Note
Cisco recommends that you use a short tenant name because it is

incorporated in the calling search space and partition names.
Step 2
In the Number of physical locations in the entire system field, enter the number
of geographical locations associated with the organization. This field should
reflect all Cisco CallManagers in the system that use unique area codes. The
default number of locations is two.
Step 3
Click Next.
19-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 19

Entering Location Information
Related Topics
Entering Location Information

The Location Entry pane provides information for the number of locations
specified on the Tenant Information pane. The following procedure describes how
to add location information for the external route plan.
Procedure
Step 1
In the Location Name field, enter the name of the location if it differs from the
one shown. Ensure each location name is unique for the tenant to which it applies.
Step 2
In the Local Area Code(s) field, enter the local area codes available at this
location. (Local area codes comprise all area codes in the calling area.
Cisco CallManager does not consider calls within the calling area to be
long-distance calls.)
If your area includes more than one local (toll-free) area code, use commas to
separate the area codes in the list. Place the primary local area code first, followed
by the secondary and tertiary local area codes.
Note
The primary local area code sets prefix digits on local route patterns.
Not listing the primary area code in the correct order adversely affects
route filter generation.

78-13310-01
19-5
Chapter 19
Selecting Gateways
Step 3
Enter the 7- or 10-digit number that is the main number for the organization at this
location.
Step 4
Specify the number of digits required for local calls at this location.
The route plan wizard uses this information to determine how many route lists to
create for this location. If you select 10-digit or 7-digit dialing, the wizard creates
one route list for this location. If you select Metro dialing, the wizard creates two
route lists for the location.
Step 5
Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to add location information for other locations.
Related Topics
Selecting Gateways
The following procedure describes how to select gateways for the external route
plan.
Caution
Do not select gateways that existing route groups or route patterns use. The
wizard uses all ports on the selected gateway. If you select a gateway that
existing route groups or route patterns use, the external route plan wizard
overwrites the previously configured ports.
19-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 19

Selecting Gateways
Procedure
Step 1
Check the check boxes for all the gateways associated with this route plan in all
locations.
Step 2
Click Select All if you want to include all the gateways defined in the system.
Step 3
Click Select None if you have selected several gateways and want to deselect all
of your selections.
Note
Step 4
You must select at least one gateway before continuing with this
procedure.
Click Next.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
19-7
Chapter 19
Providing Gateway Information
Providing Gateway Information

The following procedure describes how to add gateway information for the
gateways in the external route plan.
Procedure
Step 1
In the Location of the gateway drop-down list box, choose the gateway location.
Step 2
In the Type of carrier to which the gateway is connected drop-down list box,
choose the type of connection for this gateway.
Step 3
Specify the calling number that will be sent to the adjacent switch when a call is
routed through this gateway.
Step 4
Check the Discard dialed access code... check box if this gateway connects to a
PBX that does not require the Cisco CallManager access code.
Step 5
Enter the range of directory numbers or extension numbers associated with the
adjacent PBX. Use commas to separate multiple entries. Use X wildcard
characters to specify ranges of digits. For example, if the PBX serves extensions
numbered 8000 through 8999 and 9000 through 9999, enter 8XXX,9XXX to
create route patterns for the identified directory number ranges.
Note
If you provide directory number ranges, the wizard generates one

route list for each unique range (route pattern) you enter. If you
provide an access code for the directory number ranges and do not
check the Discard dialed access code... check box, the wizard
generates one route list for each unique range (route pattern) you enter
and precedes each route list with the access code and a dot (.).
Step 6
Click Next.
Step 7
Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to add gateway information for the additional gateways.
Related Topics
19-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 19

Generating the External Route Plan
Generating the External Route Plan

Perform one of the following actions:
Click Next to generate the external route plan.
Note
The wizard can take several minutes to generate the external route
plan, depending on the complexity of the route plan and the
system load. Do not start additional processes that would further
load the system during this time.
Click Cancel to prevent the external route plan wizard from generating this
route plan.
Note
If you click Cancel, Cisco CallManager discards all data

associated with the current route plan. You cannot undo this action
cannot be undone. You must reenter the information.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
19-9
Chapter 19
Confirming the External Route Plan
Confirming the External Route Plan

The following procedure describes how to confirm an external route plan.
Procedure
Step 1
Check the external route plan wizard status report to ensure that the route plan
contains the proper elements.
Step 2
Click Next to complete the external route plan.
Note
Cisco strongly recommends that you print the status report for future
reference.
If you determine that the external route plan is incorrect based on the information
shown in the status report, proceed to the final pane of the external route plan
wizard. The final pane allows you to delete the entire route plan, if needed.
Related Topics
19-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 19

Finishing the External Route Plan
Finishing the External Route Plan

Warning
If the information shown on the external route plan wizard status report is
correct, click Finish to complete the external route plan.
If the information shown on the status report is incorrect, click Delete

External Route Plan to remove all data generated by the external route plan
wizard.
Clicking Delete External Route Plan deletes all data that the external
route plan wizard generated. You cannot undo this action. You must reenter
all external route plan information.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
19-11
Chapter 19
Deleting an External Route Plan
Deleting an External Route Plan

The following procedure describes how to delete an external route plan.
If any element generated by the external route plan wizard is being used in the
system (for example, if Cisco IP phones belong to a generated partition), the
delete function fails. If generated elements are used, you must move the system
components that are using those elements to non-generated elements before using
the delete function.
Warning
This procedure deletes all data that the external route plan wizard
generated. You cannot undo this action. You must reenter all external route
plan information.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > External Route Plan Wizard in the menu bar.
Step 2
To remove all data generated by the external route plan wizard, click Delete
External Route Plan.
Related Topics
19-12
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
20
Special Characters and Settings

Cisco CallManager Administration allows you to use special characters and
settings to perform the following tasks:
Allowing a single route pattern to match a range of numbers
Removing a portion of the dialed digit string
Manipulating the appearance of the calling party number for outgoing calls
Manipulating the dialed digits, or called party number, for outgoing calls
For more information on how to use special characters and settings, see the
following topics:
Discard Digits Instructions, page 20-5
Calling Party Transformations Settings, page 20-19
Called Party Transformations Settings, page 20-21
Route Pattern Wildcards and Special Characters

Route pattern wildcards and special characters allow a single route pattern to
match a range of numbers (addresses). Use these wildcards and special characters
also to build instructions that enable the Cisco CallManager to manipulate a
number before sending it to an adjacent system.
Table 20-1 describes the wildcards and special characters supported by
Cisco CallManager.

78-13310-01
20-1
Chapter 20
Table 20-1 Wildcards and Special Characters
Character
Description
Examples
The at symbol (@) wildcard

matches all NANP numbers.
The route pattern 9.@ routes or

blocks all numbers recognized by
the NANP.
Each route pattern can have

only one @ wildcard.
The following route patterns

examples show NANP numbers
encompassed by the @ wildcard:
1411
19725551234
101028819725551234
01133123456789
The X wildcard matches any

single digit in the range 0
through 9.
The route pattern 9XXX routes or

blocks all numbers in the range
9000 through 9999.
The exclamation point (!)

The route pattern 91! routes or
wildcard matches one or more blocks all numbers in the range
digits in the range 0 through 9. 910 through
91999999999999999999999.
The question mark (?) wildcard

matches zero or more
occurrences of the preceding
digit or wildcard value.
The route pattern 91X? routes or

blocks all numbers in the range 91
through
91999999999999999999999.
The plus sign (+) wildcard

matches one or more
occurrences of the preceding
digit or wildcard value.
The route pattern 91X+ routes or

blocks all numbers in the range
9100 through
91999999999999999999999.
[]
The square bracket ([ ])

characters enclose a range of
values.
The route pattern

813510[012345] routes or blocks
all numbers in the range 8135100
through 8135105.
20-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

Table 20-1 Wildcards and Special Characters (continued)
Character
Description
Examples
The hyphen (-) character, used The route pattern 813510[0-5]

with the square brackets,
routes or blocks all numbers in
denotes a range of values.
the range 8135100 through
8135105.
The circumflex (^) character,

used with the square brackets,
negates a range of values. It
must be the first first character
following the opening bracket
([).
The route pattern 813510[^0-5]

routes or blocks all numbers in
the range 8135106 through
8135109.

only one ^ character.
.
The dot (.) character is used as

a delimiter to separate the
Cisco CallManager access
code from the directory
number.
The route pattern 9.@ identifies

the initial 9 as the
Cisco CallManager access code
in an NANP call.
Use this special character, with

the discard digits instructions,
to strip off the
Cisco CallManager access
code before sending the
number to an adjacent system.
only one . character.

78-13310-01
20-3
Chapter 20
Table 20-1 Wildcards and Special Characters (continued)
Character
Description
Examples
The asterisk (*) character can

provide an extra digit for
special dialed numbers.
You can configure the route

pattern *411 to provide access to
the internal operator for directory
assistance.
The octothorpe (#) character

generally identifies the end of
the dialing sequence.
The route pattern 901181910555#

routes or blocks an international
number dialed from within the
NANP. The # character after the
The # character must be the last
last 5 identifies this as the last
character in the pattern.
digit in the sequence.
Table 20-2 lists Cisco CallManager Administration fields that require route
patterns and shows the valid entries for each field.
Table 20-2 Field Entries
Field
Valid entries
Call Park Number/Range
[^0123456789-]X*#
Calling Party Transform Mask
0123456789X*#
Called Party Transform Mask
0123456789X*#
Caller ID DN (Gateways)
0123456789X*#
Directory Number
[^0123456789-]+?!X*#+
Directory Number (Call Pickup Group) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

External Phone Number Mask
0123456789X*#
Forward All
0123456789*#
Forward Busy
0123456789*#
Forward No Answer
0123456789*#
Meet-Me Conference Number
[^0123456789-]+?!X*#+
Prefix Digits
0123456789*#
Prefix DN (Gateways)
0123456789*#
Route Filter Tag Values
[^0123456789-]X*#
20-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

Discard Digits Instructions
Table 20-2 Field Entries (continued)
Field
Valid entries
Route Pattern
[^0123456789-]+?!X*#+.@
Translation Pattern
[^0123456789-]+?!X*#+.@

A discard digits instruction (DDI) removes a portion of the dialed digit string
before passing the number on to the adjacent system. A DDI must remove portions
of the digit string, for example, when an external access code is needed to route
the call to the PSTN, but the PSTN switch does not expect that access code.
Table 20-3 lists DDIs and describes the effects of applying each DDI to a dialed
number.
Table 20-3 Discard Digits Instructions
DDI
Effect
Example
10-10-Dialing
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
IXC access code
Dialed digit string:

910102889728135000
After applying DDI:
99728135000
10-10-Dialing
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
IXC access code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
Route pattern: 9.@

9101028801181910555#
After applying DDI:
901181910555

78-13310-01
20-5
Chapter 20
Table 20-3 Discard Digits Instructions (continued)
DDI
Effect
Example
11/10D->7D
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
Long-distance
direct-dialing code
Long-distance
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code

919728135000 or
99728135000
After applying DDI:
98135000
This DDI creates a 7-digit

local number from an 11- or
10-digit dialed number.
11/10D->7D
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
Long-distance
direct-dialing code
Long-distance
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
Route pattern: 9.@

919728135000 or
99728135000
After applying DDI:
98135000

10-digit dialed number
20-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
Example
11D->10D
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
11D->10D Trailing-#
Intl TollBypass
Long-distance
direct-dialing code

919728135000
Long-distance
operator-assisted
dialing code
After applying DDI:

99728135000
IXC access code
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
Long-distance
direct-dialing code

919728135000
Long-distance
operator-assisted
dialing code
After applying DDI:

99728135000
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
IXC access code
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
International access
code

901181910555
International
direct-dialing code
After applying DDI:

9910555
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code

78-13310-01
20-7
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
Example
Intl TollBypass
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 9.@
NoDigits
code

901181910555#
International
direct-dialing code
After applying DDI:

9910555
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code
End-of-dialing
character
This DDI removes no digits. Route pattern: 9.@

919728135000
After applying DDI:
919728135000
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
PreAt
End-of-dialing
character for
International calls
Route pattern: 9.@

901181910555#
After applying DDI:
901181910555
This DDI removes all digits Route pattern: 8.9@

prior to the NANP portion of
the route pattern, including
899728135000
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
external access code
9728135000
PBX external access

code
20-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
PreAt Trailing-#

prior to the NANP portion of Dialed digit string:
the route pattern, including 8901181910555#
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
01181910555
PBX external access
code
PreAt 10-10-Dialing
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls

prior to the NANP portion of
the route pattern, including
8910102889728135000
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
9728135000
PBX external access
code
PreAt 10-10-Dialing
Trailing-#
Example
IXC access code

the route pattern, including 89101028801181910555
#
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
01181910555
PBX external access
code
IXC access code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls

78-13310-01
20-9
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
PreAt 11/10D->7D

the route pattern, including 8919728135000 or
899728135000
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
8135000
PBX external access
code
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code
Example

20-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
Example
PreAt 11/10D->7D
Trailing-#

the route pattern, including 8919728135000 or
899728135000
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
8135000
PBX external access
code
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls


78-13310-01
20-11
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
PreAt 11D->10D

Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
9728135000
PBX external access
code
PreAt 11D->10D
Trailing-#
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Example

Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
9728135000
PBX external access
code
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
20-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
Example
PreAt Intl TollBypass This DDI removes all digits Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
910555
PBX external access
code
code
International
direct-dialing code
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code

78-13310-01
20-13
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
Example
PreAt Intl TollBypass This DDI removes all digits Route pattern: 8.9@
Trailing-#
the route pattern, including 8901181910555#
Cisco CallManager
After applying DDI:
910555
PBX external access
code
PreDot
code
International
direct-dialing code
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code
End-of-dialing
character
This DDI removes
Cisco CallManager
Route pattern: 8.9@

899728135000
After applying DDI:
99728135000
PreDot Trailing-#
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager

8901181910555#
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
After applying DDI:

901181910555
20-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
Example
PreDot 10-10-Dialing This DDI removes
Cisco CallManager

8910102889728135000
IXC access code
After applying DDI:

99728135000
PreDot 10-10-Dialing This DDI removes

Trailing-#
Cisco CallManager
PreDot 11/10D->7D
Route pattern: 8.9@
IXC access code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls
This DDI removes
Cisco CallManager
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code
Route pattern: 8.9@

89101028801181910555
#
After applying DDI:
901181910555
Route pattern: 8.9@
8919728135000 or
899728135000
After applying DDI:
98135000


78-13310-01
20-15
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
Example
PreDot 11/10D->7D
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
Area code
Local area code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls

8919728135000 or
899728135000
After applying DDI:
98135000

PreDot 11D->10D
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager

8919728135000
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
After applying DDI:

99728135000
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
20-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

DDI
Effect
Example
PreDot 11D->10D
Trailing-#
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager

8919728135000
Long-distance,
direct-dialing code
After applying DDI:

99728135000
Long-distance,
operator-assisted
dialing code
IXC access code
End-of-dialing
character for
international calls

78-13310-01
20-17
Chapter 20
DDI
Effect
Example
PreDot Intl
TollBypass
This DDI removes
Route pattern: 8.9@
Cisco CallManager

8901181910555
code
After applying DDI:

9910555
International
direct-dialing code
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code
PreDot Intl
This DDI removes
TollBypass Trailing-#
Cisco CallManager
Route pattern: 8.9@
code
After applying DDI:

9910555
International
direct-dialing code
Country code
IXC access code
International
operator-assisted
dialing code
End-of-dialing
character

8901181910555#
20-18
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

Calling Party Transformations Settings

Calling party transformations settings allow you to manipulate the appearance of
the calling party number for outgoing calls. The Cisco CallManager uses the
calling party number for calling line identification (CLID). During an outgoing
call, the CLID passes to each private branch exchange (PBX), central office (CO),
and interexchange carrier (IXC) as the call progresses. The calling party receives
the CLID when the call completes.
The assignment of the calling party transformations settings used in route lists
goes to the individual route groups comprising the list, rather than the route list
as a whole. The calling party transformations settings assigned to the route groups
in a route list override any calling party transformations settings assigned to a
route pattern associated with that route list.
Table 20-4 describes the fields, options, and values used to specify calling party
transformation for a route group.

78-13310-01
20-19
Chapter 20
Table 20-4 Calling Party Transformations Settings
Field Name
Description
Use Calling Partys

External Phone Number
Mask
This field determines whether the full, external

phone number is used for CLID on outgoing calls.
The options for this field include Default, Off, and
On:
Calling Party Transform

Mask
Default: This setting indicates that the route

group does not govern the calling party
external phone number and calling party
transform masks. If a calling party external
phone number mask or transform mask is
chosen for the route pattern, calls that are
routed through this route group use those
masks.
Off: This setting indicates that the calling

party external phone number is not used for
CLID. If no transform mask is entered for this
route group, calls that are routed through this
group donot get associated with a CLID.
On: This setting indicates that the calling

party full, external number is used for CLID.
This field specifies the calling party transform

mask for all calls routed through this route group.
Valid values for this field range from 0 through 9,
and the wildcard character X. You can also leave
this field blank. If it is blank and the preceding
field is set to Off, this means that no calling party
number is available for CLID.
The calling party transform mask can contain up to
50 digits.
Related Topics
20-20
78-13310-01
Chapter 20

Called Party Transformations Settings

Called party transformations settings allow you to manipulate the dialed digits, or
called party number, for outgoing calls. Examples of manipulating called numbers
include appending or removing prefix digits (outgoing calls), appending area
codes to calls dialed as seven-digit numbers, appending area codes and office
codes to interoffice calls dialed as four- or five-digit extensions, and suppressing
carrier access codes for equal access calls.
The assignment of the called party transformations settings used in route lists
goes to the individual route groups comprising the list, rather than the route list
as a whole. The called party transformations settings assigned to the route groups
in a route list override any called party transformations settings assigned to a route
pattern associated with that route list.
Table 20-5 describes the fields, options, and values used to specify called party
transformations for a route group.
Table 20-5 Called Party Transformations Settings
Field Name
Description
Dial Plan
This field determines which dialing plan is used. If

it is not already chosen, change this field to North
American Numbering Plan.
Note
Discard Digits
The Dial Plan field only appears when

a route group is inserted in a route list.
Once the route group is inserted, you
cannot modify this field.
This field contains a list of discard patterns that

control the discard digit instructions. For example,
in a system where users must dial 9 to make a call
to the public switched telephone network (PSTN),
the PreDot discard pattern causes the 9 to be
stripped from the dialed digit string. See the
Discard Digits Instructions section on page 20-5

78-13310-01
20-21
Chapter 20
Table 20-5 Called Party Transformations Settings (continued)
Field Name
Description
Called Party Transform

Mask
This field specifies the called party transform

mask for all calls routed through this route group.
Valid values for this field range from 0 through 9,
and the wildcard character X. You can also leave
this field blank. If this field is blank, no
transformation takes place; Cisco CallManager
sends the dialed digits exactly as dialed.
The calling party transform mask can contain up to
50 digits.
Prefix Digits (Outgoing

Calls)
This field contains a prefix digit or a set of Prefix

Digits (Outgoing Calls) that are appended to the
called party number on all calls routed through
this route group. Valid values for this field range
from 0 through 9 and blank. Prefix Digits
(Outgoing Calls) can contain up to 50 digits.
Related Topics
Discard Digits Instructions, page 20-5
20-22
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
21
Route Plan Report

The route plan report lists all call park numbers, call pickup numbers, conference
numbers, such as Meet-Me numbers, route patterns, and translation patterns in the
system. The route plan report allows you to view either a partial or full list, and
to go directly to the associated configuration panes, by selecting a route pattern,
partition, route group, route list, call park number, call pickup number, conference
number, or gateway.
In addition, the route plan report allows you to save report data into a .csv file that
you can import into other applications. The .csv file contains more detailed
information than the web pages, including directory numbers (DN) for phones,
route patterns, and translation patterns.
The Cisco CallManager uses the route plan to route both internal calls and
external public switched telephone network (PSTN) calls. For more detailed
information on the route plan, refer to the Understanding Route Plans section
in Cisco CallManager System Guide.
Use the following procedures to view all route plan records:
Viewing All Route Plan Records, page 21-2
Viewing Route Plan Reports in a File, page 21-3

78-13310-01
21-1
Chapter 21
Route Plan Report
Viewing All Route Plan Records
Viewing All Route Plan Records

This section describes how to view all route plan records.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Plan Report.

If more than 50 items exist, the Route Plan Report pane shows the first 50.
Step 2
Click All to view the entire report (using this option for viewing can take a long
time to load on large systems) or click Next 50 or Previous 50 to navigate through
the report 50 items at a time.
Note
The route plan report shows the Pattern/Directory, the corresponding

call type, and partition. The Route Detail column shows a route list
(with route group and associated gateway, and ports used information)
or gateway information.
Related Topics
Route Plan Report, page 21-1
Viewing Route Plan Reports in a File, page 21-3
21-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 21
Route Plan Report

Viewing Route Plan Reports in a File

This section contains information on how to view route plan reports in a .csv file.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Route Plan > Route Plan Report.

If more than 50 items exist, the Route Plan Report pane shows the first 50.
Step 2
Click View In File. A dialog box appears.

From this dialog box, you can either save the file or import it into another
application.
Step 3
Click Save File in the dialog box.

Another pane appears allowing you to save this file to a location of your choice.
Note
You may also save the file as a different file name, but the file name
must have a .csv extension.
Step 4
Choose the location in which to save the file and click Save. The file should now
be saved to the location you designated.
Step 5
Locate the .csv file you just saved and double-click on its icon to view it.
Related Topics
Route Plan Report, page 21-1
Viewing All Route Plan Records, page 21-2

78-13310-01
21-3
Chapter 21
Route Plan Report
21-4
78-13310-01
A R T
C H A P T E R
22
Cisco Messaging Interface

Configuration
The Cisco Messaging Interface (CMI) service allows you to use an external
voice-mail system with the Cisco CallManager 3.0 and later. To work with
Cisco CallManager, the voice-mail system must meet several requirements,
including having a simplified message desk interface (SMDI). For detailed
information on integrating a voice-mail system with Cisco CallManager, refer to
the SMDI Voice Mail Integration section in the Cisco CallManager System
Guide.
For information on how to work with the CMI, use the following topics:
Adding the Cisco Messaging Interface Service to a Server, page 22-2
Deleting the Cisco Messaging Interface Service From a Server, page 22-4
Configuring Cisco Messaging Interface Service Parameters, page 22-5
Service Parameters Configuration, page 30-1
SMDI Voice Mail Integration, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
22-1
Chapter 22
Cisco Messaging Interface Configuration
Adding the Cisco Messaging Interface Service to a Server
Adding the Cisco Messaging Interface Service to a

Server
This section describes how to add the Cisco Messaging Interface service to the
Cisco CallManager.
Before You Begin
Be sure that the following requirements are met before proceeding with any series
of steps. Refer to the Server Configuration section on page 2-1 for more
information.
Make sure servers are configured.
You must have installed the Cisco Messaging Interface service when you
installed or upgraded the Cisco CallManager.
You must know the voice-mail access number and partition as well as the
extension and mailbox length on the voice-mail system.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco Messaging Interface.
Step 2
From the Server drop-down list box, choose the server on which you want to add
the Cisco Messaging Interface.
Note
Step 3
The servers listed on the left side of the pane already include the Cisco
Messaging Interface service in their configuration.
Click Insert.
The Cisco Messaging Interface Configuration pane displays the parameters
configured for this service.
Step 4
You can modify the service parameters, if necessary. For more information about
CMI service parameters, see the Updating a Service Parameter section on
page 30-4.
22-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 22

Adding the Cisco Messaging Interface Service to a Server
Caution
Note
Cisco Messaging Interface can take up to 5 minutes to detect and load

new parameters. If you need an instant update, restart Cisco
Messaging Interface service. For information on restarting services,
see the Starting and Stopping Services section on page 32-1.
Note
CMI remains idle if you do not configure the VoiceMailDN parameter.

CMI becomes active within five minutes of your configuring the
parameter.
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure.

Cisco recommends you do not make any changes to service parameters unless
you fully understand the feature that you are changing or unless the Cisco
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) specifies the changes.
Next Steps
To enable the messages button on your Cisco IP phone to access the voice
mailbox, configure the VoiceMail service parameter for the Cisco CallManager
service to the voice-mail access number. You must set this value for each
Cisco CallManager in a cluster. Once you configure the VoiceMail parameter, you
must stop and start Cisco CallManager or reset each phone.
For more information on configuring service parameters, see the Updating a
Service Parameter section on page 30-4.
Note
The Cisco CallManager service parameters MessageWaitingOffDN

and MessageWaitingOnDN do not apply to configuring Cisco
Messaging Interface.

78-13310-01
22-3
Chapter 22
Deleting the Cisco Messaging Interface Service From a Server
Related Topics
Deleting the Cisco Messaging Interface Service

From a Server
This section describes how to delete Cisco Messaging Interface service from a
server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the CMI Servers list, choose the server from which you want to delete the
Cisco Messaging Interface service.
The Cisco Messaging Interface Configuration pane displays the parameters
configured for this service.
Step 3
Click Delete Service.

A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete service from
this server.
Step 4
Click OK to continue or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Related Topics
22-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 22

Configuring Cisco Messaging Interface Service Parameters
Configuring Cisco Messaging Interface Service

Parameters
This section describes how to configure Cisco Messaging Interface service
parameters.
Caution
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure.

Cisco recommends you do not make any changes to service parameters unless
Do not add or delete services parameters unless the Cisco TAC directs you to
do so.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the CMI servers list, choose the server on which you want to configure
Cisco Messaging Interface service parameters.
The pane refreshes, displaying the server you chose.
Step 3
Make the appropriate changes and click Update.

To view a list of parameters and their descriptions, click the i button in the
upper, right corner of the pane. To view the list with a particular parameter at the
top, click that parameter on the Service Parameter Configuration pane.
Note
Cisco Messaging Interface can take up to 5 minutes to detect and load

new parameters. If you need an instant update, restart Cisco
Messaging Interface service. For information on restarting services,
see the Starting and Stopping Services section on page 32-1.

78-13310-01
22-5
Chapter 22
Configuring Cisco Messaging Interface Service Parameters
Related Topics
22-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
23
Cisco TFTP Configuration

Cisco TFTP, a Windows 2000 service, builds and serves files consistent with the
Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP represents a simplified version of the File
Transfer Protocol (FTP). Cisco TFTP serves embedded component executable,
ringer files, and configuration files.
Use the following topics to insert and delete TFTP service from a server and to
configure TFTP parameters.
Inserting Cisco TFTP Service on a Server, page 23-2
Deleting Cisco TFTP Service From a Server, page 23-3
Configuring Cisco TFTP Parameters, page 23-4
Cisco TFTP, Cisco CallManager System Guide
TFTP Configuration Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
23-1
Chapter 23
Inserting Cisco TFTP Service on a Server
Inserting Cisco TFTP Service on a Server

This section describes how to insert Cisco TFTP service on a server.
Note
You only need to configure Cisco TFTP service on one server in a

network, unless you want to share TFTP load.
Before You Begin
You must configure the server before proceeding with the steps. See the Server
Configuration section on page 2-1.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco TFTP.
Step 2
From the Server drop-down list box, choose a server on which to insert
Cisco TFTP service and click Insert. (The server list on the left side of the pane
designate servers that have already been configured with TFTP service.)
The Cisco TFTP Configuration pane displays the parameters configured for this
service.
Step 3
You can modify the service parameters, if necessary.

To view a list of parameters and their descriptions, click the i button in the
upper, right corner of the pane. To view the list with a particular parameter at the
top, click that parameter on the Service Parameter Configuration pane.
Caution
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure. We recommend

you do not make any changes to service parameters unless you fully
understand the feature that you are changing, or unless the changes are
specified by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Tips
Click the Select Another Server link if you want to insert Cisco TFTP on
another server. This link takes you back to the first Cisco TFTP Configuration
pane.
23-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 23

Deleting Cisco TFTP Service From a Server
Step 4
To configure trace settings, click the Trace Configuration link.

Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration displays. For more information
on configuring trace, refer to the Cisco CallManager Serviceability
Administration Guide.
Related Topics
Cisco TFTP Configuration, page 23-1
Deleting Cisco TFTP Service From a Server

This section describes how to delete Cisco TFTP service from a server.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Service > Cisco TFTP.
Step 2
From the Cisco TFTP Servers list, choose the server from which you want to
delete Cisco TFTP service.
The pane refreshes to show the information for the server you chose.
Step 3

A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete this service,
and that the action cannot be undone.
Step 4
If you want to continue this deletion, click OK; otherwise, click Cancel.

78-13310-01
23-3
Chapter 23
Configuring Cisco TFTP Parameters
Related Topics

This section describes how to configure Cisco TFTP parameters.
Before You Begin
The following prerequisite must be met before proceeding with the steps. See the
Server Configuration section on page 2-1.
Make sure Cisco TFTP service is configured.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco TFTP.
Step 2
From the Cisco TFTP Servers list, choose the server on which you want to
configure parameters.
Note
The Cisco TFTP Servers list displays servers that are already
configured with TFTP service. If you choose a server from the
drop-down list box, you must first add Cisco TFTP service to the
server before configuring any command line parameters.
The pane refreshes.
23-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 23

Step 3
You can modify the service parameters, if necessary.

To view a list of parameters and their descriptions, click the i button in the upper,
right corner of the pane. To view the list with a particular parameter at the top,
click that parameter on the Service Parameter Configuration pane.
Caution
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure. We recommend

you do not make any changes to service parameters unless you fully
understand the feature that you are changing, or unless the changes are
specified by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Step 4
Click Update.
Step 5
To configure trace settings, click the Trace Configuration link.

Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration displays. For more information
on configuring trace, refer to the Cisco CallManager Serviceability
Administration Guide.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
23-5
Chapter 23
23-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
24
Cisco WebAttendant Configuration

Cisco WebAttendant, a client-server application, allows you to set up
Cisco IP phones as attendant consoles. Employing a graphical user interface, the
Cisco WebAttendant client creates an attendant console that uses speed-dial
buttons and quick directory access to look up phone numbers, monitor line status,
and direct calls. A receptionist or administrative assistant can use the
Cisco WebAttendant client to handle calls for a department or company, or
another employee can use it to manage his own calls.
Use Cisco CallManager Administration to manage the Cisco Telephony Call
Dispatcher, configure pilot points and hunt groups, and add or delete
Cisco WebAttendant users.
This section describes the following configuration procedures for
Cisco WebAttendants:
Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Users, page 24-2
Configuring Pilot Points, page 24-4
Configuring Hunt Groups, page 24-9
Installing the Cisco WebAttendant Client, page 24-16
Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Client Settings, page 24-18
Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration, page 24-22
Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for Cisco WebAttendant, page 24-24
Starting the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher, page 24-26
Viewing Cisco WebAttendant Performance Monitors, page 24-27

78-13310-01
24-1
Chapter 24
Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Users

This section covers the following procedures:
Adding a Cisco WebAttendant User, page 24-2
Viewing, Updating, and Deleting Cisco WebAttendant Users, page 24-3
Adding a Cisco WebAttendant User

This section describes how to add a Cisco WebAttendant user. You must add users
through Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration before they can log into a
Cisco WebAttendant client.
Note
Be aware that Cisco WebAttendant user IDs and passwords are not the same
as Directory users and passwords entered in the User area of
Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco WebAttendant.
Step 2
In the upper, right corner of the pane, click the Cisco WebAttendant User
Configuration link.
Step 3
Enter the appropriate configuration settings as described in Table 24-1.
Step 4
Click Insert to add the new user. The Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration
pane refreshes, and the new User ID displays in the list on the left side of the pane.
Step 5
To add additional users, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Note
When you add new Cisco WebAttendant users or modify the user information
or password for an existing user, you must wait approximately 6 minutes for
the changes to take effect.
24-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Related Topics
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration Settings, page 24-4
Understanding Cisco WebAttendant, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Viewing, Updating, and Deleting Cisco WebAttendant Users

This section describes how to view, update, or delete a Cisco WebAttendant user.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
In the upper, right corner of the pane, click the Cisco WebAttendant User
Configuration link.
The Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration pane displays with a list of current
users on the left side of the pane.
Step 3
Click the name of the user you want to modify or delete.
Step 4
Make the desired changes. Refer to Table 24-1 for a description of

Cisco WebAttendant user configuration settings.
Step 5
Click Update to save the changes, Delete to remove the user, or Cancel Changes
to exit the pane without making any changes.
Related Topics
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration Settings, page 24-4
Understanding Cisco WebAttendant Users, Cisco CallManager System

Guide

78-13310-01
24-3
Chapter 24
Configuring Pilot Points
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration Settings

Use Table 24-1, which describes Cisco WebAttendant user configuration settings,
to complete procedures in the Adding a Cisco WebAttendant Userand
Viewing, Updating, and Deleting Cisco WebAttendant Userssections.
Table 24-1 Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration Settings
Field
Description
User ID
Enter the login name for the new Cisco WebAttendant user.
Enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Password
Enter a password of up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Confirm
Re-enter the same password.
Station Type
Not used. If specified, Cisco WebAttendant ignores this

setting.
Related Topics

You must configure pilot points and hunt groups through
Cisco CallManager Administration before the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher
(TCD) can route calls.
This section contains the following topics:
Adding a Pilot Point, page 24-5
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting a Pilot Point, page 24-6
Pilot Point Configuration Settings, page 24-7
24-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Adding a Pilot Point

This section describes how to add a pilot point.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco WebAttendant. Figure 24-1 shows an example of the
Pilot Point Configuration pane.
Figure 24-1 Pilot Point Configuration Pane
Step 2

78-13310-01
24-5
Chapter 24
Step 3
Click Insert.
Now that the pilot point is created, the Pilot Point Configuration pane refreshes to
display the name of the new pilot point in the list on the left. The new pilot point
and its settings display.
Once the pilot point is created, you must configure a hunt group to specify how
the calls that come in to the pilot point are redirected.
Related Topics
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting a Pilot Point, page 24-6
Understanding Pilot Points and Hunt Groups, Cisco CallManager System

Guide
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting a Pilot Point

This section describes how to view, update, or delete a pilot point.
Note
You do not have to restart Cisco TCD or Cisco CallManager after deleting a
pilot point for the deletion to take effect.
Procedure
Step 1

The Pilot Point Configuration pane displays, and the list on the left side of the
pane shows all currently configured pilot points.
Step 2
Click the name of the pilot point you want to modify or delete. The pane refreshes
to display information for the selected pilot point.
Step 3
Make the desired changes. See Table 24-2 for a description of pilot point
configuration settings.
24-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Step 4
Click Update to modify the pilot point or click Delete to remove the pilot point.
Within approximately 10 minutes after you delete a pilot point, Cisco TCD will
stop directing calls to any hunt group members associated with that pilot point.
Related Topics
Adding a Pilot Point, page 24-5

Guide
Pilot Point Configuration Settings

Use Table 24-2, which describes pilot point configuration settings, to complete
procedures in the Adding a Pilot Point and Viewing, Updating, or Deleting a
Pilot Point sections.
Table 24-2 Pilot Point Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Pilot Name
Enter up to 50 alphanumeric characters, including

spaces, to specify a descriptive name for the pilot point.
Primary
Cisco CallManager
From the drop-down list box, choose a name or IP

address of the Cisco CallManager whose
Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher (TCD) service will
service this pilot point.
When selecting the primary Cisco CallManager, take
call processing and device load balancing into account.
Partition
Choose None from the drop-down list box.

Cisco WebAttendant pilot points do not belong to
partitions.

78-13310-01
24-7
Chapter 24
Table 24-2 Pilot Point Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Calling Search Space To designate which partitions the pilot point searches
when attempting to route a call, choose a calling search
space from the drop-down list.
Pilot Number (DirN)
Enter a directory number into this field to designate a

directory number for this pilot point.
Make sure this number is unique throughout the system
(that is, it cannot be a shared line appearance).
Route Calls To
From the drop-down list, choose the First Available

Hunt Group Member option to route incoming calls to
the first available member of a hunt group.
From the drop-down list, choose the Longest Idle
Hunt Group Member option to order members based
on the length of time that each directory number or line
remains idle.
If the voice-mail number is the longest idle member of
the group, Cisco TCD will route the call to voice mail
without checking the other members of the group first.
24-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Configuring Hunt Groups

After you configure the pilot point, you must configure the hunt group. A hunt
group comprises a list of destinations (either directory numbers or
Cisco WebAttendant user /line numbers) that determine the call redirection order.
This section covers the following procedures:
Adding Hunt Group Members, page 24-9
Configuring Linked Hunt Groups, page 24-12
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting Hunt Group Members, page 24-13
Hunt Group Configuration Settings, page 24-14
Adding Hunt Group Members

This section describes how to add hunt group members.
Procedure
Note
Cisco TCD handles overflow conditions by routing calls to multiple

Cisco WebAttendants or voice-mail numbers. On the Hunt Group
Configuration pane, check the Always Route Member check box, so that the
voice-mail number receives multiple calls at the same time.
Step 1
Choose Service > Cisco WebAttendant. The Pilot Point Configuration pane
displays.
Step 2
Choose the pilot point for which you want to add hunt group members. A list of
available pilot points appears on the left side of the Pilot Point Configuration
pane.
Step 3
To add hunt group members to this pilot point, click the link to Hunt Group
Configuration in the upper, right corner of the Pilot Point Configuration pane.
Figure 24-2 shows an example of the Hunt Group Configuration pane.

78-13310-01
24-9
Chapter 24
Figure 24-2 Hunt Group Configuration Pane
Step 4
Click Add Member. The Pilot Hunt Group Members list initially displays the text
<<Not Configured>>.
Step 5
Decide whether the hunt group member you want to add will be a directory
number (device member) or a user and line number (user member):
If you specify a directory number, Cisco TCD always attempts to route the
call to that number.
If you specify a Cisco WebAttendant user and line number, Cisco TCD first
checks whether the Cisco WebAttendant user is logged in to a
Cisco WebAttendant client and online before attempting to route the call.
When you specify a user and line number, the user can log in to and receive
calls on any Cisco IP phone in the cluster controlled by Cisco WebAttendant.
24-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Step 6
Enter the appropriate configuration settings for the new hunt group member as
described in Table 24-3:
If the hunt group member is a directory number, fill in only the Partition and
Directory Number fields in the Device Member Information section. The
optional Always Route Member check box only applies to directory numbers.
If the hunt group member is a user and line number, fill in only the
Cisco WebAttendant User Name and Line Number fields in the User
Member Information section.
Note
The User Name you specify designates a Cisco WebAttendant User

ID. This user name does not duplicate a User ID added through the
Cisco CallManager User area of Cisco CallManager Administration.
As you make selections, the Hunt Group Member list box reflects the information
you choose. The Hunt Group Member list displays either the device directory
number or the Cisco WebAttendant user name and line number; for example:
#1 Call directory number 35201 (directory number example)
#2 Direct Call to Mary Brown, Line 1 (user and line number example)
Step 7
To add more hunt group members to the pilot point, repeat Step 5 and Step 6.
Note
Step 8
To reorder the hunt group list, choose the member you want to reorder
from the list. Then, using the up and down arrows, move that member
to a new position in the list.
Click Update to save the hunt group member information and complete hunt
group configuration.
Related Topics

Guide

78-13310-01
24-11
Chapter 24
Configuring Linked Hunt Groups

This section describes how to configure linked hunt groups.
Procedure
Step 1
For each hunt group in the chain, use the following information when performing
Step 1 through Step 6 from the Adding Hunt Group Members section on
page 24-9.
Caution
Step 2
Caution
Step 3
For all except the last hunt group in the chain, make sure that the final
member of the hunt group is the pilot point for the next hunt group.
Cisco strongly recommends that you do not include any other pilot point
numbers (besides the final member) in the hunt group. Including other pilot
point numbers in the hunt group may cause a continuous route loop.
Check the Always Route Member check box for only the final member of
each hunt group.
To handle overflow conditions, choose a voice-mail or auto attendant number

as the final member of the last linked hunt group in the chain. Check the
Always Route Member check box to ensure that voice mail can handle
multiple, simultaneous calls.
After you configure each hunt group, click Update to save the information.
Cisco strongly recommends that you do not link the last hunt group back to the
first hunt group.
Verify configuration of the linked hunt groups by reviewing the information you
entered in the previous steps.
24-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Related Topics

Guide
Understanding Linked Hunt Groups, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting Hunt Group Members

This section describes how to view, update, or delete hunt group members.
Procedure
Step 1

The Pilot Point Configuration pane displays.
Step 2
At the top of the pane, click the Hunt Group Configuration link.
The Hunt Group Configuration pane displays, and the list on the left side of the
pane displays all currently configured pilot points.
Step 3
Click the name of the pilot point associated with the hunt group for which you
want to view, modify, or delete members.
The Hunt Group Configuration pane displays information for the chosen pilot
point.
Step 4
Make any desired changes. See Table 24-3 for a description of hunt group
configuration settings:
To update settings for a hunt group member, choose that member name in the
list; modify the settings as needed; then, click Update to save the changes.
To change the order of the hunt group members, choose the name of the
member you want to move and use the arrow buttons to move it to a new
position in the list.

78-13310-01
24-13
Chapter 24
Step 5
To delete a hunt group member, highlight that member name in the list and
click Delete Member.
You can press Cancel Changes at any time to restore any settings you
changed before clicking Update.
Click Update to save the changes before leaving the Hunt Group Configuration
pane.
Related Topics

Guide
Hunt Group Configuration Settings

Use Table 24-3 to complete procedures in the following sections:
Adding Hunt Group Members
Configuring Linked Hunt Groups
Viewing, Updating, or Deleting Hunt Group Members
24-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Table 24-3 Hunt Group Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Partition
If a hunt group member is a directory number, fill in the

Partition and Directory Number fields in the Device
Member Information section.
This field designates the route partition to which the
directory number belongs:
If the directory number for this hunt group member

is in a partition, you must choose a partition from
the drop-down list.
If the directory number is not in a partition, choose

None.
Always Route Member, an optional check box, applies

only to directory numbers.
If this check box is checked, Cisco Telephony Call
Dispatcher (TCD) always routes the call to this hunt
group member, whether it is busy or not.
If this check box is checked, Cisco TCD does not check
whether the line is available before routing the call.
To manage overflow conditions, check this check box
for voice-mail or auto-attendant numbers that handle
multiple, simultaneous calls.
For linked hunt groups, only check the Always Route
Member check box when you are configuring the final
member of each hunt group.
Directory Number
Enter the directory number of the hunt group member

device in this field.
When the directory number is not in the specified
partition, an error dialog box displays.

78-13310-01
24-15
Chapter 24
Installing the Cisco WebAttendant Client
Table 24-3 Hunt Group Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
User Name
If the hunt group member is a user and line number, fill

in only the Cisco WebAttendant User Name and Line
Number fields in the User Member Information
section.
From the drop-down list, choose Cisco WebAttendant
users that will serve as hunt group members.
Only Cisco WebAttendant user names added using
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration appear in this
list.
Line Number
From the drop-down list, choose the appropriate line

numbers for the hunt group.
Related Topics

Guide

This section describes how to install the Cisco WebAttendant client on a user PC.
Procedure
Step 1
Ensure you have added the Cisco WebAttendant user and the phone you want to
associate with Cisco WebAttendant to the Cisco CallManager database.
Step 2
Write down the MAC address of the phone that is to be associated with the
Cisco WebAttendant client you are installing. The MAC address comprises a
12-character, hexadecimal number located on a label on the underside of the
Cisco IP phone.
Step 3
Log in to the PC on which you want to install the Cisco WebAttendant client.
24-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Step 4
Open Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or greater), browse to Cisco CallManager

Administration, and log in to Cisco CallManager Administration.
Step 5
Choose Application > Install Plugins.
Step 6
Click the icon for the Cisco WebAttendant client.

The Cisco WebAttendant installation wizard runs.
Step 7
Click Next at the initial screen; then, click Yes to accept the License Agreement.
Step 8
Click Next to install the Cisco WebAttendant client to the default location or use
the Browse button to specify a new location and then click Next.
Step 9
Choose a Program Folder and click Next.
Step 10
On the Customer Information screen, enter the following information:
Login IDEnter the Cisco WebAttendant user ID for the attendant.
PasswordEnter the Cisco WebAttendant password for user ID just

specified.
Step 11
Click Next.
Step 12
Enter the following information:
IP AddressEnter IP address or host name of the primary

Cisco CallManager for Cisco TCD (usually the Cisco CallManager with
which the Cisco WebAttendant phone is registered).
MAC IDEnter MAC address of the Cisco IP phone that will be used with
Cisco WebAttendant (see Step 2 for a description of the MAC address). You
must use uppercase letters when entering the MAC address.
Step 13
Click Next.
Step 14
After the installation program finishes installing files, choose whether you want
to restart the computer now or later; then, click Finish.
Step 15
Restart the computer.

Once the application is installed, you can configure or update any client settings
that you did not configure during the installation process.
Refer to the Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Client Settings section on

78-13310-01
24-17
Chapter 24
Configuring Cisco WebAttendant Client Settings
Related Topics
Cisco WebAttendant Installation and Configuration, Cisco CallManager

System Guide

After you install Cisco WebAttendant, you must configure the client before a user
can log in to Cisco WebAttendant. Use the procedure in this section to configure
settings not specified during installation, to view current settings, or to update the
client configuration.
Once configured, the Cisco WebAttendant client operates with the specified
settings until the administrator changes them.
Procedure
Step 1
On the PC where the Cisco WebAttendant is installed, choose

Start > Programs > Cisco CallManager > Cisco WebAttendant; then, click
Yes to launch Cisco WebAttendant.
Step 2
Click Settings.
Step 3
Enter the appropriate configuration settings, as described in Table 24-4.
Step 4
Click OK. You have now configured the settings for Cisco WebAttendant client,
and the settings can now be used for call-distribution activities.
Note
If the Cisco WebAttendant client does not display directory

information, check whether the wauser shared directory is configured
correctly and whether the Cisco WebAttendant user and client PC have
read/write access to the wauser shared directory. See the Setting Up
the wauser Shared Directory for Cisco WebAttendant section on
page 24-24 for instructions.
24-18
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Related Topics
Installing the Cisco WebAttendant Client, page 24-16
Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings, page 24-20

78-13310-01
24-19
Chapter 24
Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings

Use Table 24-4 to complete the procedure in the Configuring
Cisco WebAttendant Client Settings section.
Table 24-4 Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
Enter SEP plus the media access control (MAC) address,

a 12-character number found on the bottom of the
Cisco IP phone, for the Cisco IP phone you plan to use
with Cisco WebAttendant.
You must enter SEP, then the MAC address, eliminating
any dashes. You must use uppercase letters; for example,
SEP0010EB001234.
Cisco TCD Database Leave this setting blank if you want to use the
Path
Cisco TCD default database associated with the
Cisco WebAttendant client. Cisco recommends the
default setting. To ensure that this setting works
correctly, you must perform the required steps in the
Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for
Cisco WebAttendant section on page 24-24.
As an alternative to the default setting, copy the file
named C:\Program Files\Cisco\Users\UsersDB1.mdb or
C:\Program Files\Cisco\UsersDB2.mdb on the
Cisco CallManager server to a different location (such as
a file in a different shared directory on the network or a
file on the Cisco WebAttendant user PC) and enter the
path to the file in this field. For important information on
this path, refer to theUnderstanding Cisco TCD
Database Path Options section of Cisco CallManager
System Guide.
Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher (TCD) Settings
IP Address or
Host Name
Enter the IP address or host name of the Cisco TCD

server. This entry designates the Cisco CallManager to
which the Cisco IP phone is normally registered.
IP Port
The default value is 4321. Do not modify this value.
24-20
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Table 24-4 Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
WebAttendant
User ID
This field designates the User ID for the

Cisco WebAttendant user as specified in the
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration pane from
Cisco CallManager Administration. See the Installing
the Cisco WebAttendant Client section on page 24-16
Note
WebAttendant
Password
This field designates the password for this

Cisco WebAttendant user as specified in the
Cisco WebAttendant User Configuration pane in
Cisco CallManager Administration. See the Installing
the Cisco WebAttendant Client section on page 24-16
Note
Connected To
Be aware that the Cisco WebAttendant User

ID is not the same as a Cisco CallManager
User ID entered in the User area of
Cisco CallManager Administration.
Be aware that the Cisco WebAttendant

password is not the same as a
Cisco CallManager password entered in the
User area of Cisco CallManager
Administration.
This view-only field displays the IP address of the

Cisco CallManager currently connected to the
Cisco WebAttendant.
Line State Server Settings

IP Address or
Host Name
Enter the IP address or host name of the line state server.

This entry designates the Cisco CallManager to which
the Cisco IP Phone is normally registered.

78-13310-01
24-21
Chapter 24
Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration
Table 24-4 Cisco WebAttendant Client Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
IP Port
This field designates the line state server IP port number,

which has the default value 3224. Do not change this
setting unless advised to do so by the Cisco Technical
Assistance Center.
Connected To
This view-only field displays the IP address of the line

state server currently connected to the
Cisco WebAttendant client.
When you configure your settings in the Settings dialog box, check the Activate
WebAttendant when a call is received check box to ensure that the
Cisco WebAttendant Console automatically displays every time a call comes into
the system.
Related Topics

The Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration pane lists service parameters and
enables you to configure trace parameters for the Cisco Telephony Call
Dispatcher (TCD).
Caution
Do not change any service parameters without permission of a

Cisco Technical Assistance Center engineer. Doing so may cause system
failure.
24-22
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Perform the following steps to update Cisco TCD trace parameters.

Procedure
Step 1

The Pilot Point Configuration pane displays.
Step 2
Click Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration in the upper, right corner of

the pane. Choose a server from the list on the left side of the pane or choose a
server from the drop-down box and click Insert.
The Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration pane for the chosen server
appears. It displays all configured service parameters for the Cisco TCD.
Figure 24-3 shows an example of the Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration
pane.
Figure 24-3 Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration Pane

78-13310-01
24-23
Chapter 24
Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for Cisco WebAttendant
Note
After you insert or choose a server from the Cisco WebAttendant

Server Configuration pane, you can click Trace Configuration on the
Cisco WebAttendant Server Configuration pane and then refer to the
Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration Guide to configure
trace parameters.
Related Topics
Cisco TCD Service and Trace Parameters, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for

Cisco WebAttendant
By default, the client uses cached directory information from the
Cisco CallManager Directory user database. The Cisco WebAttendant client
displays user and line information in the Directory section of its user interface.
If you choose the default Cisco TCD database setting during Cisco WebAttendant
client configuration, you must perform the following procedure to ensure that the
Cisco WebAttendant client can display the directory information from the
Cisco CallManager directory database.
Note
If you are running Cisco CallManager in a cluster environment, perform this

procedure on every Cisco CallManager in the cluster.
Perform the following steps to set up the wauser shared directory:
Procedure
Step 1
Log in to the Cisco CallManager server.
Step 2
Use Windows Explorer to browse to the following folder:

C:\Program Files\Cisco\Users
24-24
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Setting Up the wauser Shared Directory for Cisco WebAttendant
Step 3
Right-click the Users folder and choose Sharing.
Step 4
Click the Share this Folder radio button.
Step 5
Change the default share name from Users to wausers. Make sure the share
name, which is not case sensitive, is wausers, so that directory information can
display.
Step 6
Click the Permissions button. Click the Share Permissions tab if it does not
automatically appear.
Step 7
Choose Everyone in the Name pane, if it is not already chosen.
Step 8
Check the Full Control, Change, and Read check boxes; then, click OK.
Step 9
Click the Security tab.
Step 10
Uncheck the Allow inheritable permissions from parent to propagate to their

object check box.
Step 11
A security dialog box appears. Click the Remove button in the dialog box.
Step 12
If the Name pane has any entries in it, choose them one-by-one and click Remove
after each selection.
Step 13
Click Add.
Step 14
In the Look In field, choose the name of the machine you are currently using.
Step 15
Choose Everyone in the Name pane; then, click Add.
Step 16
Click OK.
Step 17
The Users Properties Security window appears. Make sure that only Everyone
appears in the Name pane.
Step 18
In the Permissions pane, check the Full Control check box.
Note
When you check the Full Control check box, you automatically
choose all available permission selections.
Step 19
Click Apply.
Step 20
Click OK.
Step 21
Perform this procedure on every Cisco CallManager in the cluster.

78-13310-01
24-25
Chapter 24
Starting the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher
Note
To ensure that the changes made to the Shared As properties are visible to
Cisco WebAttendant clients, Cisco WebAttendant users should exit the client,
log out of Windows, and then log back in to Windows.
Cisco CallManager automatically makes directory database information available

to Cisco WebAttendant clients and updates the information every 24 hours with
the latest changes.
Related Topics
Understanding Cisco TCD Database Path Options, Cisco CallManager

System Guide
Starting the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher

The Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher (TCD) service starts running automatically
when Cisco CallManager is started. The following procedure describes how to
verify that the Cisco TCD service is running and how to start Cisco TCD if it is
stopped.
Note
If you add new Cisco WebAttendant users or modify the user information or
password for an existing user, you must wait approximately 6 minutes for the
changes to take effect.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Application > Cisco CallManager Serviceability.
Step 2
Choose a Cisco CallManager server from the server list on the left side of the
pane. The pane refreshes.
The Service Name column lists all services that are configured on this server.
24-26
78-13310-01
Chapter 24

Viewing Cisco WebAttendant Performance Monitors
Step 3
Step 4
Look at the Service Status column for the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher:
If an arrow icon displays, the Cisco TCD service is running.
If a square icon displays, the Cisco TCD service is stopped.
If the Cisco TCD service is not running, click the Start button in the Service
Control column.
Related Topics

Guide
Understanding the Cisco Telephony Call Dispatcher, Cisco CallManager

System Guide
Viewing Cisco WebAttendant Performance

Monitors
Perform the following procedures to view CcmLineLinkState and other
performance monitoring information for Cisco TCD and Cisco WebAttendant:
Procedure
Step 1
Log in to the Cisco CallManager server.
Step 2
Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Performance.
Step 3
Click the View report data icon.
Step 4
Click the + (Add counter) icon.
Step 5
Choose System Monitor; enable All Counters, and choose

Cisco WebAttendant from the Object drop-down list box.
Step 6
Click Add.

78-13310-01
24-27
Chapter 24
Viewing Cisco WebAttendant Performance Monitors
Related Topics
Cisco WebAttendant Configuration, page 24-1
24-28
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
25
Conference Bridge Configuration

Conference Bridge for Cisco CallManager is a software and hardware application
designed to allow both Ad-Hoc and Meet-Me voice conferencing. Each
conference bridge is capable of hosting several simultaneous, multiparty
conferences.
Cisco CallManager supports multiple conference devices to distribute the load of
mixing audio between the conference devices. A component of
Cisco CallManager called Media Resource Manager (MRM) locates and assigns
resources throughout a cluster. The MRM resides on every Cisco CallManager
and communicates with MRMs on other Cisco CallManagers.
Both hardware and software conference bridges can be active at the same time.
Software and hardware conference devices differ in the number of streams and the
types of codec they support. For software conference devices, you can adjust the
number of streams. Hardware conference devices, however, support a fixed
number of streams.
Note
The hardware model type for Conference Bridge contains a specific Media
Access Control (MAC) address and device pool information.
Use the following topics to configure conference bridges:
Adding a Software Conference Device, page 25-2
Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings, page 25-4
Adding a Hardware Conference Device, page 25-5
Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings, page 25-6

78-13310-01
25-1
Chapter 25
Adding a Software Conference Device
Updating a Conference Device, page 25-7
Deleting a Conference Device, page 25-8
Updating Conference Bridge Parameters, page 25-9
Adding a Meet-Me Number/Pattern, page 25-10
Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration Settings, page 25-14
Updating a Meet-Me Number/Pattern, page 25-12
Deleting a Meet-Me Number/Pattern, page 25-13

This section describes how to add a software conference device. For Conference
Bridge hardware configuration, refer to the Adding a Hardware Conference
Device section on page 25-5.
Note
Make sure the service is installed in order to perform this procedure.

Before You Begin
Make sure the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps:
Make sure servers are configured. Refer to the Server Configuration section
on page 2-1.
Make sure device pools are configured. Refer to the Device Pool
Make sure the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming Application service is

installed on the server. This optional software service runs on a server and
allows software conferencing or software Media Termination Point (MTP).
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Conference Bridge.
Step 2
25-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Step 3
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the Conference Bridge device must be reset for
Step 4
Click OK.
The pane refreshes, showing the information, including the status, for the device
you just added.
Related Topics
Software Conferences Devices, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
25-3
Chapter 25
Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings
Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings

Table 25-1 describes the software conference bridge configuration settings
Table 25-1 Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Conference Bridge
Type
Choose Cisco Conference Bridge Software.
Host Server
Use this required field to choose a host server that

contains the Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming
Application service you wish to use.
Conference Bridge
Name
Enter a name in this required field for the conference

device, up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
Note
If the specified device name is longer than 15

characters, the device cannot successfully
register with the Cisco CallManager.
Description
Enter a description for the software conference device.
Device Pool
Use this required field to choose a device pool to which

you want this conference device assigned. You can
choose one of the available device pools, or you can
choose the default device pool.
Call Count (Max

Streams)
Enter a number in this required field for the maximum

number of full-duplex audio streams that this software
conference bridge supports. Valid values range from 3 to
128.
Related Topics
Software Conferences Devices, Cisco CallManager System Guide
25-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Adding a Hardware Conference Device
Adding a Hardware Conference Device

This section describes how to add a hardware conference device. For Conference
Bridge software configuration, see the Adding a Software Conference Device
Note
In order to perform this procedure, make sure the service is installed.

Before You Begin
Configure the Device pools. See the Device Pool Configuration section on
page 8-1.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the Conference Bridge device must be reset in
order for the changes to take effect.
Step 4
Click OK.
The pane refreshes and displays the conference device you just added. The device
should appear in the list on the left side of the pane.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
25-5
Chapter 25
Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings
Hardware Conference Devices, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings

Table 25-2 describes the hardware conference bridge configuration settings.
Table 25-2 Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Conference Bridge
Type
Select Cisco Conference Bridge Hardware.
MAC Address
Enter a unique device MAC address in this required field.

MAC addresses comprise 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9,
A-F).
Example
1231123245AB
Description
This field automatically generates from the MAC address

you provide.
Device Pool
Choose a device pool or choose Default.
Call Count (Max

Streams)
Enter a number in this required field for the maximum

number of full-duplex audio streams that this hardware
conference bridge supports. Valid values range from 3 to
128.
Special Load
Information
Enter any special load information, or leave blank to use

default.
Related Topics
25-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Updating a Conference Device
Updating a Conference Device

This section describes how to update a Conference Device.
Note
In order to perform this procedure, make sure the service is installed.

Before You Begin
Configure the Servers. See the Server Configuration section on page 2-1.
page 8-1.
Configure the Conference device. See the Adding a Software Conference

Device section on page 25-2.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Service > Conference Bridge.
Step 2
Choose the conference bridge device you want to update from the Conference
Bridges list.
The pane refreshes showing the device you want to update.
Step 3
Update the appropriate settings as described in Table 25-1 or Table 25-2.
Step 4
When you have completed your changes, click Update.

A message displays stating that the Conference Bridge device must be reset for
Step 5
Click OK.
The pane refreshes showing the updated device information.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
25-7
Chapter 25
Deleting a Conference Device
Software Conference Bridge Configuration Settings, page 25-4
Hardware Conference Bridge Configuration Settings, page 25-6
Deleting a Conference Device

This section describes how to delete a Conference Device.
Note
To perform this procedure, make sure the service is installed. You cannot
delete devices assigned to the Media Resource Manager (MRM).
Before You Begin
page 8-1.
Configure the Conference device. See the Conference Bridge

Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose the device you want to delete from the Conference Bridges list.
The pane refreshes, showing the device you selected.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete the device,
and that this action cannot be undone.
25-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Updating Conference Bridge Parameters
Step 4
If you want to continue with the deletion, click OK; otherwise, click Cancel.
The pane refreshes again, and the conference device you deleted is removed from
the list of devices, and all active calls terminate.
Related Topics
Updating Conference Bridge Parameters

This section describes how to update Conference Bridge Parameters.
Before You Begin
page 8-1.
Configure Cisco CallManager. See the Cisco CallManager Configuration

Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Conference Bridge Parameters from the top, right corner of the pane.

78-13310-01
25-9
Chapter 25
Adding a Meet-Me Number/Pattern
Step 3
Choose a device pool from the drop-down list box or choose Default.
The Cisco CallManagers in this device pool appear in the box to the left of the
pane.
Step 4
Highlight the Cisco CallManager on which you want to update the conference
parameters. The maximum number of users configured for both an Ad-Hoc
conference and a Meet-Me conference using Unicast appear in the fields to the
right of the pane.
Step 5
Change the maximum number of users accordingly and click Update.
Related Topics

This section describes how to add a Meet-Me Number/Pattern.
Before You Begin
page 8-1.
25-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration, from the top, right corner of

the pane.
The pane refreshes and the Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration pane appears.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert.
The pane refreshes, and the new Meet-Me Number/Pattern appears in the list on
the left side of the pane.
Related Topics
Partition Configuration, page 12-1

78-13310-01
25-11
Chapter 25
Updating a Meet-Me Number/Pattern
Updating a Meet-Me Number/Pattern

This section describes how to update a Meet-Me Number/Pattern.
Before You Begin
page 8-1.
Configure the Meet-Me Number/Pattern. See the Adding a Meet-Me

Number/Pattern section on page 25-10.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration from the top, right corner of the
pane.
The pane refreshes, and the Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration pane
appears.
Step 3
Choose the Meet-Me Number/Pattern you want to update from the Meet-Me
Numbers/Patterns list.
The pane refreshes again, and the pattern you chose appears in the pattern field.
Step 4
Note
Step 5
You can change the number or pattern as needed (example, changing

5000 to 500X).
Click Update.
The pane refreshes, and the pattern is updated with the new route partition
information.
25-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 25

Deleting a Meet-Me Number/Pattern
Related Topics
Partition Configuration, page 12-1
Deleting a Meet-Me Number/Pattern

This section describes how to delete a Meet-Me Number/Pattern.
Before You Begin
Configure the servers.
Configure the Device pools.
Configure the Meet-Me Number/Pattern.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Click Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration from the top, right corner of the
pane.
The pane refreshes and the Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration pane appears.
Step 3
Choose the Meet-Me Number/Pattern you want to delete from the Meet-Me
Numbers/Patterns list.
The pane refreshes again.

78-13310-01
25-13
Chapter 25
Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration Settings
Step 4
Click Delete.
A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete this pattern
and that this action cannot be undone.
Step 5
Click OK to continue, or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Related Topics
Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration Settings

Table 25-3 describes the meet-me number/pattern configuration settings.
Table 25-3 Meet-Me Number/Pattern Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Directory Number or Enter a Meet-Me Numbers/pattern or a range of numbers

Pattern
(such as 8000 to 8009).
Partition
Select a partition. See the Partition Configuration

section on page 12-1 for more information.
Related Topics
25-14
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
26
Media Termination Point

Configuration
A Media Termination Point (MTP) software device allows the Cisco CallManager
to extend supplementary services, such as hold and transfer, to calls routed
through an H.323 endpoint or an H.323 gateway.
MTP, a Cisco software application, installs on a server during the software
installation process. During installation, the component is called the
IpVoiceMediaStreamingApp and is common to both the MTP, Conference
Bridge, and Music on Hold (MOH) applications. Under Windows2000, the
application runs as a service and is called Cisco IP Voice Media Streaming App.
Each MTP device defined in the database registers with the Media Resource
Manager (MRM). The MRM keeps track of the total available MTP devices in the
system and which devices have available resources.
During resource reservation, the MRM determines the number of resources,
identifies the media type (in this case, the MTP), and the location of the registered
MTP device. The MRM updates its share resource table with the registration
information and propagates the registered information to the other
Cisco CallManagers within the cluster.
Unlike previous Cisco CallManager releases, the MTP and transcoder can register
with the same Cisco CallManager. See the Transcoder Configuration section on
Each MTP receives a list of Cisco CallManagers, in priority order, to which it
should attempt to register. Each MTP can register with only one
Cisco CallManager at a time.

78-13310-01
26-1
Chapter 26
Media Termination Point Configuration
Adding a Media Termination Point
Use the following topics to add, update, and delete MTPs:
Transcoder Configuration, page 31-1
Adding a Media Termination Point, page 26-2
Updating a Media Termination Point, page 26-3
Deleting a Media Termination Point, page 26-4
Media Termination Point Configuration Settings, page 26-5
Adding a Media Termination Point

This section describes how to add a Media Termination Point (MTP).
Note
The service must be installed in order to perform this procedure.
Before You Begin
Note
Servers must be configured.
Device pools must be configured.
Add only one Media Termination Point (MTP) device for each MTP
application.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service> Media Termination Point.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the MTP device must be reset before the changes
take effect.
Step 4
Click OK.
26-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 26

Updating a Media Termination Point
Related Topics
Media Termination Point Configuration, page 26-1
Configuring a Transcoder, page 31-2
Updating a Media Termination Point

This section describes how to update a Media Termination Point (MTP).
Note
The service must be installed in order to perform this procedure.
Before You Begin
Servers must be configured
Device pools must be configured
Media Termination Points must be configured
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose the MTP you want to update from the Media Termination Points list.
The pane refreshes, showing the device you selected.
Step 3

78-13310-01
26-3
Chapter 26
Deleting a Media Termination Point
Step 4
Click Update.
A message displays stating that the MTP device must be reset before the changes
will take effect.
Step 5
Click OK.
Related Topics
Deleting a Media Termination Point

This section describes how to delete a Media Termination Point (MTP).
Note
You must install the service to perform this procedure. You cannot
delete a device if it is assigned to the Media Resource Manager
(MRM).
Before You Begin
Servers must be configured
Device pools must be configured
Media Termination Points must be configured
26-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 26

Media Termination Point Configuration Settings
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Media Termination Points list, choose the MTP you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Related Topics

Table 26-1 describes the media termination point configuration settings.
Table 26-1 Media Termination Point Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Host Server
Choose the server on which you want MTP to run.
Media Termination
Point Name
Enter a name for the MTP, up to 15 alphanumeric

characters.
Description
Enter any description for the MTP.
Device Pool
Choose a device pool. The device pool specifies the list

of Cisco CallManagers for this MTP.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
26-5
Chapter 26
26-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
27
Music On Hold Configuration

The integrated Music On Hold feature provides the ability to place on-net and
off-net users on hold with music streamed from a streaming source. This feature
includes the following actions:
End user hold
Network hold, which includes transfer hold, conference hold, and park hold
Music On Hold configuration comprises configuration of Music On Hold audio

sources and Music On Hold servers.
Use the following topics to configure Music On Hold:
Configuring Music On Hold Audio Sources, page 27-2
Configuring Music On Hold Servers, page 27-12
Related Topics
Chapter 28, Media Resource Group Configuration
Chapter 29, Media Resource Group List Configuration

OL-1210-01
27-1
Chapter 27
Configuring Music On Hold Audio Sources

Use the following topics to configure Music On Hold audio sources:
Adding a Music On Hold Audio Source, page 27-2
Updating a Music On Hold Audio Source, page 27-3
Copying a Music On Hold Audio Source, page 27-4
Deleting a Music On Hold Audio Source, page 27-6
Configuring the Music On Hold Fixed Audio Source, page 27-7
Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings, page 27-9
Related Topics
Configuring Music On Hold Servers, page 27-12
Adding a Music On Hold Audio Source

Perform the following procedure to add a Music On Hold audio source.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose Service > Music On Hold.

The Music On Hold (MOH) Audio Source Configuration window displays. The
MOH Audio Source: New (New) title displays with a Status: Ready indicator.
Step 3
Choose <Add new MOH Audio Source> in the MOH Audio Sources list.
Step 4
Enter the appropriate settings as described in Table 27-2. At any point, click the
Cancel Changes button to clear all input if necessary.
27-2
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Step 5
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The MOH Audio Sources list
now includes the new Music On Hold audio source.
Note
The MOH Audio Source File Status pane tells you about the MOH
audio translation status for the added source.
Related Topics
Audio Sources for Music On Hold, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Music On Hold Configuration Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Updating a Music On Hold Audio Source

Perform the following procedure to update an existing Music On Hold audio
source.
Note
If a new version of an audio source file is available, you must perform

this update procedure to use the new version.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2


OL-1210-01
27-3
Chapter 27
Step 3
From the MOH Audio Sources list, choose an existing Music On Hold audio
source.
The MOH Audio Source title displays the name of the chosen Music On Hold
Audio Source. The fields below the MOH Audio Source title display the
previously defined values for this Music On Hold audio source.
Step 4
Update the desired settings as described in Table 27-2. At any point, click the
Cancel Changes button to clear all new input and revert to the previous settings
if necessary.
Step 5
Click Update.
The Status changes from Ready to Update completed. The MOH Audio Sources
list shows the updated Music On Hold audio source as highlighted.
Related Topics
Copying a Music On Hold Audio Source

Perform the following procedure to copy an existing Music On Hold audio source.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

27-4
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Step 3
source.
The MOH Audio Source title displays the name of the chosen Music On Hold
audio source. The fields below the MOH Audio Source title display the previously
defined values for this Music On Hold audio source.
Step 4
Click the Copy button.

The MOH Audio Source title changes to indicate that a new MOH audio source
is being added and is a copy of an existing MOH audio source.
Step 5
if necessary.
Note
Step 6
You must change the MOH Audio Source Name to a unique name and
choose a new MOH Audio Stream Number.
Click Update.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The MOH Audio Sources list
shows the new Music On Hold audio source as highlighted.
Related Topics

OL-1210-01
27-5
Chapter 27
Deleting a Music On Hold Audio Source

Perform the following procedure to delete an existing Music On Hold audio
source.
Note
You cannot delete an audio source that is used by a device pool or by

an individual device.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

Music On Hold Audio Source: New (New) title displays with a Status: Ready
indicator.
Step 3
source.
The Music On Hold Audio Source title displays the name of the chosen Music On
Hold audio source. The fields below the MOH Audio Source title display the
previously defined values for this Music On Hold audio source.
Step 4
Click the Delete button.

A popup window displays the following warning:
You are about to permanently delete this Music On Hold Audio Source. This
action cannot be undone.
Continue?
Step 5
Click OK.
The chosen Music On Hold audio source no longer appears on the MOH Audio
Sources list. The Status changes from Ready to Delete completed.
27-6
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Related Topics
Configuring the Music On Hold Fixed Audio Source

Perform the following procedure to configure the Music On Hold fixed audio
source.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

Step 3
From the MOH Audio Sources list, choose the Fixed Audio Source.
Note
The list always shows Fixed Audio Source as the last audio source in
the list of MOH Audio Sources and always as audio source 51.
The Music On Hold (MOH) Fixed Audio Source Configuration window displays.
The MOH Fixed Audio Source title displays with a Status: Ready indicator. The
MOH Fixed Audio Source title displays the name of the Music On Hold Fixed
Audio Source. The fields below the MOH Audio Source title display the
previously defined values for the Music On Hold fixed audio source.
Step 4
if necessary.

OL-1210-01
27-7
Chapter 27
Table 27-1 Music On Hold Fixed Audio Source Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MOH Fixed Audio Source Information

MOH Fixed Audio Source
Name
Enter a unique name in this required field for

the MOH fixed audio source. This name can
comprise up to 50 characters. Valid
characters include letters, numbers, spaces,
dashes, dots (periods), and underscores.
MOH Fixed Audio Source

Device
Enter the name for the audio device interface

on a PC that is used to play the fixed audio
source.
Note
Allow Multicasting
To specify that the MOH fixed audio source

allows multicasting, check this check box.
Note
MOH Server Reset Information
The name must match exactly the

device name of the device that is
already installed.
Changes to the multicast setting

take effect immediately if at least
one MOH server has already been
configured for multicast.
Otherwise, changes take effect
only after you reset MOH servers
by clicking the Reset MOH
Servers button. If no MOH
servers are configured for
multicast, resetting has no effect.
To reset all MOH Servers, click the Reset

MOH Servers button.
Cisco CallManager makes Music On Hold
unavailable while the servers reset.
27-8
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Step 5
Click Update to update the Music On Hold fixed audio source or click Delete to
disable the Music On Hold fixed audio source.
If you clicked Update, the Status changes from Ready to Update completed, and
the MOH Audio Sources list shows the updated Music On Hold fixed audio source
as highlighted. If you clicked Delete, the MOH Audio Sources list shows the
MOH fixed audio source labeled as (Disabled).
Related Topics
Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings

Table 27-2 describes the configuration settings used for configuring Music On
Hold Audio Sources.
Table 27-2 Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MOH Audio Source Information

MOH Audio Stream
Number
Use this required field to choose the stream number

for this MOH audio source. To do so, click the
drop-down arrow and choose a value from the list
displayed. For existing MOH audio sources, this
value displays in the MOH Audio Source title.
MOH Audio Source

File
Use this required field to choose the file for this

MOH audio source. To do so, click the drop-down
arrow and choose a value from the list displayed.
OL-1210-01
27-9
Chapter 27
Table 27-2 Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
MOH Audio Source

Name
Enter a unique name in this required field for the

MOH audio source. This name can comprise up to
50 characters. Valid characters include letters,
numbers, spaces, dashes, dots (periods), and
underscores.
Play continuously
(repeat)
To specify continuous play of this MOH audio

source, check this check box.
Note
Allow Multicasting
Cisco recommends checking this check

box. If continuous play of an audio
source is not specified, only the first
party placed on hold, not additional
parties, will receive the MOH audio
source.
To specify that this MOH audio source allows

multicasting, check this check box.
27-10
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Table 27-2 Music On Hold Audio Source Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
MOH Audio Source File

Status
Display only. This pane displays information about

the source file for a chosen MOH audio source. For
an MOH audio source, the following attributes
display:
Input File Name
Error Code
Error Text
Low Date Time
High Date Time
Output File List

ULAW wav file name and status
ALAW wav file name and status
G.729 wav file name and status
Wideband wav file name and status
MOH Server Reset

Information
Time MOH Audio Translation completed
To reset all MOH servers, click the Reset MOH

Servers button.
Note
Cisco CallManager makes Music On

Hold unavailable while the servers reset.
Related Topics

OL-1210-01
27-11
Chapter 27
Configuring Music On Hold Servers

Use the following topics to configure Music On Hold servers:
Adding a Music On Hold Server, page 27-12
Updating a Music On Hold Server, page 27-13
Copying a Music On Hold Server, page 27-14
Deleting a Music On Hold Server, page 27-16
Resetting a Music On Hold Server, page 27-17
Music On Hold Server Configuration Settings, page 27-19
For any Music On Hold server that you configure, you may trace the configuration
of that server. Refer to the Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration
Guide for more information.
Related Topics
Configuring Music On Hold Audio Sources, page 27-2
Adding a Music On Hold Server

Perform the following procedure to add a Music On Hold server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

The Music On Hold (MOH) Audio Source Configuration window displays.
Step 3
Click Configure Music On Hold Servers.

The Music On Hold (MOH) Server Configuration window displays. The Music
On Hold Server: New title displays with a Status: Ready indicator.
Step 4
Choose <Add new Music On Hold Server> in the MOH Servers list.
Step 5
27-12
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Step 6
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The MOH Servers list now
includes the new Music On Hold server.
Related Topics
Understanding Music On Hold, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Music On Hold Server, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Updating a Music On Hold Server

Perform the following procedure to update an existing Music On Hold server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

Step 3


OL-1210-01
27-13
Chapter 27
Step 4
Choose an existing Music On Hold server from the MOH Servers list.
The Music On Hold Server title displays the name of the chosen Music On Hold
server. The fields below display the previously defined values for this Music On
Hold server.
Step 5
if necessary.
Step 6
Click Update.
The Status changes from Ready to Update completed. The MOH Servers list
shows the updated Music On Hold server as highlighted.
Related Topics
Copying a Music On Hold Server

Perform the following procedure to copy an existing Music On Hold server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

27-14
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Step 3

Step 4
server. The fields below the Music On Hold server title display the previously
defined values for this Music On Hold server.
Step 5
Step 6
if necessary.
Note
Step 7
You must change at least the Music On Hold Server Name. You must
also select a different server (node).
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The MOH Servers list shows
the new Music On Hold server as highlighted.
Related Topics

OL-1210-01
27-15
Chapter 27
Deleting a Music On Hold Server

Perform the following procedure to delete an existing Music On Hold server.
Note
You must remove a Music On Hold server from any media resource
groups that include the server before you can delete the Music On
Hold server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

Step 3

Step 4
Step 5

You are about to permanently delete this Music On Hold Server. This action
cannot be undone.
Continue?
Step 6
Click OK.
The chosen Music On Hold server no longer appears on the MOH Servers list. The
Status changes from Ready to Delete completed.
27-16
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Related Topics
Resetting a Music On Hold Server

Perform the following procedure to reset an existing Music On Hold server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2

Step 3

Step 4
Step 5
Click the Reset button.

This will reset the MOH Server. Calls currently on Hold using this MOH Server
will no longer hear the audio. Continue?

OL-1210-01
27-17
Chapter 27
Step 6
Click OK.
A popup window displays the following message:
The MOH Server is being reset.
Step 7
Click OK.
Cisco CallManager resets the chosen Music On Hold server. The MOH Servers
list shows the reset Music On Hold server as highlighted.
Related Topics
27-18
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Music On Hold Server Configuration Settings

Table 27-3 describes the configuration settings used for configuring Music On
Hold servers.
Table 27-3 Music On Hold Server Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Device Information
Host Server
Use this required field to choose a host server for the

Music On Hold server. To do so, click the drop-down
arrow and choose a server from the list displayed.
For existing Music On Hold servers, this field is
display only.
Music On Hold
Server Name

Music On Hold server. This name can comprise up
to 15 characters. Valid characters include letters,
numbers, spaces, dashes, dots (periods), and
underscores.
Description
Enter a description for the Music On Hold server.

This description can comprise up to 50 characters.
Ensure Description does not contain ampersand (&),
double quotes (), brackets ([]), less than (<), greater
than (>), or the percent sign (%).
Device Pool
Use this required field to choose a device pool for

the Music On Hold server. To do so, click the
drop-down arrow and choose a device pool from the
list displayed.
Maximum Half
Duplex Streams
Enter a number in this required field for the

maximum number of half-duplex streams that this
Music On Hold server supports. Valid values range
from 0 to 500.
Maximum Multicast
Connections
Enter a number in this required field for the

maximum number of multicast connections that this
Music On Hold server supports. Valid values range
from 0 to 999999.

OL-1210-01
27-19
Chapter 27
Table 27-3 Music On Hold Server Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Fixed Audio Source

Device
Enter the device name of the fixed audio source

device. This device serves as the per-server override
used if the server has a special sound device
installed.
Run Flag
Use this required field to choose a run flag for the

Music On Hold server. To do so, click the drop-down
arrow and choose Yes or No.
Multicast Audio Source Information

Enable Multicast
Audio Sources on
this MOH Server
Check or uncheck this check box to enable or disable

multicast of audio sources for this Music On Hold
server.
Note
If this MOH server belongs to a multicast

media resource group, a message asks
you to enable multicast on this MOH
server or to update the specified media
resource group(s) either by removing this
MOH server or by changing the multicast
setting of each group listed.
27-20
OL-1210-01
Chapter 27

Field
Description
Base Multicast IP
Address
If multicast support is needed, enter the base

multicast IP address in this field. Valid IP addresses
for multicast range from 224.0.1.0 to
239.255.255.255.
Note
IP addresses between 224.0.1.0 and

238.255.255.255 fall in the reserved
range of IP multicast addresses for public
multicast applications. Use of such
addresses may interfere with existing
multicast applications on the Internet.
Cisco strongly recommends using IP
addresses in the range reserved for
administratively controlled applications
on private networks (239.0.0.0 239.255.255.255).
Note
Multicast by IP address is preferable in

firewall situations.
Base Multicast Port

Number
If multicast support is needed, enter the base

multicast port number in this field. Valid multicast
port numbers include even numbers that range from
16384 to 32767.
Increment Multicast
on
Click Port Number to increment multicast on port

number.
Click IP Address to increment multicast on IP
address.
Selected Multicast Audio Sources

Note
Only audio sources for which the Allow Multicasting check box was
checked appear in this listing.
No.
Display only. This field designates Music On Hold

audio stream number associated with a particular
multicast audio source. Only audio sources defined
as allowing multicasting display.

OL-1210-01
27-21
Chapter 27
Field
Description
Audio Source Name
Display only. This field designates name of audio

source defined as allowing multicasting.
Max Hops
For each multicast audio source, enter the maximum

number of router hops through which multicast
packets should pass. Valid values range from 1 to 15.
Note
Using high values can lead to network

saturation. This field is also known as
Time to Live.
Related Topics
27-22
OL-1210-01
C H A P T E R
28
Media Resource Group Configuration

Media resource management comprises working with media resource groups and
media resource group lists. Media resource management provides a mechanism
for managing media resources, so that they can be shared by all
Cisco CallManagers within a cluster. Media resources provide conferencing,
transcoding, media termination, and music on hold services.
You can associate a Media Resource Group, a logical grouping of media servers,
with a geographical location or with a site as desired. You can also form Media
Resource Groups to control the usage of servers or the type of service (unicast or
multicast) desired.
You can group devices of the following types into a single Media Resource Group:
Conference Bridge (CFB)
Media Termination Point (MTP)
Music On Hold Server (MOH)
Transcoder (XCODE)
Use the following topics to configure Media Resource Groups:
Adding a Media Resource Group, page 28-2
Updating a Media Resource Group, page 28-3
Copying a Media Resource Group, page 28-4
Deleting a Media Resource Group, page 28-6
Media Resource Group Configuration Settings, page 28-7

78-13310-01
28-1
Chapter 28
Adding a Media Resource Group
Understanding Media Resources, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Media Resource Group and Media Resource Group List Configuration

Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Related Topics
Adding a Media Resource Group

Perform the following procedure to add a Media Resource Group.
Note
You cannot delete a media resource, such as a conference bridge, that is part
of a Media Resource Group unless you first remove the resource from the
Media Resource Group or you delete the Media Resource Group that contains
the media resource.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Media Resource Group.

The Media Resource Group Configuration window displays. The Media Resource
Group: New title displays with a Status: Ready indicator.
Step 2
In the Media Resource Groups list, choose <Add New Media Resource Group>.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The Media Resource Groups
list now includes the new Media Resource Group.
Related Topics
28-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 28

Updating a Media Resource Group

Updating a Media Resource Group

Perform the following procedure to update an existing Media Resource Group.
Note
You cannot delete a media resource, such as a conference bridge, that is part
of a Media Resource Group unless you first remove the resource from the
Media Resource Group or you delete the Media Resource Group that contains
the media resource.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
From the Media Resource Groups list, choose an existing Media Resource Group.
The Media Resource Group title displays the name of the chosen Media Resource
Group. The fields below display the previously defined values for this Media
Resource Group.
Step 3
if necessary.
Note
Restarting devices resets all devices associated with this Media

Resource Group. Cisco CallManager may drop active calls on affected
gateways.

78-13310-01
28-3
Chapter 28
Copying a Media Resource Group
Step 4
Click Update.
The Status changes from Ready to Update completed. The Media Resource
Groups list shows the updated Media Resource Group as highlighted.
Step 5
To restart all devices in a Media Resource Group (both available and selected
resources), click the Restart Devices button.
Related Topics


Perform the following procedure to copy an existing Media Resource Group.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Group. The fields below the Media Resource Group title display the previously
defined values for this Media Resource Group.
Step 3
28-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 28

Step 4
Step 5
if necessary.To restart all devices in a Media Resource Group (both available and
selected resources), click the Restart Devices button.
Note
You must change at least the Media Resource Group Name.
Note

Resource Group. Cisco CallManager may drop active calls on affected
gateways.
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The Media Resource Groups
list shows the new Media Resource Group as highlighted.
Related Topics


78-13310-01
28-5
Chapter 28
Deleting a Media Resource Group
Deleting a Media Resource Group

Perform the following procedure to delete an existing Media Resource Group.
Note
You cannot delete a Media Resource Group that is assigned to a Media

Resource Group List unless you first remove the Media Resource Group from
the Media Resource Group List(s) to which it is assigned.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Group. The fields below the Media Resource Group title display the previously
defined values for this Media Resource Group.
Step 3

You are about to permanently delete this Media Resource Group. This action
cannot be undone.
Continue?
Step 4
Click OK.
The chosen Media Resource Group no longer appears on the Media Resource
Groups list. The Status changes from Ready to Delete completed.
Related Topics
28-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 28

Media Resource Group Configuration Settings


Table 28-1 describes the configuration settings used for configuring Media
Resource Groups.
Table 28-1 Media Resource Group Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Media Resource Group

Name

Cisco CallManager to identify the Media Resource
Group. This name can comprise up to 50 characters.
Valid characters include letters, numbers, spaces,
dashes, dots (periods), and underscores.
Description
Enter a description for the Media Resource Group.

This description can comprise up to 50 characters.
Ensure Description does not contain double quotes
(), less than (<), greater than (>), or the percent sign
(%).
Devices for this Group
This area comprises two panes that are used to define

the media resources for a Media Resource Group:
Available Media Resources and Selected Media
Resources.

78-13310-01
28-7
Chapter 28
Table 28-1 Media Resource Group Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Available Media
Resources
This pane lists the media resources that can be

chosen for a Media Resource Group. The list
includes the following media resource types:
Conference Bridges (CFB)
Media Termination Points (MTP)
Music On Hold Servers (MOH)
Transcoders (XCODE)
Music On Hold servers configured for multicast are

labeled as (MOH)[Multicast].
To add a media resource for this Media Resource
Group, choose one from the list and click the down
arrow. After a media resource is added, its name
moves to the Selected Media Resources pane.
Selected Media
Resources
This pane lists the media resources that were chosen

for a Media Resource Group. For any Media
Resource Group, you must choose at least one media
resource.
To delete (unselect) a media resource, choose its
name in the list and click the up arrow.
Use Multicast for MOH

Audio
To use multicast for Music On Hold Audio, check

this check box. To do so, make sure at least one of
the Selected Media Resources is a multicast MOH
server.
Note
The system administrator is responsible

for configuring or creating multicast
audio sources.
Related Topics
28-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 28



78-13310-01
28-9
Chapter 28
28-10
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
29
Media Resource Group List

Configuration
Media resource management comprises working with media resource groups and
media resource group lists. Media resource management provides a mechanism
for managing media resources, so that they can be shared by all
Cisco CallManagers within a cluster. Media resources provide conferencing,
transcoding, media termination, and music on hold services.
A Media Resource Group List provides a prioritized grouping of Media Resource
Groups. An application selects the required media resource, such as a Music On
Hold server, from among the available media resources according to the priority
order defined in a Media Resource Group List.
Use the following topics to configure Media Resource Group Lists:
Adding a Media Resource Group List, page 29-2
Updating a Media Resource Group List, page 29-3
Copying a Media Resource Group List, page 29-4
Deleting a Media Resource Group List, page 29-5
Media Resource Group List Configuration Settings, page 29-7
Related Topics


78-13310-01
29-1
Chapter 29
Media Resource Group List Configuration
Adding a Media Resource Group List
Adding a Media Resource Group List

Perform the following procedure to add a Media Resource Group List.
Note

the Media Resource Group List(s) to which it is assigned or you delete the
Media Resource Group List.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Media Resource Group List.

The Media Resource Group List Configuration window displays. The Media
Resource Group List: New title displays with a Status: Ready indicator.
Step 2
In the Media Resource Group Lists list, choose <Add New Media Resource Group
List>.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The Media Resource Group
Lists list now includes the new Media Resource Group List.
Related Topics

29-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 29

Updating a Media Resource Group List
Updating a Media Resource Group List

Perform the following procedure to update an existing Media Resource Group
List.
Note

the Media Resource Group List(s) to which it is assigned or you delete the
Media Resource Group List.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
From the Media Resource Group Lists list, choose an existing Media Resource
Group List.
The Media Resource Group List title displays the name of the chosen Media
Resource Group List. The fields below display the previously defined values for
this Media Resource Group List.
Step 3
if necessary. To restart all devices in a Media Resource Group List (both available
and selected Media Resource Groups), click the Restart Devices button.
Note
Step 4

Resource Group List. Cisco CallManager may drop active calls on
affected gateways.
Click Update.
The Status changes from Ready to Update completed. The Media Resource Group
Lists list shows the updated Media Resource Group List as highlighted.

78-13310-01
29-3
Chapter 29
Copying a Media Resource Group List
Step 5
To restart all devices in a Media Resource Group List (both available and selected
Media Resource Groups), click the Restart Devices button.

Copying a Media Resource Group List

Perform the following procedure to copy an existing Media Resource Group List.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Group List.
Resource Group List. The fields below the Media Resource Group List title
display the previously defined values for this Media Resource Group List.
Step 3
Step 4
if necessary. To restart all devices in a Media Resource Group List (both available
and selected Media Resource Groups), click the Restart Devices button.
29-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 29

Deleting a Media Resource Group List
Step 5
Note
You must change at least the Media Resource Group List Name.
Note

Resource Group List. Cisco CallManager may drop active calls on
affected gateways.
Click Insert.
The Status changes from Ready to Insert completed. The Media Resource Group
Lists list shows the new Media Resource Group List as highlighted.


Perform the following procedure to delete an existing Media Resource Group
List.
Note
You cannot delete a Media Resource Group List that is assigned to a device
pool(s) or to a device(s). You must first modify the device pool(s) or device(s)
to which a Media Resource Group List is assigned.

78-13310-01
29-5
Chapter 29
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Group List.
Resource Group List. The fields below the Media Resource Group List title
display the previously defined values for this Media Resource Group List.
Step 3

You are about to permanently delete this Media Resource Group List. This action
cannot be undone.
Continue?
Step 4
Click OK.
The chosen Media Resource Group List no longer appears on the Media Resource
Group Lists list. The Status changes from Ready to Delete completed.

29-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 29

Media Resource Group List Configuration Settings

Table 29-1 describes the configuration settings used for configuring Media
Resource Group Lists.
Table 29-1 Media Resource Group List Configuration Settings
Field
Description

List Name

Cisco CallManager to identify the Media Resource
Group List. This name can comprise up to 50
characters. Valid characters include letters, numbers,
spaces, dashes, dots (periods), and underscores.
Available Media
Resource Groups
This pane lists the media resource groups that can be

chosen for a Media Resource Group List. The list
includes only previously defined media resource
groups.
To add a media resource group for this Media
Resource Group List, choose one from the list and
click the down arrow located between the two panes.
After a media resource group is added, its name
moves to the Selected Media Resource Groups pane.
Selected Media Resource This pane lists the media resource groups that were
Groups
chosen for a Media Resource Group List. For any
Media Resource Group List, you must choose at
least one media resource group.
To delete (unselect) a media resource group, choose
its name in the list and click the up arrow between
the two panes.
Because media resource groups are listed in order of
priority (highest to lowest), you must use the up and
down arrows located to the right of this pane to
reorder the Media Resource Group priority. To do so,
choose a Media Resource Group in the list and use
the up or down arrow to change its priority.

78-13310-01
29-7
Chapter 29
Related Topics

29-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
30
Service Parameters Configuration

Service parameters for Cisco CallManager (Release 3.0 and later) allow you to
configure different services on selected servers. You can insert and delete services
on a selected server, as well as modify the service parameters for those services.
Note
Caution
Services must be installed in the database for them to work. For

example, if you add a conference bridge to the database, it may not
physically exist. It will only be installed if you installed the Media
Streaming App service. You can install services from the
Cisco CallManager CD or using the Cisco Service Configuration
utility. For more information on installing services, refer to the
Service Installation and Configuration section in the
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure. Cisco

recommends that you do not make any changes to service parameters unless
For information about working with service parameters, see the following topics:
Adding a New Service on a Server, page 30-2
Deleting a Service From a Server, page 30-3
Updating a Service Parameter, page 30-4
Services, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
30-1
Chapter 30
Adding a New Service on a Server
Adding a New Service on a Server

This section describes how to add a new service on a server.
Before You Begin
Ensure the following prerequisite is met before proceeding with the steps:
Servers are configured.
Services are installed. For more information on installing services, refer to

the Service Installation and Configuration section in the
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Service Parameters.
Step 2
From the Server drop-down list box, choose a server.
Step 3
From the Service drop-down list box, choose a service.
Step 4
Click Insert.
The Cisco CallManager adds the service to the server, and the service displays in
the Services list.
Related Topics
30-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 30

Deleting a Service From a Server
Deleting a Service From a Server

You can use the Service Parameter Configuration pane to delete any service
(except the Cisco CallManager and the Cisco Database Layer Monitor) from a
server. The service continues to run in the background on your system unless you
deactivate it with the Cisco Service Configuration utility.
This section describes how to delete services from a server.
Note
For information about deleting the Cisco CallManager service from a server,
see the Deleting a Cisco CallManager section on page 3-4. For information
about the Cisco Service Configuration utility, refer to the Service Installation
and Configuration section in the Cisco CallManager System Guide.
Before You Begin
Ensure the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps. See
the Server Configuration section on page 2-1.
Make sure the service is present.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Server drop-down list box, choose a service.
Step 3
From the Services list, choose the service you want to delete.
Step 4

A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete this service
and that you cannot undo the action.
Step 5
Click OK to continue or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
30-3
Chapter 30
Updating a Service Parameter

This section describes how to update a service parameter.
Note
If you set a service parameter value to the suggested value displayed on the
Service Parameters Configuration pane and the suggested value changes in a
subsequent Cisco CallManager release, the system automatically changes the
parameter value to match the updated suggested value when you upgrade to
that release. If you set a service parameter to a value other than the suggested
value, the system does not change the parameter value when you upgrade.
Before You Begin
Ensure the following prerequisites are met before proceeding with the steps. See
the Server Configuration section on page 2-1 for more information.
Caution
Make sure the service is configured.
Some changes to service parameters may cause system failure. Cisco

recommends that you do not make any changes to service parameters unless
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Server drop-down list box, choose a server.

The pane refreshes.
Step 3
From the Services list, choose the service containing the parameter you want to
update.
30-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 30

Step 4
Update the appropriate parameter value.

To view the list with a particular parameter at the top, click that parameter on the
Service Parameter Configuration pane. To view a list of parameters and their
descriptions, click the i button in the upper, right corner of the pane, as shown in
the Figure 30-1:
Figure 30-1 Service Parameter Configuration Pane
Note
Step 5
Some services contain service parameters that should rarely be

changed. The Cisco CallManager Administration does not
automatically display these parameters when you access the Service
Parameter Configuration pane. To view all parameters, click
Advanced. Once all parameters are displayed, you can redisplay the
basic parameters by clicking Condensed.
Click Update.
The pane refreshes, and Cisco CallManager updates the service parameter with
your changes.
Related Topics
Services, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
30-5
Chapter 30
30-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
31
Transcoder Configuration
The Media Resource Manager (MRM) has responsibility for resource registration
and resource reservation of transcoders within a Cisco CallManager cluster.
Cisco CallManager simultaneously supports registration of both the MTP and
Transcoder and concurrent MTP and transcoder functionality within a single call.
The maximum transcoding sessions per port is 24. The following list gives the
supported transcoding capacity and sessions per port:
G711G711 MTP: 24 (no DSP is involved)
G729G729 MTP: 24 (no DSP is involved)
G711G723 transcoding: 24
G711G729 transcoding: 24
G711GSM Full Rate (FR) transcoding: 24
G711GSM Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) transcoding: 24
The Cisco CallManager invokes a transcoder on behalf of endpoint devices when

the two devices are using different codecs, and would normally not be able to
communicate. When inserted into a call, the transcoder converts the data streams
between the two disparate codecs to enable communications between them.
Transcoders are accessible by all Cisco CallManagers within a cluster through the
Media Resource Manager (MRM). The MRM determines the number of
transcoders needed for a call and allocates the appropriate number of connections.
The MRM makes use of Cisco CallManager media resource groups and media
resource group lists. The media resource group list allows transcoders to
communicate with other devices in the assigned media resource group, which in
turn, provides management of resources within a cluster.

78-13310-01
31-1
Chapter 31
Configuring a Transcoder
A transcoder control process is created for each transcoder device defined in the
database. Each transcoder registers with the MRM when it initializes. The MRM
keeps track of the transcoder resources and advertises their availability
throughout the cluster.
Use the following topics to configure transcoders:
Updating a Transcoder, page 31-3
Copying a Transcoder, page 31-4
Deleting a Transcoder, page 31-5
Transcoder Configuration Settings, page 31-6
Configuring a Transcoder
This section describes how to configure a transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Service > Transcoder.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert.
The pane refreshes showing specific information, including the status, for the
transcoder you just configured. The transcoder should now appear in the list on
the left side of the pane.
Related Topics
Conference Bridge Configuration, page 25-1
31-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 31
Updating a Transcoder
Updating a Transcoder
This section describes how to update a transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Transcoders list on the left side of the pane, click the transcoder you
want to update.
The pane refreshes displaying the transcoder you selected.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Update.
A message displays stating that the transcoder must be reset before the changes
will take effect.
Step 5
Click OK.
The pane refreshes, showing the updated transcoder.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
31-3
Chapter 31
Copying a Transcoder
Copying a Transcoder
This section describes how to copy a transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Transcoders list, choose the transcoder you want to copy.
The pane refreshes displaying the transcoder you selected.
Step 3
Click Copy.
The pane refreshes again and displays the transcoder with a Copy of... name in the
Current Transcoder field.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Insert.
The screen refreshes and the new transcoder appears in the transcoder list on the
left side of the pane.
Related Topics
31-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 31
Deleting a Transcoder
Deleting a Transcoder
This section describes how to delete a transcoder.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Transcoders list, choose the transcoder you want to delete.
The pane refreshes, displaying the transcoder you selected.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A message displays stating that you are about to permanently delete this
transcoder and that you cannot undo this action.
Step 4
Click OK if you want to continue or Cancel to cancel the deletion.

When the pane is refreshed, the transcoder you deleted should no longer appear
in the transcoder list.
Related Topics
Transcoders, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
31-5
Chapter 31
Transcoder Configuration Settings
Transcoder Configuration Settings

Table 31-1 describes the transcoder configuration settings.
Table 31-1 Transcoder Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
Enter a MAC address (must be at least 12 characters).

Use Host Name for an IOS gateway.
Description
Enter a description (up to 15 characters).
Device Pool
Choose a device pool. For more detailed information on

the selected device pool, click View Details.
Special Load
Information
Enter any special load information into the Special Load

Information field, or leave blank to use default.
Related Topics
31-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
32
Starting and Stopping Services

This section describes how to start and stop the Cisco CallManager and other
available services. When you stop and start a Cisco CallManager, all
Cisco IP phones and gateways currently registered to that Cisco CallManager fail
over to their secondary Cisco CallManager. All other installed applications that
are homed to that Cisco CallManager, such as conference bridge and Cisco
Messaging Interface (CMI), also stop and start. Devices and phones only restart
if they cannot register with another Cisco CallManager.
Caution
Stopping Cisco CallManager stops call processing for all devices controlled
by that Cisco CallManager. If possible, avoid stopping and starting the
CallManager service during peak hours as this may cause slow performance
and extended outages for devices.
You can start and stop services from Windows or from the control center in
Cisco CallManager Serviceability. For information on using the control center,
refer to the Cisco CallManager Serviceability Administration Guide.
For information on starting and stopping services from Windows, see the
following topic:
Using Windows, page 32-2

78-13310-01
32-1
Chapter 32
Starting and Stopping Services
Using Windows
Using Windows
This section describes how to use the Windows Control Panel to start or stop the
Cisco CallManager service.
Procedure
Step 1
Caution
On the server that has the configured service you want to start or stop, open the
Windows Control Panel for Services.
Make sure you are accessing the correct Cisco CallManager server before
attempting to start or stop services on that Cisco CallManager.
Step 2
Choose the Cisco CallManager service you want to start or stop.
Step 3
Right-click and choose Start or Stop from the menu, depending on the action you
want to perform.
32-2
78-13310-01
A R T
C H A P T E R
33
Call Park Configuration

The call park feature allows you to place a call on hold, so that it can be retrieved
from another phone in the system. For example, if you are on an active call at your
phone, you can park the call to a call park extension such as 1234. Someone on
another phone in your system can then dial 1234 to retrieve the call.
You can define either a single directory number or a range of directory numbers
for use as call park extension numbers. You can park only one call at each call
park extension number.
Use the following topics to add, update, or delete a call park extension:
Adding a Call Park Number, page 33-2
Updating a Call Park Number, page 33-3
Deleting a Call Park Number, page 33-4
Call Park Configuration Settings, page 33-5

78-13310-01
33-1
Chapter 33
Adding a Call Park Number
Adding a Call Park Number

This section describes how to add a single call park extension number or range of
extension numbers.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Feature > Call Park.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert to save the new call park numbers in the database.
The call park number you added should appear in the Call Park Numbers/Ranges
list on the left side of the pane.
Related Topics
Call Park Configuration, page 33-1
33-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 33

Updating a Call Park Number
Updating a Call Park Number

This section describes how to update a call park extension number or range of
numbers.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Call Park Numbers/Ranges list, choose the call park number or range of
numbers you want to update.
Step 3
Note
Step 4
Before saving the changes, you can click Cancel Changes to reset all
fields to their original values.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
33-3
Chapter 33
Deleting a Call Park Number
Deleting a Call Park Number

This section describes how to delete call park numbers from the
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Call Park Numbers/Ranges list, choose the call park number or range of
numbers you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Related Topics
33-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 33

Call Park Configuration Settings

Table 33-1 describes the call park configuration settings.
Table 33-1 Call Park Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Call Park
Number/Range
Enter the call park extension number. You can enter

literal digits or the wildcard character X. For example,
enter 5555 to define a single call park extension number
of 5555, or enter 55XX to define a range of call park
extension numbers from 5500 to 5599.
Note
Partition
If you want to use a route partition to restrict access to

the call park numbers, choose the desired route partition
from the drop-down list box. If you do not want to
restrict access to the call park numbers, choose None for
the route partition.
Note
Cisco Call Manager
You can create a maximum of 100 call park

numbers with one call park range definition.
Make sure the call park numbers are unique.
Make sure the combination of call park

extension number and route partition are
unique within the Cisco CallManager cluster.
Using the drop-down list box, choose the

Cisco CallManager to which these call park numbers
apply.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
33-5
Chapter 33
33-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
34
Call Pickup and Group Call Pickup

Configuration
Two features, call pickup and group call pickup, allow you to answer a call that
comes in on a directory number other than your own. When you hear an incoming
call ringing on another phone, you can redirect the call to your phone by using the
call pickup feature.
Cisco IP phones provide two types of call pickup:
Call pickup allows users to pick up incoming calls within their own group.
Cisco CallManager automatically dials the appropriate call pickup group
number when a user activates this feature on a phone.
Group call pickup allows users to pick up incoming calls within their own
group or in other groups. Users must dial the appropriate call pickup group
number when a user activates this feature on a phone.
The same procedures apply for configuring both of these features, and they are
described in the following sections:
Adding a Call Pickup Group Number, page 34-2
Updating a Call Pickup Group Number, page 34-3
Deleting a Call Pickup Group Number, page 34-4
Call Pickup Configuration Settings, page 34-5
Assigning Directory Numbers to a Call Pickup Group, page 34-6

78-13310-01
34-1
Chapter 34
Call Pickup and Group Call Pickup Configuration
Adding a Call Pickup Group Number
Adding a Call Pickup Group Number

This section describes how to add a call pickup group number to the
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Feature > Call Pickup.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert to save the new call pickup group number in the database.
Related Topics
Call Pickup and Group Call Pickup Configuration, page 34-1
34-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 34

Updating a Call Pickup Group Number
Updating a Call Pickup Group Number

This section describes how to update a call pickup group number. When you
update a call pickup group number, Cisco CallManager automatically updates all
directory numbers assigned to that call pickup group.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose the call pickup group number you want to update from the Call Pickup
Directory Numbers pane on the left.
Step 3
Update the appropriate fields as described in Table 34-1. Before saving the
changes, you can click Cancel Changes to reset all fields to their original value.
Step 4
Related Topics

78-13310-01
34-3
Chapter 34
Deleting a Call Pickup Group Number
Deleting a Call Pickup Group Number

This section describes how to delete a call pickup group number from the
Caution
When you delete a call pickup group number, you disable the call pickup
feature for all directory numbers assigned to that group. To enable call pickup
again for those directory numbers, you must reassign each of them to a new
call pickup group. For details, see the Assigning Directory Numbers to a Call
Pickup Group section on page 34-6.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose the call pickup group number you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
The call pickup group no longer displays in the Partition list in the left pane.
Related Topics
34-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 34

Call Pickup Configuration Settings
Call Pickup Configuration Settings

Table 34-1 describes the call pickup configuration settings.
Table 34-1 Call Pickup Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Directory Number
Enter a unique directory number (integers) for the call

pickup group you want to add.
Partition
If you want to use a route partition to restrict access to

the call pickup group, choose the desired route partition
from the drop-down list box. If you do not want to
restrict access to the call pickup group, choose None for
the route partition.
Note
Make sure the combination of call pickup

group number and route partition is unique
within the Cisco CallManager cluster.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
34-5
Chapter 34
Assigning Directory Numbers to a Call Pickup Group
Assigning Directory Numbers to a Call Pickup Group

This section describes how to assign directory numbers to a call pickup group.
Only directory numbers assigned to a call pickup group can use both types of call
pickup: call pickup and group call pickup.
Before You Begin
Before you can assign a directory number to a call pickup group, you must create
a number for that group as described in the Adding a Call Pickup Group Number
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Phone.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate search criteria to find the directory number that you want to
assign to a call pickup group, and click Find.
A list of directory numbers that match the search criteria appears.
Step 3
Choose the phone where that directory number appears.
Step 4
Choose the desired directory number from the Directory Numbers list.
Step 5
Choose the desired call pickup group number from the Call Pickup Group
drop-down list box.
Step 6
Related Topics
34-6
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
35
Cisco IP Phone Services

Configuration
Using the Cisco CallManager Administration, you define and maintain the list of
Cisco IP Phone Services to which users can subscribe at their site. Cisco IP Phone
Services comprise XML applications that enable the display of interactive content
with text and graphics on Cisco IP Phones 7960/7940.
Cisco CallManager provides sample Cisco IP Phone Services applications. You
can also create customized Cisco IP phone applications for your site.
Once you configure the list of services, you can add services to the phones in the
database. You can view and modify settings for phones and device profiles in the
Cisco CallManager Administration. Users can log on to the Cisco CallManager
user preferences pane and subscribe to these services for their Cisco IP phones.
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service, page 35-2
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service, page 35-3
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service, page 35-4
Cisco IP Phone Service Configuration Settings, page 35-5
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter, page 35-6
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter, page 35-7
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter, page 35-8
Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter Settings, page 35-9

78-13310-01
35-1
Chapter 35
Cisco IP Phone Services Configuration
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service

Perform the following steps to add a Cisco IP Phone Service.
Caution
Do not put Cisco IP Phone Services on any Cisco CallManager server at your
site or any server associated with Cisco CallManager, such as the TFTP server
or directory database publisher server. This precaution eliminates the
possibility of errors in a Cisco IP Phone Service application having an impact
on Cisco CallManager performance or interrupting call-processing services.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Features > Cisco IP Phone Services.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Update to add the service.

Once the service is added to the list, you can add and configure parameters for the
service. See to the Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter section on
Related Topics
35-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 35

Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service

Perform the following steps to update a Cisco IP Phone Service (for example, to
change the service URL or other information).
Note
If you change the service URL, remove a Cisco IP Phone Service parameter,
or change the name of a phone service parameter for a phone service to which
users are subscribed, be sure to click Update Subscriptions to update all
currently subscribed users with the changes. If you do not do so, users must
resubscribe to the service to rebuild the URL correctly.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco IP Phone Services list, choose the Cisco IP Phone Service you
want to update.
Step 3
Step 4
Add, update, or delete parameters as needed as described in Adding a

Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter section on page 35-6, Updating a
Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter section on page 35-7, and Deleting a
Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter section on page 35-8.
Step 5
Update the Cisco IP Phone Services Configuration pane to apply the changes:
If the service was modified after subscriptions existed, click Update

Subscriptions to rebuild all user subscriptions. You must update
subscriptions if you have changed the service URL, removed a phone service
parameter, or changed the Parameter Name for a phone service parameter.
If the service is new and you do not need to rebuild user subscriptions, click
Update.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
35-3
Chapter 35
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service

Perform the following steps to update a Cisco IP Phone Service.
Note
When you delete a Cisco IP Phone service, Cisco CallManager removes all
service information, user subscriptions, and user subscription data from the
database.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco IP Phone Services list, choose the name of the Cisco IP Phone
Service you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Delete.
Related Topics
35-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 35

Cisco IP Phone Service Configuration Settings
Cisco IP Phone Service Configuration Settings

Table 35-1 describes the Cisco IP Phone service configuration settings.
Table 35-1 Cisco IP Phone Service Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Service Name
Enter the name of the service as it will display on the

menu of available services on the user preferences pane.
Service Description
Enter a description of the content provided by the

service.
Service URL
Enter the URL to the server where the Cisco IP Phone

Services application is located. Make sure this server is
independent of the servers in your Cisco CallManager
cluster. Do not specify a Cisco CallManager server or
any server associated with Cisco CallManager (such as a
TFTP server or directory database publisher server).
For the services to be available, the phones in the
Cisco CallManager cluster must have network
connectivity to the server.
To see a sample service application, go to the following
URL:
http://<Server>/ccmuser/sample/sample.asp
Where <Server> is a fully qualified domain name or an

IP address.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
35-5
Chapter 35
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter
Adding a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter

Use the following procedure to add and configure Cisco IP Phone Service
parameters. Add the phone service before you configure parameters. Refer to the
documentation for the individual Cisco IP Phone Service for specific information
about whether the service uses parameters, how those parameters should be
configured, and whether you should provide optional parameter definitions.
Procedure
Step 1

The Cisco IP Phone Services Configuration pane displays.
Step 2
From the Cisco IP Phone Services list, choose the service to which you wish to
add parameters.
Step 3
Click the New button to the right of the Parameters list box.
The Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter Configuration dialog appears.
Step 4
Step 5
To add the new parameter, Click Insert.
Step 6
Repeat Step 3 and Step 5 to add additional parameters, if needed.
Step 7
Click Insert and Close to add the last parameter.
Related Topics
35-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 35

Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter
Updating a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter

Perform the following steps to update a service parameter for a specific
Cisco IP Phone Service.
Note
If you remove a Cisco IP Phone Service parameter or change the parameter

name of a phone service for a phone service to which users are subscribed, be
sure to click Update Subscriptions to update all currently subscribed users
with the changes. If you do not do so, users must resubscribe to the service to
rebuild the URL correctly.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco IP Phone Services list, choose the phone service you want to
update.
Step 3
In the Parameters list box, choose the name of the parameter you want to update.
Step 4
Click Edit.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Update to apply the changes, or click Update and Close to apply the
changes and close the dialog.
Step 7

subscriptions if you changed the service URL, removed a phone service
parameter, or changed the name for a phone service parameter.
Update.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
35-7
Chapter 35
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter
Deleting a Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter

Perform the following steps to delete a Cisco IP Phone Service.
Note
If you remove a phone service parameter or modify the Parameter Name of a

phone service parameter for a phone service to which users are subscribed,
you must click Update Subscriptions to update all currently subscribed users
with the changes. If you do not do so, users must resubscribe to the service to
rebuild the URL correctly.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
From the Cisco IP Phone Services list, choose the phone service whose
parameters you want to delete.
Step 3
In the Parameters list box, choose the name of the parameter you want to delete.
Step 4
Click Delete.
Step 5
Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Step 6

subscriptions if you changed the service URL, removed a phone service
parameter, or changed the Parameter Name for a phone service parameter.
Update.
Related Topics
35-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 35

Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter Settings

Table 35-2 describes the Cisco IP Phone service parameter settings.
Table 35-2 Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter Settings
Field
Description
Parameter Name
Enter the exact query string parameter to use when

building the subscription URL, for example, symbol.
Parameter Display
Name
Enter a descriptive parameter name to display to the user

on the user preferences page., for example, Ticker
Symbol.
Default Value
Enter the default value for the parameter. This value will
display to the user when a service is being subscribed to
for the first time, for example, CSCO.
Parameter is
Required
Check the Parameter is Required box if the user must

enter data for this parameter before the subscription can
be saved.
Parameter
Description
Enter a description of the parameter. The text entered

here will be available to the user while they are
subscribing to the service. The parameter description
should provide information or examples to help users
input the correct value for the parameter.

78-13310-01
35-9
Chapter 35
35-10
78-13310-01
A R T
C H A P T E R
36
Cisco CallManager allows you to configure the following devices in your
telephony network:
Cisco voice-mail ports
CTI route points
Device profiles
Gatekeepers
Gateways
Phones
Adding Devices to Cisco CallManager, page 36-2
Restarting or Resetting a Device, page 36-2

78-13310-01
36-1
Chapter 36
Adding Devices to Cisco CallManager
Adding Devices to Cisco CallManager

Before you can use devices, such as gateways and Cisco IP phones in your IP
telephony network, you must add them to the Cisco CallManager configuration
database.
Refer to these sections for assistance in adding telephony devices to the
Cisco CallManager configuration database:
Adding a CTI Route Point, page 37-2
Adding a Gatekeeper, page 40-2
Adding Gateways to Cisco CallManager, page 41-2
Adding a Phone, page 42-4
Adding Phone Button Templates, page 43-2
Adding Cisco Voice Mail Ports, page 38-12
Restarting or Resetting a Device

At any time, you can restart or reset a device by clicking the Reset button on the
device pane or by clicking the Reset icon on the Find and List pane associated
with the device, if available. You can restart a device without shutting it down by
clicking the Restart button. You can shut down a device and bring it back up
again by clicking the Reset button. If you want to return to the previous window
without resetting or restarting the device, click Close.
Note
Restarting or resetting a gateway drops any calls in progress using that

gateway. Other devices wait until calls are complete before restarting or
resetting.
36-2
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
37
CTI Route Point Configuration

A computer telephony integration (CTI) route point designates a virtual device
that can receive multiple, simultaneous calls for application-controlled
redirection.
For first-party call control, you must add a CTI port for each active voice line.
Applications that use CTI route points and CTI ports include Cisco SoftPhone,
Cisco IP Auto Attendant, and Cisco IP Interactive Voice Response System. Once
you add a CTI route point to Cisco CallManager Administration, information
from the RIS Data Collector service displays on the CTI Route Point
Configuration pane. When available, the IP address of the device and the name of
the Cisco CallManager with which the device registered display.
For detailed instructions on how to configure CTI route points and CTI ports
associated with these applications, refer to the documentation and online help
included with these applications.
This section describes the following basic procedures:
Modifying a CTI Route Point, page 37-3
Deleting a CTI Route Point, page 37-4
Finding CTI Route Points, page 37-5
Resetting a CTI Route Point, page 37-6
CTI Route Point Configuration Settings, page 37-8
Computer Telephony Integration, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
37-1
Chapter 37
Adding a CTI Route Point
Adding a CTI Route Point

Perform the following procedure to add a CTI route point.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > CTI Route Point.
Step 2
Click the Add a New CTI Route Point link.
Step 3
Enter the appropriate settings, as defined in Table 37-1.
Step 4
Click Insert to add the new CTI route point.

When prompted to add a directory number for line 1, click either OK to add the
directory number or Cancel to continue without adding a directory number. For
instructions on how to add and configure directory numbers, refer to the Adding
a Directory Number section on page 42-28.
Once you add a CTI route point to Cisco CallManager Administration,
information from the RIS Data Collector service displays on the CTI Route Point
the Cisco CallManager with which the device registered display as illustrated in
Figure 37-1.
Figure 37-1 CTI Route Point Configuration Pane
37-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 37

Modifying a CTI Route Point
Related Topics
CTI Route Point Configuration, page 37-1
Modifying a CTI Route Point

Perform the following steps to modify a CTI route point.
Procedure
Step 1

The Find/List CTI Route Points pane displays.
Step 2
Enter the search criteria needed to locate the CTI route point you want to modify.
Step 3
Click Find.
The pane updates to display a list of CTI route points that match the specified
search criteria.
Step 4
Choose the name of the CTI route point whose settings you want to modify.
The pane refreshes to show the current settings for the selected CTI route point.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Update to apply the changes.

The pane refreshes to display the new settings.

78-13310-01
37-3
Chapter 37
Deleting a CTI Route Point
Related Topics
Deleting a CTI Route Point

Perform the following procedure to delete a CTI route point:
Procedure
Step 1

The Find/List CTI Route Points pane displays.
Step 2
Specify the search criteria needed to locate the CTI route point you want to delete.
Step 3
Click Find.
The pane refreshes to display a list of the CTI route points that match the specified
search criteria.
Step 4
Step 5
Check the check boxes next to the CTI route points you want to delete and
click Delete Selected.
Delete all of the CTI route points on the pane by checking the check box in
the matching records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Choose the name of the CTI route point you want to delete from the list to
display its current settings and click Delete.
Click OK to permanently delete the CTI route point.
37-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 37

Finding CTI Route Points
Related Topics
Finding CTI Route Points

Perform the following procedure to find and list CTI route points.
Procedure
Step 1

The Find and List Route Points pane displays.
Step 2
Choose the search criteria to use. To list all items, do not enter any search text, or
use "Device Name is not empty" as the search criteria.
Step 3
Click Find.
The pane refreshes to display a list of the CTI route points that match the specified
search criteria. This pane also lists the total number of CTI route points and panes.
Step 4
To view the next set of CTI route points, click Next.
Note
You can delete or reset multiple CTI route points from the Find and
List Route Points pane by checking the check boxes next to the
appropriate CTI route points and clicking Delete Selected to delete
the CTI route points or clicking Reset Selected to reset the CTI route
points. You can choose all CTI route points on the pane by checking
the check box in the matching records title bar.

78-13310-01
37-5
Chapter 37
Resetting a CTI Route Point
Related Topics

Perform the following procedure to reset a CTI route point.
Procedure
Step 1

The Find and List CTI Route Points pane displays.
Step 2
Choose the search criteria to use.
Step 3
Click Find.
The pane displays a list of CTI route points that match the search criteria as
illustrated in Figure 37-2.
Figure 37-2 Find and List CTI Route Points Configuration Pane
37-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 37

Step 4
Check the check boxes next to the CTI route points you want to reset. To select
all CTI route points on the pane, check the check box in the matching records title
bar.
Step 5
Click Reset Selected.

The Reset Device dialog displays.
Step 6
Click one of the following items:
Restart DeviceRestarts a device without shutting it down.
Reset DeviceShuts down a device and brings it back up.
CloseCloses the Reset Device dialog without performing any action.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
37-7
Chapter 37
CTI Route Point Configuration Settings
CTI Route Point Configuration Settings

Table 37-1 describes the CTI route point configuration settings.
Table 37-1 CTI Route Point Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Device Name
Enter unique identifier for this device, from 1 to 15

characters, including alphanumeric, dot, dash, or
underscores.
Description
Enter a descriptive name for the CTI route point.
Device Pool
Choose the name of a Device Pool. The device pool

specifies the collection of properties for this device
including CallManager Group, Date/Time Group,
Region, and Calling Search Space for auto-registration.
Location
Choose the appropriate location for this route point. The

location specifies the total bandwidth available for calls
to and from this location. A location setting of None
means that the locations feature does not keep track of
the bandwidth consumed by this route point.
Calling Search Space Choose a calling search space. The calling search space
specifies the collection of partitions searched to
determine how a collected (originating) number should
be routed.
Related Topics
37-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
38
Cisco Voice Mail Configuration

The optional Cisco Unified Open Network Exchange (uOne) software and
Cisco Unity software, available as part of Cisco IP Telephony Solutions, provide
voice-messaging capability for users when they are unavailable to answer calls.
This section describes the procedures required for adding and configuring
Cisco voice-mail ports in Cisco CallManager for both these voice-mail systems.
For more information about configuring Cisco CallManager with Cisco uOne,
refer to the installation and configuration documentation that shipped with the
software. For more information about configuring Cisco Unity, refer to the
Cisco CallManager 3.1 and Dual Switch Integration Guide.
Related Topics
Using the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard, page 38-2
Setting up the MWI Device, page 38-9
MWI Device Configuration Settings, page 38-10
Configuring Cisco Voice Mail Ports, page 38-11
Cisco uOne Configuration Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Cisco Unity Configuration Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
38-1
Chapter 38
Using the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard

The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard tool allows Cisco CallManager administrators
to quickly add and delete ports associated with a Cisco voice-mail server to the
Cisco CallManager database. This section describes the following procedures:
Adding a New Cisco Voice Mail Server and Ports, page 38-2
Adding Ports to an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server, page 38-6
Deleting Ports from an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server, page 38-8
Adding a New Cisco Voice Mail Server and Ports

Perform the following steps to use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to add a new
Cisco voice mail server and ports to the Cisco CallManager database.
Before You Begin
The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard requires a range of consecutive directory
numbers for the voice-mail ports. Make sure the voice-mail pilot number and
subsequent numbers are available.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard.

If no Cisco voice-mail ports exist, the wizard prompts you to enter the name of
the Cisco voice-mail server to add (see Step 4). Otherwise, continue with Step 2.
Step 2
Choose Create a new Cisco Voice Mail server and add ports to it.
Step 3
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Server pane displays.
Step 4
Enter the name of the Cisco voice-mail server.
Note
For Cisco uOne systems, this name must match the CMDeviceName
value in the SS.ini uOne configuration file (the default is CiscoUM).
You do not need to add the -VI<port_number> suffix, because the
wizard automatically appends this when adding the ports.
38-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Step 5
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports pane displays.
Step 6
From the drop-down list box, choose the number of ports to add.
Step 7
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Device Information pane displays.
Step 8
Enter the appropriate configuration settings, as described in Table 38-1. The

wizard applies these configuration settings to all of the new ports.
Table 38-1 Voice Mail Port Wizard Device Information Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Description
Enter the purpose of device.
Device Pool
Choose the default value Default Pool.
Calling Search Space Choose the appropriate calling search space. A calling
search space comprises a collection of partitions that are
searched for numbers called from this directory number.
Location
Choose the default value None.

The location specifies the total bandwidth available for
calls to and from this device. A location setting of None
the bandwidth consumed by this device.
Step 9
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Pilot Number pane displays.

78-13310-01
38-3
Chapter 38
Step 10
Enter the pilot number settings as described in Table 38-2.

Table 38-2 Voice Mail Port Wizard Pilot Number Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Pilot Number
Enter the number people call to access the Cisco

voice-mail server. Each new port receives the next
available directory number.
Note
Partition
For Cisco uOne systems, make sure this

number is the same as the Cisco uOne pilot
directory number configured in the
Cisco uOne DialMap.ini file.
Choose the partition to which this set of directory

numbers belong. Choose None if partitions are not used.
If you choose a partition, you must choose a calling
search space that includes that partition.
Display
Step 11
This field indicates text that appears on the calling party

phone when a call is placed to this line.
Click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Operator Number pane displays.
Step 12
Enter an operator number, if necessary.

The operator number designates the number to which the last port is forwarded.
The voice-mail system directs a caller to this number if all ports on the Cisco
voice-mail server are busy. Supplying an attendant number here gives the caller
another chance to reach the party they were calling, instead of getting a busy
signal if all ports are in use.
38-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Step 13
Click Next.
A summary pane that lists the settings you configured in the previous panes
displays. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard automatically assigns the correct
values for the Forward Busy and Forward No Answer fields for each port.
Step 14
If this information is correct, click Finish to add the new ports.

If the information shown is not correct, click the Back button to edit the
information or Cancel to quit without adding any ports.
Next Steps
Configure the service parameters for your voice-mail server. For more
information, refer to the Cisco CallManager Service Parameters for Cisco uOne
section in the Cisco CallManager System Guide.
For Cisco uOne systems, make sure you also set up the message-waiting indicator
(MWI) device. For more information, see the Setting up the MWI Device
Related Topics
Cisco Voice Mail Configuration, page 38-1
MWI Device Configuration Settings, page 38-10

78-13310-01
38-5
Chapter 38
Adding Ports to an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server

Perform the following steps to use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to add ports
to an existing Cisco voice-mail server.
Before You Begin
The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard requires a range of consecutive directory
numbers for the voice-mail ports. Make sure the voice-mail pilot number and
subsequent numbers are available.
The voice-mail pilot number designates the number people call to access the
Cisco voice-mail server.
Note
For Cisco uOne systems, this number designates the Cisco voice-mail pilot
directory number configured in the Cisco uOne DialMap.ini file. Refer to the
Cisco uOne documentation for information about the Cisco uOne .ini files.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose Add Ports to an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server.
Step 3
Click Next.
Step 4
From the list, choose the name of an existing Cisco voice-mail server (pilot
number), and click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports pane displays and identifies the number of ports that
are currently configured.
Step 5
From the list, choose the number of ports to add and click Next.
A summary pane displays the configuration information for the Cisco voice-mail
server to which you added the ports. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard
automatically selects consecutive directory numbers following the last port and
uses the same Partition and Calling Search Space settings as the Cisco voice-mail
pilot directory number. You can enter a different range of directory numbers in the
New Directory Numbers field.
Step 6
Click Next.
38-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Step 7
If needed, add, change, or remove the Operator Number for this Cisco voice mail
server and ports; then, click Next.
The Ready to Add Ports summary pane displays the new settings.
Step 8
If this information is correct, click Finish to add the new ports.

information or click Cancel to quit without adding any ports.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
38-7
Chapter 38
Deleting Ports from an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Server

Perform the following steps to use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to delete
ports from an existing Cisco voice-mail server.
Procedure
Step 1
Step 2
Choose Delete ports from an existing Cisco Voice Mail server and click Next.
Step 3
From the list, choose the name of an existing Cisco voice-mail server (pilot
number) and click Next.
The Cisco Voice Mail Ports pane, which indicates the number of ports that are
currently configured, displays.
Step 4
From the list, choose the number of ports to delete and click Next.
A summary pane displays the updated settings for the Cisco voice-mail server
from which you deleted the ports. The Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard
automatically updates the port numbers, directory numbers, Forward Busy, and
Forward No Answer numbers, so that they are consecutive.
Step 5
If this information is correct, click Finish to delete the selected ports.

information or Cancel to quit without deleting any ports.
Related Topics
38-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Setting up the MWI Device
Setting up the MWI Device

Use the following procedure to create and configure the MWI device for use with
Cisco uOne voice-mail systems.
Note
If you are configuring a Cisco Unity voice-mail system, you do not need to
perform this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Cisco Voice Mail Port.
Step 2
Note
Step 3
The voice-mail system only uses the directory number for the MWI
device for turning on the message indicator. Because the MWI device
is not used by the Cisco uOne messaging system or
Cisco CallManager for receiving calls, the Display, Forward All,
Forward Busy, and Forward No Answer fields are not used.
Click Insert to add this device to the system.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
38-9
Chapter 38
MWI Device Configuration Settings
MWI Device Configuration Settings

Table 38-3 describes the MWI device configuration settings.
Table 38-3 MWI Device Configuration Settings
Field Name
Description
Port Name
Enter the name of the Cisco MWI uOne port device.

This name must match the CMDeviceName value
in the SSMWI.ini file (for example,
CiscoMWI-VI1).
Note
For more information about Cisco uOne

.ini files, refer to the Installation and
Configuration documentation supplied
with Cisco uOne.
Description
Enter a description of the device.
Device Pool
Choose the default value Default.
Calling Search Space
If partitions and calling search spaces are used,

choose a calling search space that includes the
partitions of the DNs on all phones whose lamps
you want to turn on (the partition defined for a
phone DN must be in a calling search space that the
MWI device uses).
Location

The location specifies the total bandwidth available
for calls to and from this device. A location setting
of None means that the locations feature does not
keep track of the bandwidth consumed by this
device.
Directory Number
Enter the Cisco MWI device directory number.

Make sure this is a number that is not used within
the Cisco uOne messaging system or within the
Cisco CallManager auto-registration range.
Partition
If partitions are being used, choose the appropriate

partition.
38-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Configuring Cisco Voice Mail Ports
Table 38-3 MWI Device Configuration Settings (continued)
Field Name
Description
If partitions and calling search spaces are used,

choose a calling search space that includes the
partitions of the DNs on all phones whose lamps
you want to turn on (the partition defined for a
phone DN must be in a calling search space that the
MWI device uses).
Display
Leave this field blank.
Forward All
Forward Busy
Forward No Answer
Related Topics

You can add and delete ports associated with a Cisco voice-mail server to the
Cisco CallManager database without using the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard.
This section describes the following procedures:
Deleting a Cisco Voice Mail Port, page 38-13
Updating a Cisco Voice Mail Port, page 38-14

78-13310-01
38-11
Chapter 38
Adding Cisco Voice Mail Ports

To connect a Cisco voice-mail system to Cisco CallManager, you must add
Cisco voice-mail ports to the Cisco CallManager database. You must enter all
users and their directory numbers in Cisco CallManager Administration for them
to retrieve messages from a Cisco voice-mail device. Follow these instructions to
add individual Cisco voice-mail ports to the Cisco CallManager database (for
example, to update the Operator Number).
Tips
You can also use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to add a new Cisco
voice-mail server and ports or to add multiple ports to an existing server rather
than the procedure described here. See the Using the Cisco Voice Mail Port
Wizard section on page 38-2 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Cisco Voice Mail Port.

The Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration pane displays.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert to add the new Cisco voice-mail port device.
Related Topics
Copying an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Port, page 38-15
38-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Deleting a Cisco Voice Mail Port

Follow these procedures to delete a single Cisco voice-mail port from
Cisco CallManager.
Tips
You can also use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to delete ports from an
existing server instead of using the procedure described here. See the Using
the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard section on page 38-2 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Devices > Cisco Voice Mail Port.

The Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration pane displays with a list of the defined
Cisco voice-mail ports.
Step 2
Choose the Cisco voice-mail port you want to delete.
Note
Step 3
When you delete a voice-mail port (and its associated directory

number), you must make sure that no Cisco voice-mail ports refer to
the deleted directory number in their Forward Busy and Forward No
Answer fields.
Click Delete.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
38-13
Chapter 38
Updating a Cisco Voice Mail Port

Follow these procedures to update a Cisco voice-mail port (for example, to make
minor changes such as updating the Operator Number).
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Choose the Cisco voice-mail port you want to update.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Update.
Related Topics
38-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Copying an Existing Cisco Voice Mail Port

If you want to add several similar Cisco voice-mail ports to the
Cisco CallManager database, you can add one and then copy its basic settings to
apply to another Cisco voice-mail port.
Tips
You will find it much easier to use the Cisco Voice Mail Port Wizard to add a
new Cisco voice-mail server and ports or to add multiple ports to an existing
server instead of using the procedure described here. See the Using the Cisco
Voice Mail Port Wizard section on page 38-2 for more information.
Follow these steps to copy a Cisco voice-mail port and its settings.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Choose the Cisco voice-mail port you want to copy.
Step 3
Click Copy.
Step 4
Note
Step 5
You must change the Port Name and Directory Number fields. You
should also update the Forward Busy and Forward No Answer fields.
Click Insert.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
38-15
Chapter 38
Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration Settings

Table 38-4 describes the Cisco voice-mail port configuration settings.
Table 38-4 Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Port Name
Enter a name to identify the Cisco voice-mail port. You

must add a device for each port on Cisco voice-mail. If
there are 24 ports, you must define 24 devices.
Note
For Cisco uOne systems, make sure the name

matches the information in the uOne .ini files,
such as CiscoUM-VI1 or CiscoUM-VI2. Use
the following naming convention for the
ports: CiscoUM-VI<consecutive number for
each port>.
Description
Enter the purpose of the device.
Device Pool
Choose the default value Default Pool.
searched for numbers called from this device.
Location

calls to and from this device. A location setting of None
Directory Number
Enter the number associated with this voice-mail port.

Make sure this field is unique in combination with the
Partition field.
Partition
Choose the partition to which the directory number

belongs. Choose None if partitions are not used. If you
choose a partition, you must choose a calling search
space that includes that partition.
38-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 38

Table 38-4 Cisco Voice Mail Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Display
This field indicates text that appears on the calling party

phone when a call is placed to this line.
Forward All
Forward Busy
Enter the voice-mail directory number where calls are

forwarded if this port is busy (for example, the next
sequential voice-mail port number). For this number, use
the next sequential Cisco voice-mail port or, if it is the
last port, an operator number.
Make the Forward Busy and Forward No Answer fields
have the same value.
Forward No Answer
Enter the voice-mail directory number where calls are

forwarded if this port does not answer the call (for
example, the next sequential port). Make this number the
next sequential Cisco voice-mail port or, if it is the last
port, an operator number.
Make sure the Forward Busy and Forward No Answer
fields have the same value.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
38-17
Chapter 38
38-18
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
39
Device Profile Configuration

A device profile comprises the set of attributes (services and/or features)
associated with a particular device. A user device profile contains device
information to be used when a user logs in to a device.
Use the following topics to configure and locate device profiles:
Finding a Device Profile, page 39-2
Adding a New User Device Profile, page 39-3
Updating User Device Profiles, page 39-5
Deleting a User Device Profile, page 39-6
Configuring New Directory Numbers for Autogenerated Device Profiles,

page 39-7
Directory Number Configuration Settings, page 39-8
Extension Mobility and Phone Login Features, Cisco CallManager System

Guide

78-13310-01
39-1
Chapter 39
Finding a Device Profile
Finding a Device Profile

This topic describes how to use the Find and List Device Profile pane. The Find
and List lookup function allows you to search for user and autogenerated device
profiles or both types. The function searches every type of device profile against
the following categories:
Device name
Device description
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Device Profile.

The Find and List Device Profile pane displays.
Step 2
From the drop- down lists, choose your search text for the type of device profiles
you want listed and click Find.
Note
To find all device profiles registered in the database, choose All

Device Profiles from the drop-down list without entering any search
text and click Find. You can also use Device Name is not empty as
your search criteria.
The pane refreshes and then displays the device profiles that match your search
criteria.
To jump to an autogenerated device profile or user device profile:
Step 3
Choose the device profile from the list of records that match your search criteria.
To delete device profiles:
Step 4
Use the check box in the first column to delete multiple device profiles at once.
Check the first check box in the list and click Delete Selected. You can also
choose individual user device profiles to delete them separately.
39-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 39

Adding a New User Device Profile
Note
You cannot delete autogenerated device profiles. User device profiles

cannot be deleted if they are being used as a logout profile by phones.
Related Topics

page 39-7
Device Profile Configuration, page 39-1

This topic describes how to add a new user device profile. The user device profile
contains attributes such as device profile name, description, phone template,
expansion modules, directory numbers, subscribed services, and speed-dial
information. Refer to Extension Mobility and Phone Login Features in the
Cisco CallManager System Guide for more detailed information.
Before You Begin
Make sure phone button template(s) are already configured before proceeding
with the steps. See the Adding Phone Button Templates section on page 43-2
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Device Profile.

The pane refreshes to the Find and List Device Profiles pane.
Step 2
In the upper, right corner, choose the Add New User Device Profile link.

78-13310-01
39-3
Chapter 39
The User Device Profile Configuration pane displays.

Step 3
Enter a unique name in the User Device Profile Name field. This name can
comprise up to 50 characters in length.
Step 4
Enter a description of the user device profile in the Description field. For text, use
anything that describes this particular user device profile.
Step 5
From the Phone Button Template drop-down list, choose a phone button template.
You can configure one or two expansion modules for this device profile by
choosing phone buttons from the expansion module drop-down lists in the
expansion module fields.
Note
You can view a phone button list at any time by choosing the View
button list link next to the phone button template fields. A separate
pane pops up, displaying the phone buttons for that particular
expansion module.
Step 6
Click Insert.
Step 7
A dialog box appears asking you to configure a directory number for line 1 of this
user device profile. Click OK.
The Directory Number Configuration pane displays.
Step 8
Step 9
Click Insert.
The pane refreshes and returns to the user device profile configuration pane for
this device profile.
Related Topics

page 39-7
39-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 39

Updating User Device Profiles
Updating User Device Profiles

This section describes how to update a user device profile.
Before You Begin
Make sure the user device profile you want to update is configured in
Cisco CallManager before proceeding with the steps. See the Adding a New User
Device Profile section on page 39-3 to configure a user device profile.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the user device profile you want to update. See the Finding a Device
Profile section on page 39-2.
Step 2
From the User Device Profile Configuration pane, make the desired changes to the
user device profile; then, click Update.
The changes you made should now appear in this user device profile.
Note
You must login to a device in order for changes to a user device profile
to take affect.
Related Topics

page 39-7

78-13310-01
39-5
Chapter 39
Deleting a User Device Profile
Deleting a User Device Profile

This section describes how to delete a user device profile.
Before You Begin
Make sure the user device profile you want to delete is configured in
Cisco CallManager before proceeding with the steps. See the Adding a New User
Device Profile, page 39-3, to configure a user device profile.
Procedure
Step 1
Locate the user device profile you want to delete. See the Finding a Device
Profile section on page 39-2.
Step 2
From the User Device Profile Configuration pane, click Delete.

A message displays stating that this action cannot be undone.
Click OK to delete the device profile or Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Note
If a user device profile is configured as a default logout device profile,

you cannot delete it. If you want to delete a logout device profile, you
must change it from a logout device profile and configure another
device profile as the logout device profile for that phone. Once the
user device profile is no longer a logout device profile, you can delete
it.
Related Topics

page 39-7
39-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 39

Configuring New Directory Numbers for Autogenerated Device Profiles
Configuring New Directory Numbers for

Autogenerated Device Profiles
This topic describes how to add new directory numbers, on assigned lines, for
autogenerated device profiles.
Before You Begin
Make sure the autogenerated device profile(s) are configured before

proceeding with the steps. See the Updating a Phone section on page 42-9
You must add new directory numbers for an autogenerated device profile
from the Autogenerated Device Profile Configuration pane. See the Finding
a Device Profile section on page 39-2 for more information.
Procedure
Step 1
From the Autogenerated Device Profile Configuration pane, choose the line on
which you want to add a new DN, from the directory number list on the left side
of the pane.
The pane refreshes to the Directory Number Configuration pane for this line.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert.
The pane refreshes and displays the settings you configured.
Note
Step 4
You can also update, delete, and restart devices from the Directory
Number Configuration pane by clicking the corresponding buttons for
these functions. Deleting a directory number removes it from the line,
and you cannot undo this action.
Return to the Autogenerated Device Profile pane by clicking the Configure

Device Profile link.
The new directory number should appear on the appropriate line in the list on the
left side of the pane.
78-13310-01
39-7
Chapter 39
Directory Number Configuration Settings
When you update the configuration settings for a phone, if an

autogenerated device profile has a different default setting than the
phone, the setting of the device profile is overwritten when you choose
<User Current Device Setting> as the logout device profile from the
Phone Configuration web pane.
Note
Related Topics
Configuring Directory Numbers, page 42-27

Table 39-1 describes directory number configuration settings for directory
number fields.
Table 39-1 Directory Number Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Directory Number
Directory Number
Indicates a dialable phone number.

Values can include a maximum of 50 alphanumeric
characters except for (.) and (@).
39-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 39

Table 39-1 Directory Number Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Partition
Indicates the route partition to which the directory

number belongs.
Make sure partition designation is unique in
combination with the directory number.
Directory Number Settings

Voice Message Box
Indicates the number to which voice-mail messages are

sent.
Always designate this number as the same as the
directory number.
Calling Search Space Collection of partitions for which numbers called from
this directory number are searched.
Entry changes cause update of the numbers listed in the
Call Pickup Group field.
Designation applies to all devices using this directory
number.
User Hold Audio
Source
The audio source played when a user initiates a hold

action.
Network Hold Audio

Source
This audio source plays when the network initiates a

hold action.
Call Waiting
Specifies whether this directory number uses call

waiting when a line is busy (On), responds with a busy
signal (Off), or uses the system-wide default setting
(Default).
Designation applies to all devices using this directory
number.
Activate Auto
Answer for this
Directory Number
Checking this check box activates the Auto Answer

feature for this directory number.

78-13310-01
39-9
Chapter 39
Field
Description
Call Forward and Pickup Settings

Forward All
Indicates the directory number to which all calls are

forwarded.
Use any dialable phone number, including an outside
destination.
Setting applies to all devices using this directory
number.
Forward Busy

destination.
number.
Forward No Answer
Indicates the directory number to which a call is

forwarded when the call is not answered.
destination.
number.
Call Pickup Group
Indicates a number that can be dialed to answer calls to

this directory number (in the specified partition).
Line Settings for this Device

Display (Internal
Caller ID)
Leave this field blank to have the system display the

extension.
Use a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Typically, use the user name or the directory number.
Setting applies only to the current device.
39-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 39

Field
Description
External Phone
Number Mask
Indicates phone number (or mask) used to send Caller

ID information when placing a call from this line.
Number includes a maximum of 30 number and X
characters. The X characters must appear at the end of
the pattern.
Disable Ring on this

line
Stops the phone from ringing to indicate incoming calls.

Setting applies only to the current device.
Related Topics

page 39-7

78-13310-01
39-11
Chapter 39
39-12
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
40
Gatekeeper Configuration
A gatekeeper device, also known as a Cisco Multimedia Conference Manager
(MCM), supports the H.225 Registration, Admission, and Status Protocol (RAS)
message set used for call admission control, bandwidth allocation, and dial
pattern resolution (call routing). The gatekeeper provides these services for
communications between Cisco CallManager clusters. You can configure only
one primary gatekeeper device per Cisco CallManager cluster.
Gatekeeper configuration consists of two components:
Cisco CallManager configuration. Each Cisco CallManager cluster must

register with the gatekeeper as a single VoIP gateway. This chapter describes
how to configure Cisco CallManager as a VoIP gateway to the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper configuration on the router. This type of configuration applies to

a Cisco IOS Multimedia Conference Manager (MCM) that acts as the
gatekeeper. Recommended platforms for the gatekeeper include Cisco 2600,
3600, or 7200 routers with Cisco IOS Release 12.1(3)T or higher. Refer to the
MCM documentation for information on configuring the gatekeeper.
The following topics cover Cisco CallManager configuration for associating

Cisco CallManager as a VoIP gateway to the gatekeeper:
Deleting the Gatekeeper, page 40-3
Modifying the Gatekeeper, page 40-3
Resetting the Gatekeeper, page 40-4
Gatekeeper Configuration Settings, page 40-6

78-13310-01
40-1
Chapter 40
Adding a Gatekeeper
The following topics contain additional information related to gatekeepers:
Gatekeeper, Cisco CallManager System Guide
Cisco IP Telephony Network Design Guide
Cisco IOS Multimedia Conference Manager (Command Reference)

documentation
Adding a Gatekeeper
Perform the following procedure to add a gatekeeper device.
Note
You can configure only one primary gatekeeper device per Cisco CallManager
cluster.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Gatekeeper.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Insert to add the new gatekeeper.

The page updates, and the name of the new gatekeeper displays in the Gatekeepers
list.
Related Topics
40-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Deleting the Gatekeeper
Deleting the Gatekeeper

Perform the following steps to delete the gatekeeper.
Procedure
Step 1

The Gatekeeper Configuration page displays, with the current gatekeeper
automatically selected.
Step 2

A confirmation dialog box displays.
Step 3
Click OK to delete the gatekeeper.
Related Topics
Modifying the Gatekeeper

Perform the following steps to modify gatekeeper settings:
Procedure
Step 1

The Gatekeeper Configuration page displays, with the current gatekeeper
Step 2

78-13310-01
40-3
Chapter 40
Resetting the Gatekeeper
Step 3
Click Update to save the changes.

The page refreshes to display the new settings.
Step 4
Reset the gatekeeper and the AnonymousDevice as needed to activate the

changes. See the Resetting the Gatekeeper section on page 40-4 for details.
Related Topics

Perform the following procedure to reset the gatekeeper and the
AnonymousDevice.
Caution
Resetting devices can cause them to drop calls.

Procedure
Step 1

The Gatekeeper Configuration pane displays, with the current gatekeeper
Step 2
If you changed any of the settings for the Gatekeeper Device, click Reset
Gatekeeper. Otherwise, skip to Step 4.
40-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Step 3
Step 4
Click one of the following choices:
RestartRestarts the gatekeeper device without shutting it down first.
ResetShuts down, then restarts the internal gatekeeper device. The

Cisco CallManager cluster unregisters (URQ) and then reregisters (RRQ)
with the gatekeeper.
If you changed any of the settings for the Anonymous Calls Device, click Reset
Gateway. Otherwise, skip the rest of this procedure.
Step 5
RestartRestarts the AnonymousDevice without shutting it down first.
ResetShuts down, then restarts the AnonymousDevice.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
40-5
Chapter 40
Gatekeeper Configuration Settings

Table 40-1 describes the gatekeeper configuration settings.
Table 40-1 Gatekeeper Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Gatekeeper Name
Enter the IP address or DNS name of the

gatekeeper.
You can register only one gatekeeper per
Cisco CallManager cluster.
Description
Enter a descriptive name for the gatekeeper.
Registration Request
Time to Live
Do not change this value unless instructed to do so

by a Cisco TAC engineer. Enter the time in seconds.
The default value is 60 seconds.
The Registration Request Time to Live field
indicates the length of time that the gatekeeper
considers a registration request (RRQ) valid. The
system must send a keepalive RRQ to the
gatekeeper before the RRQ Time to Live expires.
Cisco CallManager sends an RRQ to the gatekeeper
to register and subsequently to maintain a
connection with the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper
may confirm (RCF) or deny (RRJ) the request.
Registration Retry Timer
Do not change this value unless instructed to do so

by a Cisco TAC engineer. Enter the time in seconds.
The default value is 300 seconds.
The Registration Retry Timer field indicates the
length of time Cisco CallManager waits before
retrying gatekeeper registration after a failed
registration attempt.
40-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Table 40-1 Gatekeeper Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Terminal Type
Use the Terminal Type field to designate the type

for all devices controlled by this gatekeeper.
Choose Gateway if all gatekeeper-controlled

devices are gateways (including intercluster
trunks).
Choose Terminal if all gatekeeper-controlled

devices are H.323 clients (for example,
Microsoft NetMeeting devices).
Make sure all gatekeeper-controlled devices are of

the same type.
Set this field to Gateway for normal gatekeeper call
admission control.
Device Pool
Choose the appropriate device pool for the

gatekeeper. A device pool specifies the collection of
properties for the devices in that pool, such as
Cisco CallManager group, date/time group, region,
media resource group list, and calling search space
for auto-registration.

78-13310-01
40-7
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Technology Prefix
Use this optional field to eliminate the need for

entering the IP address of every Cisco CallManager
when configuring the gw-type-prefix on the
gatekeeper:
If you leave this field blank (the default

setting), you must specify the IP address of
each Cisco CallManager that can register with
the gatekeeper when you enter the
gw-type-prefix command on the gatekeeper.
When you use this field, make sure the value

entered here exactly matches the type-prefix
value specified with the gw-type-prefix
command on the gatekeeper.
For example, if you leave this field blank and you

have two Cisco CallManagers with IP addresses of
10.1.1.2 and 11.1.1.3, enter the following
gw-type-prefix command on the gatekeeper:
gw-type-prefix 1#* default-technology gw ip
10.1.1.2 gw ip 11.1.1.3
If you enter 1#* in this field, enter the following
gw-type-prefix command on the gatekeeper:
gw-type-prefix 1#* default-technology
40-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Zone
Use this optional field to request a specific zone on

the gatekeeper with which Cisco CallManager will
register. The zone specifies the total bandwidth
available for calls between this zone and another
zone.
If you do not enter a value in this field, the

zone subnet command on the gatekeeper
determines the zone with which
Cisco CallManager registers. Cisco
recommends the default setting for most
configurations.
If you want Cisco CallManager to register with

a specific zone on the gatekeeper, enter the
value in this field that exactly matches the zone
name configured on the gatekeeper with the
zone command. Specifying a zone name in this
field eliminates the need for a zone subnet
command for each Cisco CallManager
registered with the gatekeeper.
Refer to the command reference documentation for

your gatekeeper for more information.

78-13310-01
40-9
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Allow Anonymous Calls
Check this check box to enable Cisco CallManager

to send calls to and receive calls from remote
anonymous devices controlled by this gatekeeper.
An anonymous device is one that you have not
explicitly configured in the Cisco CallManager
database.
This setting eliminates the need for you to
configure a separate H.323 device in the local
Cisco CallManager cluster for each remote
Cisco CallManager or H.323 gateway that it can
call over the IP WAN.
When you enable Allow Anonymous Calls, you
must also fill in the configuration settings listed
subsequently in this table.
If you uncheck this check box, you must configure
a separate H.323 gateway for each remote device
that the local Cisco CallManager can call over the
IP WAN.
The default setting disables Allow Anonymous
Calls.
When you enable Allow Anonymous Calls and fill
in the remaining fields in this table, you essentially
create a device (an intercluster trunk or gateway)
named AnonymousDevice that can send calls to and
receive calls from any remote Cisco CallManager
controlled by the gatekeeper. The
AnonymousDevice gets its device characteristics
(such as Cisco CallManager group, region, and so
on) from the gatekeeper device pool.
Device Protocol
Choose the appropriate protocol for the

AnonymousDevice. Choose Inter-Cluster Trunk if
the AnonymousDevice is an intercluster trunk
(Cisco CallManager), or choose H.225 if the
AnonymousDevice is a gateway.
40-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Choose the appropriate calling search space for the

AnonymousDevice. The calling search space
specifies the collection of route partitions searched
to determine how to route a collected (originating)
number.
Location
Choose the appropriate location for the

AnonymousDevice. The location specifies the total
bandwidth available for calls between this location
and the central location, or hub. A location setting
of None specifies unlimited available bandwidth.
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern, from O to 24 digits, that you want

to use to format the caller ID on outbound calls
from the AnonymousDevice.
For example, in North America:
Calling Party Selection
555XXXX = Variable Caller ID, where X

represents an extension number. The Central
Office (CO) appends the number with the area
code if you do not specify it.
5555000 = Fixed Caller ID. Use this form when

you want the Corporate number to be sent
instead of the exact extension from which the
call is placed. The CO appends the number with
the area code if you do not specify it.
Choose the directory number sent on an outbound

call on a gateway.
The following options specify which directory
number is sent:
OriginatorSend the directory number of the

calling device.
First Redirect NumberSend the directory

number of the redirecting device.
Last Redirect NumberSend the directory

number of the last device to redirect the call.
78-13310-01
40-11
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Presentation Bit
Choose whether the CO transmits or blocks caller

ID.
Choose Allowed if you want the CO to send caller
ID.
Choose Restricted if you do not want the CO to send
caller ID.
Display IE Delivery
Check this check box to enable delivery of the

display information element (IE) in SETUP and
CONNECT messages for the calling and called
party name delivery service.
The default setting leaves this check box
unchecked.

Required
Indicate whether a media termination point (MTP)

is used to implement features that H.323 does not
support (such as hold and transfer). You must use an
MTP if you need a transcoder.
Check the Media Termination Point Required check
box if you want to use a media termination point to
implement features. Uncheck the Media
Termination Point Required check box if you do not
want to use a media termination point to implement
features.
Use this check box only for H.323 clients and those
H.323 devices that do not support the H.245 empty
capabilities set.
40-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Num Digits
Use this field only if you check the Sig Digits check
box. Choose the number of significant digits, from
0 to 32, to collect for incoming calls to the
AnonymousDevice.
Cisco CallManager counts significant digits from
the right (last digit) of the number called.
This field processes incoming calls and indicates
the number of digits starting from the last digit of
the called number used to route calls coming into
the H.323 device. See Prefix DN and Sig Digits.
Sig Digits
Check or uncheck this box depending on whether

you want to collect significant digits. Choose
significant digits to represent the number of final
digits retained on inbound calls. A trunk with
significant digits enabled truncates all but the final
few digits of the address provided by an inbound
call.
If this box is unchecked, Cisco CallManager does
not truncate the inbound number.
If this box is checked, you also need to choose the
number of significant digits to collect. (See Num
Digits.)
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the

called party number on incoming calls.
Cisco CallManager adds prefix digits after first
truncating the number in accordance with the Num
Digits setting.

78-13310-01
40-13
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Run H225D On Every

Node
This setting determines which Cisco CallManager

in the cluster establishes the H.225 session. The
default setting (checked) establishes the H.225
session on the Cisco CallManager where the calling
device has registered. For most systems, the default
setting works best.
Unchecking this check box establishes the H.225
session on the controlling Cisco CallManager in the
same Cisco CallManager group and device pool as
the H.225 gateway. Do not uncheck this box unless
advised to do so by Cisco Technical Assistance
Center (TAC).
Called party IE number

type unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in called

party directory numbers.
Cisco CallManager sets the called directory number
(DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not
change the default value unless you have advanced
experience with dialing plans, such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the
default in Europe because Cisco CallManager does
not recognize European national dialing patterns.
You can also change this setting when connecting to
PBXs using routing as a non-national type number.
Choose one of the following options:
CallManagerCisco CallManager sets the

directory number type.
UnknownThe dialing plan is unknown.
NationalUse when you are dialing within the

dialing plan for your country.
InternationalUse when you are dialing

outside the dialing plan for your country.
40-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Calling party IE number

type unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in calling

Cisco CallManager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do
not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans, such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need
to change the default in Europe because
Cisco CallManager does not recognize European
national dialing patterns. You can also change this
setting when connecting to PBXs using routing as a
non-national type number.




78-13310-01
40-15
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Called Numbering Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called

Cisco CallManager sets the called DN numbering
plan. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience
with dialing plans, such as NANP or the European
dialing plan. You may need to change the default in
Europe because Cisco CallManager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You
can also change this setting when connecting to

Numbering Plan in the directory number.
ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the

National StandardUse when you are dialing

within the dialing plan for your country.
PrivateUse when you are dialing within a

private network.
40-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 40
Field
Description
Calling Numbering Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in calling

Cisco CallManager sets the calling DN numbering




private network.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
40-17
Chapter 40
40-18
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
41
Gateway Configuration
Cisco IP telephony gateways enable Cisco CallManager to communicate with
non-IP telecommunications devices. Cisco CallManager supports several types of
gateways as described in the Cisco CallManager System Guide.
These sections provide information about using Cisco CallManager for working
with and configuring Cisco gateways.
Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-15
Port Configuration Settings, page 41-45
Modifying Gateways and Ports, page 41-65
Finding Specific Gateways, page 41-56
Understanding Voice Gateways, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
41-1
Chapter 41
Adding Gateways to Cisco CallManager

To enable Cisco CallManager to manage IP telephony gateways in your network,
you must first add each gateway to the Cisco CallManager configuration database.
The procedures, web panes, and configuration settings for adding a gateway vary
according to the model of gateway that you are adding.
The following procedure describes how to add a new gateway in
Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Gateway to display the Find/List Gateways pane.
Step 2
Click the Add a New Gateway link. The Add a New Gateway pane displays.
Step 3
Choose the type of gateway you want to add from the Gateway type drop-down
list box. The Device Protocol field may be automatically populated depending on
which gateway type you choose.
Step 4
Click Next.
Step 5
In the following table, click the specific procedure for the type of gateway you are
configuring. Once you are in the correct procedure, start with the step in which
you enter the appropriate settings for that particular gateway type.
41-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-1 Gateways
Type of Gateway
Procedure to Add
Cisco VG200
Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway,

page 41-3
Cisco IOS 362x, 364x, 366x 26xx

gateways
Cisco Catalyst 4000 Access Gateway
Module
Cisco Catalyst 4224 Voice Gateway
Switch
Cisco IAD2400
Cisco Catalyst 6000 E1 VoIP Gateway Adding a Non-IOS MGCP Gateway,

page 41-10
Cisco Catalyst 6000 T1 VoIP Gateway
Cisco DT-24+ or DE-30+ Digital
Access Trunk Gateway
Other Cisco IOS gateway configured
in H.323 mode or H.323 intercluster
trunk.
Adding a Cisco IOS H.323 Gateway or

Intercluster Trunk, page 41-12
Cisco Catalyst 6000 24-Port FXS

Gateway
Adding an Analog Access Gateway and

Ports, page 41-13
Analog Access AS-2, AS-4, AS-8,

AT-2, AT-4, AT-8
Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway

Use the following procedure to add and configure a Cisco IOS MGCP gateway to
Cisco CallManager. The following Cisco IOS gateways support MGCP:
CiscoVG200 Cisco IP Telephony Voice Gateway
Cisco IOS 362x, 364x, 366x gateways
Cisco IOS 26xx gateways

78-13310-01
41-3
Chapter 41
Cisco Catalyst 4000 Access Gateway Module
Cisco Catalyst 4224 Voice Gateway Switch
Cisco IAD2400 gateways
Before You Begin
Before configuring a Cisco IOS MGCP gateway for use with Cisco CallManager,
you must configure the gateway using the Cisco IOS command-line interface
(CLI). For procedures and commands required to perform this configuration, refer
to the configuration documentation supplied with the gateway.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Add a New Device.

The Add a New Device pane appears.
Step 2
From the Device type drop-down list box, choose Gateway and click Next.
The Add a New Gateway pane appears.
Step 3
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose one of the following
gateways:
Cisco Voice Gateway 200 (VG200)
Cisco IOS 362x, 364x, 366x gateways
Cisco IOS 26xx gateways
Cisco Catalyst 4000 Access Gateway Module
Cisco Catalyst 4224 Voice Gateway Switch
Cisco IAD2400 gateway
Note
The Cisco Catalyst 6000 gateways also support MGCP, but are
configured differently.
When you choose one of the preceding gateways, the Device Protocol drop-down
list displays Not Required for MGCP.
41-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Cisco IOS MGCP gateways support different device protocols for interfacing to
the PSTN or other non-IP devices, depending on the gateway model and the type
of installed network modules and voice interface cards (VICs). A subsequent web
pane provides configuration for these interfaces.
Step 4
Click Next. The MGCP Configuration pane displays.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings and choose the type of network modules installed
in each slot, as described in the MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings section
on page 41-16, including any product-specific configuration settings.
Step 6
Click Insert.
The MGCP Gateway Configuration pane updates and displays drop-down list
boxes with options for configuring the type of voice interface cards (VICs) in each
sub-unit of each network module.
The available choices depend on the type of network modules configured in the
MGCP Configuration pane.
Step 7
From the drop-down list boxes, choose the type of VICs installed in each subunit
and click Update.
Available VIC types include VIC-2FXS, VIC-2FXO, VWIC-1MFT-T1,
VWIC-2MFT-T1, VWIC-1MFT-E1, VWIC-2MFT-E1, and WS-U4604-8FXS.
The pane updates to add links for configuring endpoint information and ports for
the type of VICs chosen.
Step 8
Click an endpoint identifier (for example, 1/0/0) to configure device protocol

information and add ports for the types of VICs installed.
For detailed instructions, see the following procedures:
Adding FXS Ports to an MGCP Gateway, page 41-6
Adding FXO Ports to an MGCP Gateway, page 41-8
Adding T1-CAS Ports to an MGCP Gateway, page 41-9
Adding a T1 PRI or E1 PRI Port to an MGCP Gateway, page 41-10
Step 9
Reset the gateway to apply the changes.
Step 10
Continue configuring endpoint information and ports as needed.
Step 11
After you finish configuring endpoint and adding ports, you need to add the
MGCP gateway device to a route group/route list or assign a route pattern to the
gateway for calls to be routed to the gateway.

78-13310-01
41-5
Chapter 41
Note
You only need to add the MGCP gateway to a route pattern for
outbound trunk calling.
Adding Ports to an MGCP Gateway

The device protocols and port types that can be configured on MGCP gateways
vary by the type of installed voice interface cards. This section contains the
following procedures:
Adding a T1 PRI or E1 PRI Port to an MGCP Gateway, page 41-10
Adding FXS Ports to an MGCP Gateway

You can use Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) ports to connect to any POTS
device. Use this procedure to configure FXS ports on an MGCP gateway.
Before You Begin
You must add an MGCP gateway before configuring ports. See the Adding a
Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway section on page 41-3 for instructions.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Gateway to display the Find/List Gateways pane, or skip to Step
4 if you have already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXS
ports.
Step 2
Enter the appropriate search criteria to locate the MGCP gateway to which you
want to add FXS ports.
Step 3
Click the name of the desired gateway to display its MGCP configuration settings
and endpoint identifiers.
41-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration pane, click the endpoint identifier for the FXS
VIC you want to configure.
The pane refreshes and displays the Gateway Configuration pane.
Step 5
Step 6
Enter the appropriate Gateway Configuration and Port Information settings.

Refer to the following sections for details about these fields:
FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-18
POTS Port Configuration Settings, page 41-46
Click Insert.
Note
Step 7
Once you insert a POTS port, the pane refreshes and displays the
POTS port in the list on the left side of the pane. An Add DN link
displays to the right of the new port.
Click Add DN to add directory numbers to the POTS port, or, if you configured
another type of port, go to Step 8.
Note
Refer to the Adding a Directory Number section on page 42-28 and

Directory Number Configuration Settings, page 32 for information
about adding and configuring DNs.
Step 8
Step 9
To return to the main MGCP gateway configuration pane for the gateway to which
you just added the ports, click Back to MGCP Configuration.
Step 10
Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 to add additional FXS ports.
Related Topics
Adding a Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway, page 41-3

78-13310-01
41-7
Chapter 41
Adding FXO Ports to an MGCP Gateway

You can use Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) ports for connecting to a central
office or PBX. Use this procedure to add and configure FXO ports for loop start
or ground start on an MGCP gateway.
Note
Cisco CallManager assumes all loop-start trunks lack positive disconnect

supervision. Configure trunks with positive disconnect supervision as ground
start, so that active calls can be maintained during a Cisco CallManager server
failover.
Before You Begin
You must add an MGCP gateway before configuring ports. See the Adding a
Cisco IOS MGCP Gateway section on page 41-3 for instructions.
Procedure
Step 1
4 if you have already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add FXO
ports.
Step 2
want to add FXO ports and click Find. The search results pane displays.
Step 3
Click on the name of the desired gateway to display its MGCP configuration
settings and endpoint identifiers.
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration pane, click the endpoint identifiers of the FXO
port you want to configure.
Step 5
From the Port Type drop-down list box, choose either Ground Start or Loop
Start.
Step 6
Enter the appropriate Gateway Configuration and Port Information settings as

described in the following sections:
Step 7
FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings section on page 41-18
Ground Start Port Configuration Settings section on page 41-51.
Loop Start Port Configuration Settings section on page 41-49
Click Insert.
41-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Step 8
To return to the main MGCP gateway configuration pane for the gateway to which
you just added the ports, click Back to MGCP Configuration.
Step 9
Repeat Step 4 though Step 7 to add more FXO ports.
Step 10
Related Topics
Adding T1-CAS Ports to an MGCP Gateway

Step 1
Choose Device > Gateway to display the Find/List Gateways pane, or skip to
Step 2
want to add a T1-CAS port.
Step 3
Click the name of the desired gateway to display its MGCP configuration settings
and endpoint identifiers.
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration pane, click the endpoint identifier of the T1-CAS
port you want to configure.
Step 5
From the drop-down list box, choose the T1-CAS protocol.
Step 6
Enter the appropriate Gateway Configuration settings. See the T1-CAS Gateway
Configuration Settings section on page 41-33 for details.
Step 7
Click Insert.
Step 8
Click Add New Port. A port configuration dialog opens in a separate pane.
Step 9
Choose a port type from the Port Type drop-down list box. See the Port
Configuration Settings section on page 41-45 for the appropriate settings for the
port type you choose.
Step 10
Click Insert or Insert and Close.
Step 11

78-13310-01
41-9
Chapter 41
Related Topics
Adding a T1 PRI or E1 PRI Port to an MGCP Gateway

Step 1
4 if you have already located the MGCP gateway to which you want to add a port.
Step 2
want to add a T1 PRI or E1 PRI port.
Step 3
Click the name of the desired gateway in the list to display the configuration
information for the selected gateway.
Step 4
From the MGCP Configuration pane, click the endpoint identifier of the T1 or E1
PRI port you want to configure.
Step 5
Configure the T1 PRI or E1 PRI device protocol settings. See the E1/T1 PRI
Gateway Configuration Settings section on page 41-21 for detailed field
descriptions.
Step 6
Click Insert.
Step 7
Related Topics
E1/T1 PRI Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-21
Adding a Non-IOS MGCP Gateway

Use the following procedure to add the following non-IOS Cisco MGCP gateways
to Cisco CallManager:
Cisco DT-24+ Gateway
Cisco DE-30+ Gateway
41-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Cisco Catalyst 6000 E1 VoIP Gateway
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Add New Device.

Step 2
From the Device type drop-down list box, choose Gateway.

From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose one of the following digital
gateways:
Step 3
Step 4
Cisco DT-24+ Gateway
Cisco DE-30+ Gateway
Cisco Catalyst 6000 E1 VoIP Gateway
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate device protocol for the type
of interfaces you are configuring on the gateway. The available choices vary
according to gateway model:
DT-24+ or Cisco Catalyst 6000 T1 VoIP GatewayChoose either Digital

Access PRI (T1 PRI) or Digital Access T1 (T1-CAS)
DE-30+ or Cisco Catalyst E1 VoIP GatewayChoose Digital PRI (E1 PRI).
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration pane displays.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings, depending on whether you are configuring a

Digital T1 or E1 PRI interface or a Digital T1-CAS interface as described in
following sections:
E1/T1 PRI Gateway Configuration Settings section on page 41-21.
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings section on page 41-33
Step 6
Click Insert.
Step 7
If you are configuring a T1-CAS interface on a DT-24+ or Catalyst 6000 T1 VoIP

Gateway, click Add a New Port to configure ports.

78-13310-01
41-11
Chapter 41
See the Adding T1-CAS Ports to an MGCP Gateway section on page 41-9 and
begin with Step 9.
Step 8
Related Topics
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-33
Adding a Cisco IOS H.323 Gateway or Intercluster Trunk

Follow these procedures to add a Cisco IOS H.323 gateway or intercluster trunk
to Cisco CallManager.
Before You Begin
Before configuring a Cisco IOS H.323 gateway for use with Cisco CallManager,
you must configure the gateway using the Cisco IOS command-line interface
(CLI). Compared to MGCP gateways, H.323 gateways require more configuration
on the gateway because the gateway must maintain the dial plan and route pattern.
For procedures and commands required to perform this configuration, refer to the
configuration documentation supplied with the gateway.
For information about configuring intercluster trunks, refer to the Cisco IP
Telephone Network Design Guide.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Step 3
Click Next.
Step 4
From the Gateway Type drop-down list box, choose H.323 Gateway.
41-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Step 5
From the Device Protocol drop-down list box, choose one of the two available
device protocols:
H.225 (default)Choose H.323 if you are configuring a Cisco IOS gateway

in H.323 mode.
Intercluster TrunkAn intercluster trunk provides a virtual H.323 gateway

that is used to interlink Cisco CallManagers in different clusters.
Step 6
Click Next.
Step 7
Enter the appropriate settings as described in H.323 Gateway and Intercluster

Trunk Configuration Settings section on page 41-35.
Step 8
Click Insert.
Step 9
Related Topics
H.323 Gateway and Intercluster Trunk Configuration Settings, page 41-35
Adding an Analog Access Gateway and Ports

Use the procedure in this section to add and configure ports for the following
Cisco analog access gateways:
Cisco AS-2, AS-4, and AS-8 Gateways
Cisco AT-2, AT-4, and AT-8 Gateways
Cisco Catalyst 6000 24 Port FXS Gateway
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Step 3
Click Next.
78-13310-01
41-13
Chapter 41
Step 4
From the Gateway type drop-down list box, choose a supported analog gateway:
Cisco AS-2, AS-4, and AS-8 Gateways
Cisco AT-2, AT-4, and AT-8 Gateways
Cisco Catalyst 6000 24 Port FXS Gateway
When you choose an analog gateway, Cisco CallManager automatically chooses

the appropriate device protocol for the gateway (in this case, Analog Access).
Step 5
Click Next.
The Gateway Configuration pane appears.
Step 6
Enter the appropriate settings, as described in the Analog Access Gateway

Step 7
Click Insert.
Step 8
Click Add New Port.

A port configuration dialog opens in a separate pane.
Step 9
From the drop-down list box, choose POTS or Loop Start as the port type
depending on the gateway model you are configuring.
Step 10
Enter the appropriate port configuration settings as described in the following

sections:
Step 11
Loop Start Port Configuration Settings, page 41-49
Click Insert or Insert and Close.

If you have inserted POTS ports, the pane refreshes and displays the POTS port
in the list on the left side of the pane. An Add DN link displays to the right of the
new port.
Step 12
Click Add DN to add a directory numbers to an FXS port.

See the Adding a Directory Number section on page 42-28 and Phone
Configuration Settings section on page 42-12 for information about adding and
configuring directory numbers.
Step 13
41-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Gateway Configuration Settings
Related Topics
Analog Access Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-44

See the following sections for tables that list detailed descriptions for all gateway
configuration fields:
MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-16
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-33
H.323 Gateway and Intercluster Trunk Configuration Settings, page 41-35
For detailed information about port configuration settings, see the Port

78-13310-01
41-15
Chapter 41
MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings

Table 41-2 provides detailed descriptions for MGCP gateway configuration
settings.
Table 41-2 MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MGCP Domain Name
Enter a name that identifies the Cisco MGCP

gateway.
Use the Domain Name Service (DNS) host name if
it is configured to resolve correctly; otherwise, use
the host name as defined on the Cisco MGCP
gateway.
If you are using the host name as it is configured on
the IOS gateway, the name you enter here must
match exactly.
For example, if the hostname is configured on the
gateway to resolve to vg200-1 and the IP domain
name is not configured, enter the hostname in this
field (in this case, vg200-1).
If the hostname is configured on the gateway as
vg200-1 and the IP domain name is configured on
the gateway as cisco.com, enter vg200-1.cisco.com
in this field.
Description
Enter a description that clarifies the purpose of the

device.
Cisco CallManager
Group
From the drop-down list box, choose a

Cisco CallManager redundancy group.
A Cisco CallManager redundancy group includes a
prioritized list of up to three Cisco CallManagers.
The first Cisco CallManager in the list serves as the
primary Cisco CallManager. If the primary
Cisco CallManager is not available or fails, the
gateway attempts to connect with the next
Cisco CallManager in the list, and so on.
41-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-2 MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Module in Slot 0
Module in Slot 1
Module in Slot 2
Module in Slot 3
For each available slot on the selected MGCP

gateway, choose the type of network module
installed; for example:
NM-1VHas one voice interface card (VIC) in

Sub-Unit 0 for FXS or FXO.
NM-2VHas two VICs, one in Sub-Unit 0 and

one in Sub-Unit 1 for either FXS or FXO.
NM-HDVHas one VIC in Sub-Unit 0 for

either T1-CAS or T1-PRI, or E1-PRI.
NoneNo network modules installed.
(and so on)
The correct number of slots displays for each model

of MGCP gateway.
Note
The VG200 gateway has only one slot.
Product-Specific Configuration
Model-specific
configuration fields
defined by the gateway
manufacturer
The model-specific fields under product-specific

configuration define the gateway manufacturer.
Because they are dynamically configured, they can
change without notice.
To view field descriptions and help for
product-specific configuration items, click the i
information icon to the right of the Product Specific
Configuration heading to display help in a popup
pane.
If you need more information, refer to the
documentation for the specific gateway that you are
configuring or contact the manufacturer.

78-13310-01
41-17
Chapter 41
Related Topics
Adding a Non-IOS MGCP Gateway, page 41-10
Updating Gateways and Ports, page 41-68
FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings

Table 41-3 provides detailed descriptions for FXS/FXO gateway configuration
settings.
Note
For the VG200 gateway, not all switch emulation types support the network
side. Depending on how you configure the gateway switch type, you may or
may not be able to set network side.
Table 41-3 FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Description
This display-only field contains a string

generated by Cisco CallManager that uniquely
identifies the analog MGCP description.
For example:
AALN/S0/SUI/[email protected]
You can edit this field.
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the

appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of
properties for this device including
CallManager Group, Date/Time Group, Region,
and Calling Search Space for auto registration
of devices.
41-18
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-3 FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Choose the appropriate calling search space. A

calling search space comprises a collection of
route partitions that are searched to determine
how a collected (originating) number should be
routed.
Media Resource Group List
This list provides a prioritized grouping of

media resource groups. An application chooses
the required media resource, such as a Music On
Hold server, among the available media
resources according to the priority order defined
in a Media Resource List.
Network Audio Hold Source
This audio source plays when the network

initiates a hold action.
User Audio Hold Source
This field specifies an audio source played when

a user initiates a hold action.
Location
Choose the appropriate location for this device.

The location specifies the total bandwidth
available for calls to and from this location. A
location setting of None means that the
locations feature does not keep track of the
bandwidth consumed by this device.
Prefix DN

digits this trunk receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco CallManager adds prefix digits after
first truncating the number in accordance with
the Num Digits setting.

78-13310-01
41-19
Chapter 41
Table 41-3 FXS/FXO Gateway Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Num Digits
Enter the number of significant digits to collect,

from 0 to 32.
Cisco CallManager counts significant digits
from the right (last digit) of the number called.
Use this field for the processing of incoming
calls and to indicate the number of digits
starting from the last digit of the called number
used to route calls coming into the PRI span. See
Prefix DN.
Expected Digits
Enter the number of digits expected on the

inbound side of the trunk. Leave zero as the
default value if you are unsure for this
rarely-used field.
Port Direction
Choose the direction of calls passing through

this port:
Attendant DN
InboundUse for incoming calls only.
OutboundUse for outgoing calls.
BothwaysUse for inbound and outbound

calls (default).
Enter the directory number to which you want

incoming calls routed; for example, zero or a
directory number for an attendant.
Related Topics
41-20
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
E1/T1 PRI Gateway Configuration Settings

Table 41-4 provides detailed descriptions for E1/T1 PRI configuration settings.
Table 41-4 E1/T1 PRI Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
(non-IOS gateway)
Enter the appropriate MAC address. The MAC address

identifies hardware-based telephones and device name.
You must enter a 12-hexadecimal character value.
Domain Name
(MGCP gateways)
For MGCP gateways, this display-only field contains a

string generated by Cisco CallManager that uniquely
identifies the MGCP endpoint.
For example:
S1/DS1-0@VG200-2
S1 indicates slot 1, DS1-0 designates the digital
interface, and @VG200-2 designates the MGCP domain
name.
Description

device.
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the appropriate

device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for
this device including CallManager Group, Date/Time
Group, Region, and Calling Search Space for
Media Resource
Group List
This list provides a prioritized grouping of media

resource groups. An application chooses the required
media resource, such as a Music On Hold server, among
the available media resources according to the priority
order defined in a Media Resource List.
Network Hold Audio This audio source plays when the network initiates a hold
Source
action.
User Hold Audio
Source
This audio source plays when a user initiates a hold

action.

78-13310-01
41-21
Chapter 41
Table 41-4 E1/T1 PRI Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
search space designates a collection of route partitions
that are searched to determine how a collected
(originating) number should be routed.
Location
Choose the appropriate location for this device. The

Load Information
Enter the appropriate firmware load information for the

gateway.
The value you enter here overrides the default firmware
load for this type of gateway.
Channel Selection
Order
Choose the order in which channels or ports are enabled

from first (lowest number port) to last (highest number
port), or from last to first.
Valid entries include TOP_DOWN (first to last) or
BOTTOM_UP (last to first). If you are not sure which
port order to use, choose TOP_DOWN.
Protocol Side
Choose the appropriate protocol side. This setting

specifies whether the gateway connects to a Central
Office/Network device or to a User device.
Make sure the two ends of the PRI connection use
opposite settings. For example, if you connect to a PBX
and the PBX uses User as its protocol side, choose
Network for this device. Typically, use User for this
option for central office connections.
41-22
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern you want to use for caller ID, from 0 to
24 digits.
Calling Party
Selection
Channel IE Type
555XXXX = Variable caller ID, where X equals an

extension number. The CO appends the number with
5555000 = Fixed caller ID, where you want the

Corporate number to be sent instead of the exact
extension from which the call is placed. The CO
appends the number with the area code if you do not
specify it.
Any outbound call on a gateway can send directory

number information. Choose which directory number is
sent:

calling device.
First Redirect NumberSend the directory number

of the redirecting device.
Last Redirect NumberSend the directory number

of the last device to redirect the call.
Choose one of the following values to specify whether

channel selection is presented as a channel map or a slot
map.
NumberB-channel usage is always a channel map

format.
SlotmapB-channel usage is always a slotmap

format
Use Number When 1BChannel usage is a channel

map for one B-channel but is a slot map if more than
one B-channel exists.

78-13310-01
41-23
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Interface Identifier
Present
Check the check box to indicate that an interface

identifier is present. By default, the Cisco CallManager
leaves the check box unchecked.
This setting only applies to the DMS100 protocol for
digital access gateways in the Channel Identification
information element (IE) of the SETUP, CALL
PROCEEDING, ALERTING, and CONNECT messages.
Interface Identifier
Value
Enter the value obtained from the PBX provider.
Display IE Delivery
Check the check box to enable delivery of the display

information element (IE) in SETUP and CONNECT
messages for the calling and called party name delivery
service.
This field applies to the DMS100 protocol only. Valid

values range from 0 to 255.
Default leaves the check box unchecked.

Redirecting Number
IE Delivery
Check the check box to include the Redirecting Number

IE in the SETUP message to indicate the first redirecting
number and the redirecting reason of the call when Call
Forward happens.
Default leaves this check box unchecked.
This setting applies to the SETUP message only on all
protocols for digital access gateways.
Delay for first restart Enter the rate at which the spans are brought in service.
(1/8 sec ticks)
The delay occurs when many PRI spans are enabled on a
system and the Inhibit Restarts at PRI Initialization
check box is unchecked. For example, set the first five
cards to 0, and set the next five cards to 16. (Wait 2
seconds before bringing them in service.)
Delay between
restarts (1/8 sec
ticks)
Enter the time between restarts. The delay occurs when a

PRI RESTART is sent if the Inhibit Restarts check box is
unchecked.
41-24
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Num Digits
Choose the number of significant digits to collect, from

0 to 32. Cisco CallManager counts significant digits
Use this field if you check the Sig Digits check box. Use
for the processing of incoming calls and to indicate the
number of digits starting from the last digit of the called
number used to route calls coming into the PRI span. See
Prefix DN and Sig Digits.
Sig Digits
This field represents the number of final digits a PRI

span should retain on inbound calls. A trunk with
significant digits enabled truncates all but the final few
digits of the address provided by an inbound call.
Enable or disable this box depending on whether you
want to collect significant digits.
If the check box is unchecked, the Cisco CallManager
does not truncate the inbound number. If the check box
is checked, you also need to choose the number of
significant digits to collect.
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits that
this trunk receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco CallManager adds prefix digits after first
truncating the number in accordance with the Num Digits
setting.
Presentation Bit
Choose whether you want the central office to transmit or

block caller ID.
Choose Allowed if you want the central office to send
caller ID. Choose Restricted if you do not want the
central office to send caller ID.

78-13310-01
41-25
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Called party IE
number type
unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in called party

directory numbers. Cisco CallManager sets the called
directory number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you
do not change the default value unless you have advanced
experience with dialing plans such as NANP or the
European dialing plan. You may need to change the
default in Europe because Cisco CallManager does not
recognize European national dialing patterns. You can
also change this setting when connecting to PBXs using
routing as a non-national type number.
CallManagerThe Cisco CallManager sets the

InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the


41-26
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Calling party IE
number type
unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in calling party

directory numbers.
Cisco CallManager sets the calling directory number
(DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do not change the
default value unless you have advanced experience with
dialing plans such as NANP or the European dialing
plan. You may need to change the default in Europe
because Cisco CallManager does not recognize
European national dialing patterns. You can also change
this setting when connecting to PBXs using routing as a

InternationalUse when you are dialing outside the



78-13310-01
41-27
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Called Numbering
Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called party

directory numbers.
Cisco CallManager sets the called DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You
may need to change the default in Europe because

ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing

plan for your country.

PrivateUse when you are dialing within a private

network.
41-28
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Calling Numbering
Plan

Cisco CallManager sets the calling DN numbering plan.
Cisco recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with dialing
plans such as NANP or the European dialing plan. You
may need to change the default in Europe because

ISDNUse when you are dialing outside the dialing

plan for your country.

PrivateUse when you are dialing within a private

network.

78-13310-01
41-29
Chapter 41
Field
Description
PRI Protocol Type
Choose the communications protocol for the span:

For E1 PRI spans, two options exist:
PRI AUSTRALIANAustralian ISDN
PRI EUROEuropean ISDN
T1 PRI spans have several options, depending on the

carrier or switch:
4EAT&T InterExchange carrier
5E8 CustomCisco IP Phone
5E9 and NI2AT&T family local exchange switch

or carrier
DMSMCI family local exchange switch or carrier
ETSI SCEuropean local exchange carrier on T1;

also, Japanese local exchange.
Determine the switch to which you are connecting and

the preferred protocol, as follows:
Nortel Meridian5E8 Custom
Lucent Definity4ESS or 5E8
Madge (Teleos) box5E8 Teleos
Intecom PBX5E8 Intecom
Alternatively, choose the protocol based on the carrier:
MCIDMS-250
SprintDMS-250 or DMS-100
AT&T4ESS
41-30
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Inhibit restarts at PRI A RESTART message confirms the status of the ports on
initialization
a PRI span. If RESTARTs are not sent,
Cisco CallManager assumes the ports are in service.
When the D-Channel successfully connects with another
PRI D-Channel, it sends restarts when this check box is
unchecked.
Enable status poll
Check the check box to view the B-channel status in the

debug pane.
Number of digits to
strip
Choose the number of digits to strip on outbound calls,

from 0 to 32.
For example, 8889725551234 is dialed, and the number
of digits to strip is 3. In this example, Cisco CallManager
strips 888 from the outbound number.
Country Code
Choose the country in which the gateway is located.
Setup non-ISDN
Default leaves this setting disabled (unchecked).
Progress Indicator IE
Enable this setting only if users are not receiving
Enable
ringback tones on outbound calls.
When this setting is enabled, the Cisco CallManager
sends Q.931 Setup messages out digital (that is,
non-H.323) gateways with the Progress Indicator field
set to non-ISDN.
This message notifies the destination device that the
Cisco CallManager gateway is non-ISDN and that the
destination device should play in-band ringback.
This problem usually associates with
Cisco CallManagers that connect to PBXs through
digital gateways.

78-13310-01
41-31
Chapter 41
Field
Description
Model-specific
defined by the
gateway
manufacturer

configuration define the gateway manufacturer. Because
they are dynamically configured, they can change
without notice.
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific
configuration items, click the i information icon to the
right of the Product Specific Configuration heading to
display help in a popup pane.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation
for the specific gateway that you are configuring or
contact the manufacturer.
Related Topics
41-32
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings

Table 41-5 provides detailed descriptions for T1-CAS configuration settings.
Table 41-5 T1-CAS Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
Enter the MAC address as a 12-digit hexadecimal

number that uniquely identifies a hardware device.
(non-IOS gateway)
Make sure that you enter a 12-hexadecimal character

value.
Domain Name
For MGCP gateways, this display-only field contains

a string generated by Cisco CallManager that
uniquely identifies the MGCP digital interface.
For example:
S1/DS1-0@VG200-2
S1 indicates slot 1, DS1-0 designates the digital
interface, and @VG200-2 designates the MGCP
domain name.
Note
Enter either a MAC address or a domain name, whichever applies.
Description

device.
Device Pool

device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties
for this device including CallManager Group,
Date/Time Group, Region, and Calling Search Space
for auto-registration of devices.

List

resource groups. An application chooses the
required media resource, such as a Music On Hold
server, among the available media resources
according to the priority order defined in a Media
Resource List.

78-13310-01
41-33
Chapter 41
Table 41-5 T1-CAS Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Network Audio Hold

Source
This audio source plays when the network initiates a

hold action.
User Audio Hold Source This audio source plays when a user initiates a hold
action.

calling search space designates a collection of route
partitions that are searched to determine how a
collected (originating) number should be routed.
Load Information
Enter the appropriate firmware load information for

the gateway.
The values you enter here override the default values
for this gateway.
Location

location specifies the total bandwidth available for
calls to and from this location. A location setting of
None means that the locations feature does not keep
track of the bandwidth consumed by this device.
Port Selection Order
Choose the order in which channels or ports are

enabled from first (lowest number port) to last
(highest number port) or from last to first.
Valid entries are TOP_DOWN (first to last) or
BOTTOM_UP (last to first). If you are not sure
which port order to use, choose TOP_DOWN.
Country Code
41-34
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Related Topics
H.323 Gateway and Intercluster Trunk Configuration Settings

Table 41-6 lists configuration settings for H.323 gateways and intercluster trunks.
Table 41-6 H.323 Gateway/Intercluster Trunk Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Device Name
Enter a unique name that is used by

Cisco CallManager to identify the device.
Description

device.
Device Pool
From the drop-down list box, choose the

appropriate device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties
for this device including CallManager Group,
Date/Time Group, Region, and Calling Search
Space for auto-registration of devices.

List

resource groups. An application chooses the
required media resource, such as a Music On Hold
server, among the available media resources
Resource Group List.
Network Hold Audio

Source
This audio source plays when the network initiates

a hold action.
User Hold Audio Source

action.

78-13310-01
41-35
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description

calling search space specifies the collection of
Route Partitions searched to determine how a
collected (originating) number should be routed.
Location
Choose the appropriate location for this device.

The location specifies the total bandwidth available
for calls to and from this location. A location
setting of None means that the locations feature
does not keep track of the bandwidth consumed by
this device.
Caller ID DN
Enter the pattern you want to use for caller ID, from
0 to 24 digits.
555XXXX = Variable caller ID, where X is

equal to an extension number. The CO appends
the number with the area code if you do not
specify it.
5555000 = Fixed caller ID. Use when you want

the Corporate number to be sent instead of the
exact extension from which the call is placed.
The CO appends the number with the area code
if you do not specify it.
41-36
78-13310-01
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Calling Party Selection
Any outbound call on a gateway can send directory

number information. This field determines which
directory number is sent.
Choose one of the following options to specify
which directory number is sent:
Presentation Bit

calling device.
First Redirect NumberSend the directory

number of the redirecting device.
Last Redirect NumberSend the directory

number of the last device to redirect the call.
Choose whether the central office transmits or

blocks caller ID.
Choose Allowed if you want the central office to
send caller ID.
Choose Restricted if you do not want the central
office to send caller ID.
Display IE Delivery
Check the check box to enable delivery of the

display IE in SETUP and CONNECT messages for
the calling and called party name delivery service.
Default leaves Display IE Delivery check box
unchecked.

78-13310-01
41-37
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Gatekeeper Name
Choose the Domain Name Service (DNS) name or

IP address of the H.323 gatekeeper.
A gatekeeper H.323 entity on the LAN supports the
H.225 RAS message set used for admission control,
bandwidth allocation, and dial pattern resolution. It
controls access to the LAN for connections between
H.323-compliant devices such as terminals and
gateways.
Use only for H.323-compliant gateways. All other
devices do not use this box:

Required
If your device is not gatekeeper controlled,

choose None.
If a remote gatekeeper controls the H.225

device, choose the name of the gatekeeper from
the drop-down list.
If you want a Media Termination Point to

implement features that H.323 does not support
(such as hold and transfer), check the check box.
Use this check box only for H.323 clients and H.323
devices that do not support the H.245 Empty
Capabilities Set message.
Num Digits
Choose the number of significant digits to collect,

from 0 to 32.
Cisco CallManager counts significant digits from
the right (last digit) of the number called.
Use this field if you enable Sig Digits. Use for the
processing of incoming calls and to indicate the
number of digits starting from the last digit of the
called number used to route calls coming into the
H.323 device. See Prefix DN and Sig Digits.
41-38
78-13310-01
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Sig Digits
Significant digits represent the number of final

digits retained on inbound calls. A trunk with
significant digits enabled truncates all but the final
few digits of the address provided by an inbound
call.
Check or uncheck this box depending on whether
you want to collect significant digits.
If check box is unchecked, the Cisco CallManager
does not truncate the inbound number.
If check box is checked, you also need to choose the
number of significant digits to collect (see Num
Digits).
Prefix DN

called party number on incoming calls.
truncating the number in accordance with the Num
Digits setting.
Run H225D On Every

Node
This option determines which Cisco CallManager

in the cluster establishes the H.225 session. The
default setting (checked) establishes the H.225
session on the Cisco CallManager where the calling
device has registered. For most systems, the default
setting works best.
Caution
Unchecking this check box

establishes the H.255 session on the
controlling Cisco CallManager in the
same Cisco CallManager group and
device pool as the H.225 gateway. Do
not uncheck this box unless advised
to do so by
Cisco Technical Assistance (TAC).

78-13310-01
41-39
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Called party IE number

type unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in called

party directory numbers. Cisco CallManager sets
the called directory number (DN) type. Cisco
recommends that you do not change the default
value unless you have advanced experience with
dialing plans, such as NANP or the European



41-40
78-13310-01
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Calling party IE number

type unknown
Choose the format for the type of number in calling

Cisco CallManager sets the calling directory
number (DN) type. Cisco recommends that you do
not change the default value unless you have
advanced experience with dialing plans, such as
NANP or the European dialing plan. You may need
to change the default in Europe because




78-13310-01
41-41
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Called Numbering Plan
Choose the format for the numbering plan in called

Cisco CallManager sets the called DN numbering




private network.
41-42
78-13310-01
Chapter 41

(continued)
Field
Description
Calling Numbering Plan

Cisco CallManager sets the calling DN numbering




private network.
Related Topics
Adding a Cisco IOS H.323 Gateway or Intercluster Trunk, page 41-12

78-13310-01
41-43
Chapter 41
Analog Access Gateway Configuration Settings

Table 41-6 lists configuration settings for Analog Access gateways (Cisco AS-2,
AS-4, and AS-8 gateways; Cisco AT-2, AT-4, and AT-8 gateways.
Table 41-7 Access Analog Gateway Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
Enter the media access control address. Make sure that

you enter a 12-hexadecimal character value. The MAC
address uniquely identifies hardware-based devices.
Description
Enter the purpose of the device.
Device Pool

device pool.
The device pool specifies a collection of properties for
this device including CallManager Group, Date/Time
Group, Region, and Calling Search Space for
Load Information
Enter the appropriate load information for the custom

software for gateway.
The values you enter here override the default values for
this gateway.
Country Code
Location

Calling Search Space Choose the appropriate calling search space. The calling
search space specifies a collection of partitions that are
searched to determine how a collected (originating)
number should be routed.
41-44
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Port Configuration Settings
Table 41-7 Access Analog Gateway Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Media Resource
Group List

resource groups. An application chooses the required
media resource, such as a Music On Hold server, among
the available media resources according to the priority
order defined in a Media Resource Group List.
Network Hold Audio This audio source plays when the network initiates a hold
Source
action.
User Hold Audio
Source

action.
Port Selection Order Choose the order in which ports are chosen. If you are
not sure which port order to use, choose TOP_DOWN:
TOP_DOWNselects ports in descending order,

from port 1 to port 8.
BOTTOM_UPselects ports in ascending order,

from port 8 to port 1.
Related Topics
Adding an Analog Access Gateway and Ports, page 41-13

See the following sections for tables that list detailed descriptions for all port type
configuration fields:
Loop Start Port Configuration Settings, page 41-49
Ground Start Port Configuration Settings, page 41-51
E & M Port Configuration Settings, page 41-52

78-13310-01
41-45
Chapter 41
For detailed information about gateway configuration settings, see the Gateway
POTS Port Configuration Settings

Table 41-8 POTS Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Port Type
Choose POTS from the Port Type drop-down list box.
Port Number
Choose whether you want to add and configure all

available ports, a single port, or a range of ports by
setting values for the Port Number and End Port
Number fields.
End Port Number
Port Direction
To specify a range of ports, choose appropriate

values for Port Number and End Port Number.
To create a single port, choose the same number in

the Port Number and End Port Number fields.
To add all available ports, choose All Ports for both

Choose the direction of calls passing through this port:
BothwaysUse for inbound and outbound calls

(default).
Audio Signal
Adjustment into IP
Network
This specifies the gain or loss applied to the received

audio signal relative to the port application type.
Audio Signal
Adjustment from IP
Network
This specifies the gain or loss applied to the transmitted

41-46
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-8 POTS Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Prefix DN
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the digits this
trunk receives on incoming calls.
The Cisco CallManager adds prefix digits after
setting.
Num Digits
Enter the number of significant digits to collect, from 0

to 32.
Cisco CallManager counts significant digits from the
right (last digit) of the number called.
Use this field for the processing of incoming calls and to
indicate the number of digits starting from the last digit
of the called number used to route calls coming into the
PRI span. See Prefix DN.
Expected Digits
Enter the number of digits expected on the inbound side

of the trunk. For this rarely used field, leave zero as the
default value if you are unsure.
Call Restart Timer

(1000-5000ms)
Call Restart Timer (1000-5000ms); ms indicates time in

milliseconds.
Offhook Validation Offhook Validation Timer (100-1000ms); ms indicates

Timer (100-1000ms) time in milliseconds.
Onhook Validation
Onhook Validation Timer (100-1000ms); ms indicates
Timer (100-1000ms) time in milliseconds.
Hookflash Timer
(100-1500ms)
Hookflash Timer (100-1500ms); ms indicates time in

milliseconds.
SMDI Port Number

(0-4096)
Use this field for analog access ports that connect to a

voice-mail system.
Set the SMDI Port Number equal to the actual port
number on the voice-mail system to which the analog
access port connects.

78-13310-01
41-47
Chapter 41
Table 41-8 POTS Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Model-specific
defined by the
gateway
manufacturer

without notice.
Related Topics
Adding an Analog Access Gateway and Ports, page 41-13
41-48
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Loop Start Port Configuration Settings

Table 41-9 Loop Start Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Port Type
Choose Loop Start from the Port Type drop-down list

box.
Port Number

Number fields.
End Port Number
Port Direction



Both WaysUse for inbound and outbound calls.
Audio Signal
Adjustment into IP
Network
This specifies the gain or loss applied to the received

Audio Signal
Adjustment from IP
Network
This specifies the gain or loss applied to the transmitted

Caller ID Enable
Check this check box to enable Caller ID.
Attendant DN
Enter the directory number to which you want incoming

calls routed; for example, zero or a directory number for
an attendant.
Delay Before
Dialing Timer
(100-5000ms)
Delay Before Dialing Timer (100-5000ms); ms indicates

time in milliseconds.

78-13310-01
41-49
Chapter 41
Table 41-9 Loop Start Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Release Guard Timer Release Guard Timer (100-5000ms); ms indicates time in

(100-5000ms)
milliseconds
Incoming Ring Halt
Timer
(1000-8000ms)
Incoming Ring Halt Timer (1000-8000ms); ms indicates

time in milliseconds.
Incoming Ring
Validation Timer
(100-2000ms)
Incoming Ring Validation Timer (100-2000ms); ms

indicates time in milliseconds.
Product-Specific Configurations
Model-specific
defined by the
gateway
manufacturer

without notice.
Related Topics
41-50
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Ground Start Port Configuration Settings

Table 41-10 Ground Start Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Port Type
Choose Ground Start from the Port Type drop-down list

box.
Port Number

Number fields.
End Port Number
Port Direction
Attendant DN



Enter the number to which you want incoming calls

routed; for example, zero or a directory number for an
attendant.

78-13310-01
41-51
Chapter 41
Table 41-10 Ground Start Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Model-specific
defined by the
gateway
manufacturer

without notice.
Related Topics
E & M Port Configuration Settings

E & M (Ear and Mouth or receive and transit) ports allow connection for PBX
trunk lines (tie lines). E & M designates a signaling technique for two-wire and
four-wire telephone and trunk intefaces.
E & M port configuration values must match those of the PBX to which the port
connects. Refer to the documentation that came with your specific PBX for the
appropriate E & M voice-port configuration values.
41-52
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-11 E & M Port Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Port Type
Choose EANDM from the Port Type drop-down list box.
Port Number

Number fields.
End Port Number
Port Direction
Calling Party
Selection
Digit Sending



Because any outbound call on a gateway can send

directory number information, choose which directory
number to send:

calling device.


Choose one of the following digit sending types for

out-dialing:
DTMFDual-tone multifrequency. Normal

touchtone dialing
MFMultifrequency
PULSEPulse (rotary) dialing

78-13310-01
41-53
Chapter 41
Table 41-11 E & M Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Caller ID Type
Choose the type of caller ID that displays to the called

party:
Caller ID DN
ANIAutomatic number identification displays the

number of the calling party.
DNISDialed number identification service

displays the number that the caller dialed.
Enter the pattern you want to use for caller ID, from 0 to
24 digits.
Prefix DN
555XXXX = Variable caller ID, where X equals an

extension number. The CO appends the number with
5555000 = Fixed caller ID, for when you want the

specify it.
Enter the prefix digits that are appended to the called

party number on incoming calls.
setting.
Num Digits
Choose the number of significant digits to collect, from

0 to 32. Cisco CallManager counts significant digits
Use this field if you check the Sig Digits check box. Use
this field for the processing of incoming calls and to
indicate the number of digits starting from the last digit
of the called number used to route calls coming into the
PRI span. See Prefix DN and Sig Digits.
41-54
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Table 41-11 E & M Port Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Expected Digits
Enter the number of digits expected on the inbound side

of the trunk. If you are unsure, leave zero as the default
value for this rarely used field.
Model-specific
defined by the
gateway
manufacturer

without notice.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
41-55
Chapter 41
Finding Specific Gateways

Because you might have hundreds of gateways in your network,
Cisco CallManager lets you locate specific gateways based on specific criteria.
Use these sections to find specific gateways:
Searching by Device Name, page 41-56
Searching by Description, page 41-58
Searching by Directory Number, page 41-59
Searching by Calling Search Space, page 41-60
Searching by Device Pool, page 41-62
Searching by Route Group, page 41-64
Searching by Device Name

Use this procedure if you know the device name of a specific gateway or if you
want to get a listing of all gateways registered with Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Gateway.

The Find and List Gateways pane appears.
Step 2
Step 3
From the drop-down list box, choose Device Name; then, choose one of the
following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
is empty
Specify the appropriate search text, if applicable. You can also specify how many
items per page to display, and whether to hide or show endpoints.
41-56
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Step 4
Click Find.
A list of discovered gateways displays by:
Device icon
Device name
Description (if applicable)
Device pool (if applicable)
Status
IP address
Note
You can delete or reset multiple gateways from the Find and List
Gateways pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate
gateways and clicking Delete Selected to delete the gateways or
clicking Reset Selected to reset the gateways. You can choose all of
the gateways on the pane by checking the check box in the matching
records title bar.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
41-57
Chapter 41
Searching by Description
Use this procedure if you know any of the key words used in the Description field
of a specific gateway registered with Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
From the drop-down list box, choose Description; then, choose one of the
following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
is empty
Step 3
Step 4
Click Find.
Device icon
Device name
Device pool
Status
IP address
41-58
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Note
ResetYou can delete or reset multiple gateways from the Find and List
records title bar.
Related Topics
Searching by Directory Number

Use this procedure to locate gateways assigned to a specific extension or range of
extensions and registered with Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
From the drop-down list box, choose Directory Number; then, choose one of the
following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
78-13310-01
41-59
Chapter 41
is empty
Step 3
Step 4
Click Find.
Extension
Partition
Device name
Status
IP address
Note
records title bar.
Related Topics
Searching by Calling Search Space

Use this procedure to locate gateways assigned to a calling search space and
registered with Cisco CallManager.
41-60
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Step 3
Tips
Step 4
From the drop-down list box, choose Calling Search Space; then, choose one of
the following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
is empty
You can locate an existing calling search space by choosing one from the
drop-down list box under the Find button. This automatically inserts the name
of the calling search space you choose into the Find field.
Click Find.
Calling search space
Device name
Status
IP address

78-13310-01
41-61
Chapter 41
Note
records title bar.
Related Topics
Searching by Device Pool

Use this procedure to locate gateways assigned to a specific device pool and
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
From the drop-down list box, choose Device Pool; then, choose one of the
following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
41-62
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Step 3
Tips
Step 4
is empty
You can locate an existing device pool by choosing one from the drop-down
list box under the Find button. This automatically inserts the name of the
device pool you choose into the Find field.
Click Find.
Device pool
Device name
Status
IP address
Note
records title bar.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
41-63
Chapter 41
Searching by Route Group

Use this procedure to locate gateways assigned to a specific route group and
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Step 3
Tips
Step 4
From the drop-down list box, choose Route Group; then, choose one of the
following criteria:
begins with
contains
ends with
is exactly
is not empty
is empty
You can locate an existing route group by choosing one from the drop-down
list box under the Find button. This automatically inserts the name of the route
group you choose into the Find field.
Click Find.
Route group priority)
Device name (port)
Status
IP address
41-64
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Modifying Gateways and Ports
Note
records title bar.
Related Topics

Using Cisco CallManager, you perform the following tasks identically regardless
of the gateway type:
Deleting Gateways, page 41-66
Resetting and Restarting Gateways, page 41-67

78-13310-01
41-65
Chapter 41
Deleting Gateways
Complete the following steps to delete a gateway from Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Enter search criteria to locate a specific gateway.
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered gateways matching your search criteria displays.
Step 4
Check the check box next to the gateway you want to delete.
Step 5
Click Delete Selected.

A message displays stating that you cannot undo this action.
Step 6
Tips
Click OK to delete the gateway, or Cancel to cancel the operation.
You can delete all of the gateways on the pane by checking the check box in
the matching records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Related Topics
41-66
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Resetting and Restarting Gateways

Complete the following steps to reset or restart a gateway using
Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

The Find and List Gateway pane appears.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered gateways matching your search criteria displays.
Step 4
Check the check box next to the gateway you want to reset.
Step 5

The Reset Gateway(s) pane appears.
Step 6
RestartRestarts a device without shutting it down.
ResetShuts down a device and brings it back up.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
41-67
Chapter 41
Updating Gateways and Ports

Complete the following steps to update a gateway or reconfigure gateway ports
from Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Step 3
Click Find.
A list of discovered devices displays.
Step 4
Click the Device Name of the gateway you want to update.

The Gateway Configuration pane appears.
Step 5
Update the appropriate gateway or port settings as described in the following

sections.
To access gateway ports, click the icon of the gateway port or the MGCP endpoint
link on the left side of the configuration pane for the selected gateway.
MGCP Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-16
E1/T1 PRI Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-21,
T1-CAS Gateway Configuration Settings, page 41-33.
Step 6
Click Update.
Step 7
Related Topics
41-68
78-13310-01
Chapter 41
Resetting and Restarting Gateways, page 41-67
Deleting Gateways, page 41-66

78-13310-01
41-69
Chapter 41
41-70
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
42
Cisco IP Phone Configuration

Cisco IP phones as full-featured telephones can plug directly into your IP
network. You can use the Cisco CallManager Administration phone configuration
panes to configure the following Cisco IP phones and devices:
Cisco IP Phone 7900 Family
Cisco IP Phone model 30 VIP
Cisco IP Phone model 12 SP+
H.323 clients
CTI ports
Once you add a Cisco IP phone to Cisco CallManager Administration,

information from the RIS Data Collector service displays on the Phone
the Cisco CallManager with which the device registered display.
The following topics provide information about working with and configuring
Cisco IP phones in Cisco CallManager Administration:
Configuring Cisco IP Phones, page 42-2
Finding a Phone, page 42-26
Phone Button Template Configuration, page 43-1
Phone Configuration Settings, page 42-12
Phone Configuration Checklist, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
42-1
Chapter 42
Configuring Cisco IP Phones

You can add phones to the Cisco CallManager database automatically using
auto-registration, manually using the phone configuration panes, or in groups
with the Bulk Administration Tool (BAT). By enabling auto-registration, you can
automatically add a Cisco IP phone to the Cisco CallManager database when you
connect the phone to your IP telephony network. During auto-registration,
Cisco CallManager assigns the next available sequential directory number to the
phone. In many cases, you might not want to use auto-registration; for example,
if you want to assign a specific directory number to a phone. If you do not use
auto-registration, you must manually add phones to the Cisco CallManager
database or use the Bulk Administration Tool (BAT). BAT, a plug-in application,
enables system administrators to perform batch add, modify, and delete
operations on large numbers of Cisco IP phones. Refer to the Bulk Administration
Tool Guide for Cisco CallManager for detailed instructions on using BAT.
Once you add a Cisco IP phone to Cisco CallManager Administration, the RIS
Data Collector service displays the device name, registration status, and the IP
address of the Cisco CallManager to which it is registered on the Phone
Configuration pane.
For information on how to configure phones as well as H.323 clients and CTI
ports from Cisco CallManager Administration, see the following topics:
Displaying the MAC Address of a Phone, page 42-3
Deleting a Phone, page 42-10
Resetting a Phone, page 42-7
Updating a Phone, page 42-9
Copying an Existing Phone, page 42-6
Configuring Speed Dial Buttons, page 42-20
Speed Dial Configuration Settings, page 42-22
Cisco IP Phones, Cisco CallManager System Guide
42-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Displaying the MAC Address of a Phone

The Media Access Control (MAC) address comprises a unique, 12-character,
hexadecimal number that identifies a Cisco IP phone or other hardware device.
Locate the number on a label on the bottom of the phone (for example,
000B6A409C405 for Cisco IP Phone 7900 Family models or
SS-00-0B-64-09-C4-05 for Cisco IP Phone models SP 12+ and 30 VIP).
Cisco CallManager makes the MAC address a required field for Cisco IP phone
device configuration. When entering the MAC address in Cisco CallManager
fields, do not use spaces or dashes and do not include the "SS" that may precede
the MAC address on the label.
To display the MAC address when the phone is powered on, perform the following
steps:
Cisco IP Phone 7960 and 7940 modelsPress Settings, use the arrow buttons
to highlight the Network Configuration menu option, and press the Select
softkey.
Cisco IP Phone 7910 Press Settings, use the arrow buttons to locate
Network Config options, and press 6 on the phone keypad to begin displaying
the Network Config options; then, use the arrow keys to scroll the Network
Config option display to the MAC address.
Cisco IP Phone models 12 SP+ and 30VIPPress ** to display the MAC

address on the second line of the LCD display.
For more information about displaying additional configuration settings on

Cisco IP phones, refer to the Cisco IP Phone 7900 Family Administration Guide
and the individual Getting Started publications provided with Cisco IP phones.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
42-3
Chapter 42
Adding a Phone
Before a Cisco IP phone can be used, you must use this procedure to add the
phone to Cisco CallManager. You can also use this procedure to configure H.323
clients or CTI ports. H.323 clients can be Symbol NetVision phones or Microsoft
NetMeeting clients. CTI ports designate virtual devices used by
Cisco CallManager applications such as Cisco SoftPhone and
Cisco AutoAttendant.
Note
If you are planning to use a TAPI application to control CTI port devices using
the Cisco TAPI Service Provider (TSP), then you may only configure one line
per CTI port device.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Add a Device.

The Add a New Device pane displays.
Step 2
From the Device Type drop-down list box, choose Phone and click Next.
The Add a New Phone pane displays.
Step 3
From the Phone type drop-down list, choose the appropriate phone type
(Cisco IP Phone model, H.323 client, or CTI port) and click Next. Once you
choose a phone type, you cannot modify it.
The Phone Configuration pane displays.
Step 4

Only the settings appropriate to the chosen phone type appear on your pane.
Step 5
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the phone has been added to the database.
Step 6
To add a directory number to this phone, click OK and enter the appropriate
settings on the Directory Number Configuration pane as described in the
Directory Number Configuration Settings section on page 42-32. To return to
the Phone Configuration pane, click Cancel.
42-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Once you add a Cisco IP phone to Cisco CallManager Administration,

information from the RIS Data Collector service displays on the Phone
the Cisco CallManager with which the device registered display as illustrated in
Figure 42-1.
Figure 42-1 Phone Configuration Pane
Step 7
Reset the phone after making changes to apply the new settings. Refer to the
Resetting a Phone section on page 42-7.
Next Steps
If you want to configure speed-dial buttons to this phone, see the Configuring
Speed Dial Buttons section on page 42-20. If you want to configure services for
this phone, see the Configuring Cisco IP Phone Services section on page 42-22.
Related Topics
Adding a Directory Number, page 42-28

78-13310-01
42-5
Chapter 42
Copying an Existing Phone

If you want to manually add several similar phones to the Cisco CallManager
database, you can add one and then copy its basic settings to apply to another
phone. You must change at least the Media Access Control (MAC) address before
inserting the new phone into the database.
Perform the following procedure to copy phone settings.
Procedure
Step 1

The Find and List Phones pane displays.
Step 2
Enter search criteria to locate a specific phone and click Find.

A list of phones that match the search criteria appears.
Step 3
Click the Copy icon for the phone whose settings you want to copy.
Step 4
Enter the MAC address of the new phone.
Note
For information on obtaining the MAC address, see the Displaying

the MAC Address of a Phone section on page 42-3.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the phone has been added to the database.
Step 7
To add a directory number to this phone, click OK and enter the appropriate
settings on the Directory Number Configuration pane as described in the
Directory Number Configuration Settings section on page 42-32. To return to
the Phone Configuration pane, click Cancel.
42-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Related Topics
Resetting a Phone
You must reset a Cisco IP phone after you add a directory number or update its
settings for your changes to take affect. Perform the following procedure to reset
a Cisco IP phone using Cisco CallManager.
Note
If a call is in progress, the phone does not reset until the call finishes.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

A list of phones that match the search criteria appears as illustrated in
Figure 42-2.

78-13310-01
42-7
Chapter 42
Figure 42-2 Find and List Phones Pane
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the phones you want to reset. To select all of the
phones on the pane, check the check box in the matching records title bar.
Step 4

The Reset Device pane displays.
Step 5
Click one of the following items:
Restart DeviceRestarts the selected devices without shutting them down

(reregisters the phones with Cisco CallManager).
Reset DeviceShuts down the selected devices and brings them back up
(performs a complete shutdown and reinitialization of the phones).
Related Topics
42-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Updating a Phone
Perform the following procedure to update a Cisco IP phone from
Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Enter search criteria to locate a specific phone, and click Find.

Step 3
From the list, click the name of the phone you want to update.
Step 4
Step 5
Click Update.
Step 6
Click Reset Phone to reset or restart the phone and apply the new settings.
Restarting the phone re-registers the phones with Cisco CallManager without
shutting the phone down. Resetting the phone shuts down the phone and brings it
back up (performs a complete shut-down and re-initialization of the phones).
Related Topics
Speed Dial Configuration Settings, page 42-22

78-13310-01
42-9
Chapter 42
Deleting a Phone
Perform the following procedure to delete a Cisco IP phone from
Cisco CallManager.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

A list of phones that match the search criteria appears as illustrated in
Figure 42-2.
Figure 42-3 Find and List Phones Pane
Step 3
Check the check boxes next to the phones you want to delete and clicking
Delete Selected.
Delete all of the phones on the pane by checking the check box in the
matching records title bar and clicking Delete Selected.
Choose the name of the phone you want to delete from the list to display its
current settings, and click Delete.
A confirmation dialog displays.

Step 4
Click OK.
42-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Related Topics

78-13310-01
42-11
Chapter 42
Phone Configuration Settings

Table 42-1 describes the available settings on the Phone Configuration pane.
Note
The Product-Specific Configuration section contains model-specific fields

defined by the phone manufacturer. Cisco CallManager dynamically
populates the fields with default values.
To view field descriptions and help for product-specific configuration items,
click the i information icon to the right of the Product Specific
Configuration heading to display help in a popup window.
If you need more information, refer to the documentation for the specific
phone that you are configuring or contact the manufacturer.
Table 42-1 Phone Configuration Settings
Field
Description
MAC Address
Enter the Media Access Control (MAC) address that

identifies Cisco IP phones (hardware phones only). The
value must be 12 hexadecimal characters.
Refer to the Displaying the MAC Address of a Phone
section on page 42-3 for information on how to access
the MAC address.
Device Name
Enter a name to identify software-based telephones. The

value can include 1 to 15 characters, including
alphanumeric, dot, dash, and underscores.
Cisco CallManager makes this field available only for
H.323 clients and CTI ports.
Description
Identify the purpose of the device. You can enter the user
name (such as John Smith) or the phone location (such as
Lobby) in this field.
42-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Table 42-1 Phone Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Device Pool
Choose the device pool to which you want this phone

assigned. The device pool defines sets of common
characteristics for devices, such as region, date/time
group, and Cisco CallManager group for
auto-registration.
The value you choose overrides the default value for this
type of device. Refer to the Device Defaults
Media Resource
Group List
Choose the appropriate Media Resource Group List. A

Media Resource Group List comprises a prioritized
grouping of media resource groups. An application
selects the required media resource, such as a Music On
Hold server, among the available media resources
Resource Group List.
If you select <none>, Cisco CallManager uses the Media
Resource Group defined in the device pool.
For more information, refer to the Media Resource
Management section in the Cisco CallManager System
Guide.
searched to determine how a dialed number should be
routed.

78-13310-01
42-13
Chapter 42
Field
Description
User Hold Audio

Source
To specify the audio source played when a user initiates

a hold action, click the drop-down arrow and choose an
audio source from the list that displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco CallManager
uses the audio source defined in the device pool or the
system default if the device pool does not specify an
audio source ID.
Note
You define audio sources in the Music On

Hold Audio Source Configuration pane. For
access, choose Service > Music On Hold.
Network Hold Audio To specify the audio source played when the network
Source
initiates a hold action, click the drop-down arrow and
choose an audio source from the list that displays.
If you do not choose an audio source, Cisco CallManager
uses the audio source defined in the device pool or the
system default if the device pool does not specify an
audio source ID.
Note
Location
You define audio sources in the Music On

Hold Audio Source Configuration pane. For
access, choose Service > Music On Hold.
Choose the appropriate location for this Cisco IP phone.

calls to and from this location. A location setting of
None means that the locations feature does not keep track
of the bandwidth consumed by this Cisco IP phone.
42-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Field
Description
Phone Button
Template
Choose the appropriate phone button template. The

phone button template determines the configuration of
buttons on a phone and identifies which feature (line,
speed dial, and so on) is used for each button.
The value you enter overrides the default value for this
type of device. Refer to the Device Defaults
Cisco CallManager does not make this field available for
H.323 clients or CTI ports.
Expansion Module 1 Choose the appropriate template, if your phone is

connected to a Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion Module.
Expansion Module 2 Choose the appropriate template, if your phone is
connected to a second Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion
Module.
Phone Load Name
Enter the custom software for the Cisco IP Phone.

The value you enter overrides the default value for the
current model. For more information, see the Device
Defaults Configuration section on page 6-1.
This field is not available for H.323 clients or CTI ports.
Module 1 Load
Name
Enter the custom software for the Cisco IP Phone 7914

Expansion Module, if applicable.
current model.
Module 2 Load
Name
Enter the custom software for the second

Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion Module, if applicable.
current model.

78-13310-01
42-15
Chapter 42
Field
Description
Outgoing Caller ID
Pattern
Enter the number to send as Caller ID for outgoing calls.
Calling Party
Selection
Caller ID
Presentation
NNNXXXX = Variable Caller ID, where XXXX is

equal to an extension number or directory number (X
is a number from 0 to 9), and NNN is the office code.
The Central Office (CO) appends the number with
5555000 = Fixed Caller ID. Use when you want the

specify it.
From the following list, choose which value displays if a

call to this device is forwarded or transferred:

calling device.


Choose whether the central office transmits or blocks

caller ID.
Choose Allowed if you want the central office to send
caller ID.
Choose Restricted if you do not want the central office to
send caller ID.
Display IE Delivery
To enable delivery of the display incoming exclusion

(IE) in SETUP and CONNECT messages for the calling
and called party name delivery service, check the
Display IE Delivery check box.
By default, the Display IE Delivery check box is
unchecked.
42-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Field
Description
Media Termination
Point Required
If a media termination point is used to implement

features that H.323 does not support (such as hold and
transfer), check the Media Termination Point Required
check box. If a media termination point is not used to
implement features that H.323 does not support, uncheck
the check box.
Use this check box for H.323 devices that do not support
the H.245 Empty Capabilities Set message.
Information
Enter the location (URL) of the help text for the

information (i) button. Leave this field blank to accept
the default setting.
Cisco CallManager only displays this field for
Cisco IP Phone 7960 and 7940 models.
Directory
Enter the server from which the phone obtains directory

information. Leave this field blank to accept the default
setting.
Messages
Enter the location (URL) from which the phone obtains

messaging information. Leave this field blank to accept
the default setting.
Services
Enter the location (URL) for Cisco IP Phone Services.

Leave this field blank to accept the default setting.

78-13310-01
42-17
Chapter 42
Field
Description
Idle
Enter the URL to display on the Cisco IP Phone 7960

and Cisco IP Phone 7940 LCD when the phone has not
been used for the time specified in Idle Timer field. For
example, you can display a logo on the LCD when the
phone has not been used for 5 minutes.
Idle Timer (seconds) Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that you want to
elapse before the URL specified in the Idle field displays.
Authentication
Server
Enter the URL the phone uses to validate requests made

to the phone web server. If you do not provide an
authentication URL, the advanced features on the 7960
and 7940 that require authentication will not function.
By default, this URL accesses a Cisco IP Phone User
Options pane configured during installation.
42-18
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Field
Description
Proxy Server
Enter the host and port (for example,

proxy.cisco.com:80) used to proxy HTTP requests for
access to non-local host addresses from the phone HTTP
client.
If the phone receives a URL such as www.cisco.com in a
service and the phone is not configured in the cisco.com
domain, the phone uses the proxy server to access the
URL. If the phone is configured in cisco.com domain, the
phone accesses the URL without using the proxy because
it is in the same domain as the URL.
If you do not configure this URL, the phone attempts to
connect directly to the URL.
Enable Extension
Mobility Feature
Check this check box to enable Extension Mobility.

Note
The items under the Extension Mobility

(Device Profile) Information heading show
current device information regarding the
login status of the device.
You must enable this feature on a device-by-device basis.

Log Out Profile
Choose the device profile you want to be the default

logout device profile of the device. Choosing <Use
Current Device Settings> creates an autogenerated
device profile as the default device profile.
If you choose <Select a User Device Profile>, you can
then assign a user device profile that has already been
defined; this user device profile becomes the default
device profile for this device.
If a user device profile is chosen as the default device
profile, that user device profile is loaded onto the device
when the device is logged out (when no user is logged
in).

78-13310-01
42-19
Chapter 42
Field
Description
Log In User ID
Cisco CallManager populates this field with the user ID

of the user who is currently logged into this device. If no
user is logged into the device, <None> displays.
Log In Time
Cisco CallManager populates this field with the

maximum duration specified for the login to be in effect.
Once the time is reached, the system automatically logs
out the device.
Log Out Time
Cisco CallManager populates this field with the time

specified for the logout to be in effect.
Configuring Speed Dial Buttons

You can configure speed-dial buttons for phones in the Cisco CallManager
Administration if you want to provide speed dial buttons for users or if you are
configuring phones that do not have a specific user assigned to them. Users can
change the speed-dial buttons on their phones using the Cisco IP Phone User
Options panes.
Procedure
Step 1
From the Phone Configuration pane, click the Update Speed Dial buttons link at
the top of the pane.
Note
To display the Phone Configuration pane, choose Device > Phone.

Enter your search criteria and click Find. Choose the phone for which
you want to configure speed-dial buttons.
Step 2
Step 3
Click Update to apply the changes or click Update and Close to apply the
changes and close the dialog.
42-20
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Related Topics
Updating a Directory Number, page 42-29
Phone Features, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
42-21
Chapter 42
Speed Dial Configuration Settings

Table 42-2 describes the speed-dial button configuration settings.
Table 42-2 Speed Dial Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Speed Dial
This field identifies the speed-dial button on the phone or

on the Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion Module.
Number
Enter the number you want dialed when the user presses
the speed-dial button.
Label
Enter the text you want to appear for the speed dial
button.
This field is not available for the Cisco IP Phone 7910.
Related Topics
Configuring Cisco IP Phone Services

From a Cisco IP Phone 7960/7940, users can access information services, such as
weather, stock quotes, or other services available to their company. Using the
Cisco CallManager Administration, you can set up the available services for
phones. Users can modify the services using the Cisco IP Phone User Options
panes. For information about the Cisco IP Phone User Options panes, refer to the
Cisco IP Phone 7960/7940 User Guide. For more information on maintaining
services in Cisco CallManager Administration, see the Cisco IP Phone Services
42-22
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Subscribing to a Service
Perform the following steps to subscribe to new services for a phone.
Before You Begin
Add the services to Cisco CallManager. For more information, see the Adding a
Cisco IP Phone Service section on page 35-2.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3
Choose the phone to which you want to add a service.

Step 4
On the upper, right side of the pane, click the Update Services link.
Step 5
From the Select a Service drop-down list box, choose the service you want to add
to the phone.
Step 6
Click Continue.
The pane displays with the service you chose. If you want to choose a different
service, click Back and repeat Step 5.
Step 7
Click Subscribe.
The service appears in the Your Subscribed Services list.
Related Topics
Updating Services, page 42-24
Unsubscribing from a Service, page 42-25

78-13310-01
42-23
Chapter 42
Updating Services
Perform the following steps to update a service. You can update the service name
and service parameter values, if necessary.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3
Choose the phone for which you want to update a service.

Step 4
Step 5
From the Your Subscribed Services list, choose a service.
Step 6
Update the appropriate parameter and click Update.
Related Topics
Unsubscribing from a Service, page 42-25
42-24
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Unsubscribing from a Service

Perform the following steps to unsubscribe from a service.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

Step 3
Choose the phone from which you want to delete a service.

Step 4
Step 5
From the Your Subscribed Services list, choose a service.
Step 6
Click Unsubscribe.
A warning message verifies that you want to unsubscribe from the service.
Step 7
Click OK to unsubscribe or click Cancel to restore your previous settings.
Related Topics
Subscribing to a Service, page 42-23

78-13310-01
42-25
Chapter 42
Finding a Phone
Finding a Phone
Because you might have thousands of Cisco IP phones in your network,
Cisco CallManager lets you search for phones based on specified criteria. Follow
these steps to search for a specific Cisco IP phone in the Cisco CallManager
database.
Tips
For methods to limit your search, refer to the Phone Search section in the
This list does not include analog phones and fax machines connected to gateways
(such as a Cisco VG200). The list only includes phones configured in
Cisco CallManager Administration.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Choose the field you want to use to locate a phone.
Note
To find all phones registered in the database, choose Device Name

from the list of fields, and choose is not empty from the list of
patterns; then, click Find.
Step 3
Choose the appropriate search pattern for your text search. If you do not want to
perform a text search, choose is empty.
Step 4
Enter your search text in the Find field, if any.
Step 5
If you choose calling search space or device pool in Step 2, the options available
in the database display. From the drop-down list box below the Find button, you
can choose one of these options.
Step 6
Click Find.
A list of devices matching the criteria appears. The field you selected in Step 2
determines how the devices in the list are sorted.
This pane also lists the total number of devices and panes on this pane.
42-26
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Configuring Directory Numbers
Step 7
To view the next set of discovered devices, click Next.
Note
You can delete or reset multiple phones from the Find and List Phones
pane by checking the check boxes next to the appropriate phones and
clicking Delete Selected to delete the phones or clicking Reset
Selected to reset the phones. You can choose all of the phones on the
pane by checking the check box in the matching records title bar.
Related Topics
Configuring Cisco IP Phones, page 42-2

Using Cisco CallManager, you can configure and modify directory numbers
assigned to specific phones. These sections provide instructions for working with
directory numbers.
Use this area of Cisco CallManager Administration to perform tasks such as
adding or removing directory numbers, configuring call forward, call pickup, and
call waiting, setting the display text that appears on the called party phone when
a call is placed from a line, and disabling ring on a line.
Related Topics
Deleting a Directory Number, page 42-30

78-13310-01
42-27
Chapter 42
Adding a Directory Number

Follow these instructions to add a directory number to a specific phone. You can
configure the call waiting, call forward, and call pickup phone features while
adding the directory number.
Before You Begin
You must add a Cisco IP phone to Cisco CallManager before adding a directory
number. See the Adding a Phone section on page 42-4 for details.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2

A list of phones that match the search criteria displays.
Step 3
Click the device name to which you want to add a directory number.
Step 4
In the Directory Numbers list, click an unassigned line, such as Line 1 or Line 2.
The Configure a Directory Number pane displays.
Step 5
Step 6
Click Insert.
A message displays stating that the directory number has been added to the
database.
Step 7
Click OK to display the Phone Configuration pane. Click Cancel to return to the
Directory Number Configuration pane.
Note
You must restart the device before your changes take affect.
42-28
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Related Topics
Updating a Directory Number

Follow these instructions to update a directory number assigned to a specific
phone.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Enter search criteria to locate a specific phone.

Step 3
Click the name of the phone to update.

Step 4
From the Directory Numbers list, click the line you want to update.
The Directory Number Configuration pane displays.
Note
If your phone uses a Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion Module, the

Directory Numbers list displays the lines for the phone and for the
Cisco IP Phone 7914 Expansion Module.

78-13310-01
42-29
Chapter 42
Step 5
Step 6
Click Update.
Step 7
Click Restart Devices.
Related Topics
Deleting a Directory Number

Perform the following procedure to delete a directory number from a specific
phone.
Procedure
Step 1

Step 2
Enter the search criteria to locate a specific phone and click Find.
Step 3
Choose the device name that contains the directory number you want to delete.
42-30
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Step 4
From the Directory Numbers list, choose the line you want to delete.
The Directory Number configuration pane displays.
Step 5
Click Delete.
A message appears verifying that you want to delete the line.
Step 6
Click OK.
The Phone Configuration pane displays with the line deleted.
Step 7
Click Reset Phone to reset or restart the phone and apply the new settings.
Restarting the phone re-registers the phones with Cisco CallManager without
shutting the phone down. Resetting the phone shuts down the phone and brings it
back up (performs a complete shut-down and re-initialization of the phones).
Related Topics

78-13310-01
42-31
Chapter 42

Table 42-3 describes the fields available on the Directory Number Configuration
Settings pane.
Table 42-3 Directory Number Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Directory Number
Enter a dialable phone number. Values can include

numeric characters and route pattern wildcards and
special characters except for (.) and (@). The directory
number you enter can appear in more than one partition.
If the words Shared Line appear in red next to the
directory number, the directory number appears on more
than one device in the same partition. Refer to the
Directory Numbers section in the Cisco CallManager
System Guide for more information.
Partition
Choose the partition to which the directory number

belongs. Make sure the directory number you enter in the
Directory Number field is unique within the partition you
choose.
Voice Message Box
Enter the voice mailbox you want to associate with this

line. When a call is forwarded to voice mail, the
Cisco CallManager sends the number you enter here to
your voice-mail application. The voice-mail system then
leaves voice-mail messages in the configured mailbox.
By default, the Cisco CallManager Administration
enters the directory number in this field.
During auto-registration, Cisco CallManager applies the
default mask value you entered in the the Voice Message
Box Mask field on the Cisco CallManager Configuration
pane to this field.
For example, if you enter 97281XXXXX in the Voice
Message Box Mask field and you enter 30000 in the
Voice Message Box field, Cisco CallManager identifies
the voice message box for this directory number as
9728130000.
42-32
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Field
Description
The value you choose applies to all devices using this
directory number.
Changes cause update of the numbers listed in the Call
Pickup Group field.
Call Waiting
Choose the appropriate call-waiting settings. This field

determines whether this directory number uses call
waiting when a line is busy (On), responds with a busy
signal (Off), or uses the system-wide default setting
(Default).
The value you choose applies to all devices using this
directory number.
Active Auto Answer Check the check box to enable the user to answer calls
for this Directory
automatically when the user enables the headset button
Number
on the Cisco IP Phone 7960/7940.
You cannot activate auto answer for a directory number
with a shared line appearance. The Cisco CallManager
automatically unchecks and disables this check box if
you are configuring a directory number with a shared line
appearance.
Call Pickup Group
Choose the number that can be dialed to answer calls to

this directory number (in the specified partition).
Forward All
Enter the directory number to which all calls are

forwarded. You can enter any dialable phone number,
including an outside destination.
The value you enter applies to all devices using this
directory number.

78-13310-01
42-33
Chapter 42
Field
Description
Forward Busy
Enter the directory number to which a call is forwarded

when the line is in use. You can enter any dialable phone
number, including an outside destination.
directory number.
Forward No Answer

when no one answers after four rings. You can enter any
dialable phone number, including an outside destination.
directory number.
Forward On Failure

when a CTI application fails.
42-34
78-13310-01
Chapter 42

Field
Description
Calling Search Space Choose the calling search space to use when forwarding
to the specified destination.
You can configure calling search space for Forward All,
Forward Busy, Forward No Answer, and Forward on
Failure directory numbers. The value you choose applies
to all devices using this directory number.
If you set the Forward All Calling Search Space field to
<none>, Cisco CallManager uses the calling search
spaces of the line and the phone when the user forwards
calls using the Cisco IP Phone User Options panes or the
CFwdAll softkey on the phone. If you want to restrict
users from forwarding calls on their phones, you must
choose a restrictive calling search space from the
Forward All Calling Search Space field; for example:
You have two calling search spaces: Building and PSTN.
The Buiding calling search space only allows users to
call within the building, while the PSTN calling search
space allows users to call within and outside the building.
You assign the phone to the PSTN calling search space
and the line on your phone to the Building calling search
space. If you set the Call Forward All calling search
space to <none>, the Cisco CallManager can forward
calls to any number within the PSTN or building calling
search spaces. To prevent the user from forwarding calls
to numbers outside the building, set the Call Forward All
calling search space to Building.
Display
Enter the text that you want to appear on the called party
phone when a call is placed from this line; typically, use
the user name or the directory number. You can enter up
to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Leave this field blank to display the extension.
The value you enter applies only to the current device.

78-13310-01
42-35
Chapter 42
Field
Description
Disable ring on this

line
To stop the phone from ringing to indicate incoming

calls, check the check box.
This setting only applies to the current device.
External Phone
Number Mask
Enter the phone number (or mask) used to send Caller ID

information when placing a call from this line.
You can enter a maximum of 30 number and X
characters. The Xs represent the directory number and
must appear at the end of the pattern. For example, if you
specify a mask of 972813XXXX, an external call from
extension 1234 displays a caller ID number of
9728131234.
Related Topics
42-36
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
43
Phone Button Template Configuration

Cisco CallManager includes several default phone button templates. When adding
phones, you can assign one of these templates to the phones or create a new
template.
Creating and using templates provides a fast way to assign a common button
configuration to a large number of phones. For example, if users in your company
do not use the conference feature, you can create a template that reassigns this
button to a different feature, such as speed dial.
Make sure all phones have at least one line assigned. Normally, this is button 1.
You can assign additional lines to a phone, depending on the Cisco IP phone
model. Phones also generally have several features, such as speed dial and call
forward, assigned to the remaining buttons.
The following sections provide details about using and working with the phone
button templates:
Phone Button Configuration Settings, page 43-3
Modifying Phone Button Templates, page 43-3
Phone Button Templates, Cisco CallManager System Guide

78-13310-01
43-1
Chapter 43
Adding Phone Button Templates
Adding Phone Button Templates

Cisco CallManager includes default templates for each Cisco IP phone model.
When adding phones, you can assign one of these templates to the phone or create
one of your own.
Before You Begin
If you are creating a custom phone button template, refer to the guidelines for
creating new phone button templates. See the Guidelines for Customizing Phone
Button Templates section in the Cisco CallManager System Guide.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Device > Phone Button Template.
Step 2
Choose a template and click Copy to create a new template.

The new template exactly duplicates the existing template and automatically
assigns it a new name. You must update this new template if you want it to differ
from the original.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Insert to add the new template.
Step 5
Click View Button Layout to verify the button layout.
Related Topics
Modifying Phone Button Templates, page 43-3
Guidelines for Customizing Phone Button Templates, Cisco CallManager

System Guide
43-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 43

Phone Button Configuration Settings
Phone Button Configuration Settings

Table 43-1 describes the phone button configuration settings.
Table 43-1 Phone Button Configuration Settings
Field
Description
Template Name
Enter a unique name used by Cisco CallManager to

identify the template.
Feature
Choose the function of the phone button you want to

specify in the template.
Modifying Phone Button Templates

You can make changes to the default templates included with Cisco CallManager
or to custom templates you created. You can rename existing templates and
modify them to create new ones, update custom templates to add or remove
features, lines, or speed dials, and delete templates that are no longer being used.
Related Topics
Renaming a Phone Button Template, page 43-4
Deleting a Phone Button Template, page 43-5
Updating a Phone Button Template, page 43-6

78-13310-01
43-3
Chapter 43
Renaming a Phone Button Template

Use this procedure to rename a phone button template. Renaming a template does
not affect the phones that use that template. All Cisco IP phones that use this
template continue to use this template once it is renamed.
Procedure
Step 1

A listing of current phone button templates appears in the Phone Button
Templates list.
Step 2
Choose the phone button template you want to rename.

The Phone Button Template Configuration page displays.
Step 3
In the Template Name field, enter the new name.
Step 4
Click Update.
The template redisplays with the new name.
Related Topics
43-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 43

Deleting a Phone Button Template

You can delete phone templates that are not currently assigned to any phone in
your system. You cannot delete a template that is assigned to one or more devices,
the last template for a model, or the default template for a model (specified on the
Device Defaults Configuration screen.) You must reassign all Cisco IP phones
that are using the template you want to delete to a different phone button template
before you can delete the template.
Procedure
Step 1

Templates list.
Step 2
Choose the phone button template you want to delete.

The Phone Button Template Configuration page displays.
Step 3
Click Delete.
A message verifies that you want to delete the template.
Step 4
Click OK to delete the template.

A message verifies that the template was deleted.
Step 5
Click OK to continue.
Related Topics

78-13310-01
43-5
Chapter 43
Updating a Phone Button Template

You can update a phone button template to add or remove features, add or remove
lines and speed dials, or assign features, lines, and speed dials to different buttons
on the phone. If you update a phone template, be sure to inform affected users of
the changes.
Follow these instructions to update a phone button template.
Note
When you update a template, the change affects all phones that use the
template.
Procedure
Step 1

Templates list.
Step 2
Choose the phone button template you want to update.

The phone button template configuration page displays.
Step 3
Step 4
Click Update.
The template reappears with the changes assigned to it.
Note
Step 5
After updating the template, you must restart devices using the
template.
Click Restart Devices to apply the updated phone button template.
43-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 43

Related Topics
Guidelines for Customizing Phone Button Templates, Cisco CallManager

System Guide

78-13310-01
43-7
Chapter 43
43-8
78-13310-01
A R T
User Configuration
C H A P T E R
44
Adding a New User

The User option in the Cisco CallManager Administration allows the
administrator to add, search, display, and maintain information about
Cisco CallManager users. This chapter describes the options for managing user
directory information.
This chapter includes the following procedures:
Adding a User, page 44-2
User Configuration Settings, page 44-2
Configuring Application Profiles, page 44-3
Associating Devices to a User, page 44-4
Auto Attendant, page 44-6
Extension Mobility, page 44-6
SoftPhone, page 44-7

78-13310-01
44-1
Chapter 44
Adding a New User
Adding a User
Adding a User
The following procedure provides instructions on adding a user.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose User > Add a New User.
Step 2
Step 3
When you have completed the user information, you can either
Save your changes and add the user by clicking Insert.
Or, if you want to associate devices to this user, continue with the
Associating Devices to a User procedure.
Related Topics
User Configuration Settings, page 44-2
Using Basic Search, page 45-2
Using Advanced Search, page 45-3
User Configuration Settings

Table 44-1 describes the user configuration setting.
Table 44-1 User Configuration Settings
Field
Description
First Name
Enter the user first name.
Last Name
Enter the user last name.
UserID
Enter the user identification name. Cisco CallManager

does not permit modifying the user ID once it is created
44-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 44
Adding a New User

Configuring Application Profiles
Table 44-1 User Configuration Settings (continued)
Field
Description
User Password
Enter the user password.
Confirm Password
Enter the user password again.
PIN
Enter a Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Confirm PIN
Enter the PIN again.
Telephone Number
Enter the user telephone number.
Manager
Enter the name of the user manager ID. The manager

name you enter must already exist in the directory as a
user.
Department
Enter the user department number.
Enable CTI
Application Use
To configure users so that they can use CTI applications,

check the Enable CTI Application Use check box.

After you add a new user, options in the Application Profile section of the User
Information pane in the Cisco CallManager Administration allows you to
configure the user profile. These profiles allows each user to personalize phone
features, mobility, and Cisco IP SoftPhone capability.
Before you begin
Make sure the user is in the database. See the chapter on Searching the Global
Directory section on page 45-1 for more information.
You can create a profile for each of the applications that appears on the left in the
Application Profile pane.
To return to the User Information pane to continue configuring profiles, Click
Personal Information.

78-13310-01
44-3
Chapter 44
Adding a New User
Associating Devices to a User

Once you have added a user, you can associate devices over which users will have
control. Users can control some devices, such as phones. Other devices, such as
CTI ports, can be controlled by applications that are identified as users. When
users have control of a phone, they have the ability to control certain settings for
that phone, such as speed dial and call forwarding.
The User Device Assignment window consists of a device filter section and a list
of available devices.
Available Device List Filters
The device filter allows you to limit your list of devices by entering search criteria
based on all or part of the device name, description, or directory number. To limit
the list of available devices to a specific selection, enter the criteria by which you
wish to search using the following methods:
Choose device name, description, or directory number.
Choose the comparison operator.
Enter a text or number entry.
For example, to list all extensions that begin with 5, you would choose
Directory Number begins with and then enter 5 in the text box.
Available Devices
Once you have specified the search criteria to display devices, all available
devices that match your criteria appear in the Available Devices list. The list
displays in groups of 20 devices and you can navigate it using the buttons at the
bottom of the window. You can page through the device list by clicking First,
Previous, Next, and Last, or you can jump to a specific page by entering the page
number in the page entry box and then clicking Page.
If you are modifying the device assignment for an existing user, the devices
previously assigned to that user appear in a group at the beginning of the device
list.
You can associate one or more devices to the user by checking the checkbox next
to that device. If a device has multiple extensions associated with it, each line
extension appears in the list. You need to choose only one line extension to choose
all the lines associated with that device.
44-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 44
Adding a New User

To assign devices to a user, you must access the User Information window for that
user. See the chapter on Searching the Global Directory section on page 45-1
for information on accessing information on existing users.
Once the User Information window displays, perform the following procedure to
assign devices.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Device Association in the Application Profiles column.
Step 2
You can limit the list of available devices by entering the search criteria in the
Available Device List Filters section. You should specify
The device name, description, or directory number
The comparison operator
A text or number entry
Then, click Select Devices.

Step 3
Check the check box of one or more devices you want to associate with the user.
You can assign one primary extension from the devices to which the user is
assigned by checking the radio button in the right column for that device.
Step 4
When you have completed the assignment, click Update to assign devices to a
user. Or, you can click Personal Information to return to the User Information
window, Back to user list to return to the search list, or Cancel Changes to return
to the User information window.
Related Topics
The following list contains additional information and procedures related to this
section:

78-13310-01
44-5
Chapter 44
Adding a New User
Auto Attendant
The Automated Attendant (AA) service answers incoming calls and prompts the
caller for a user name or extension. The directory is scanned for a match to resolve
the user name or extension and transfers the caller to the appropriate endpoint.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Auto Attendant in the Application Profiles pane.
Step 2
Enter the Auto Attendant Name Dialing (LastFirstM).

If a same name or same numerical mapping occurs, a prompt returns indicating a
duplicate key. At this point, you can either change the user name (through
nicknames or removal of middle initials) or allow duplicates.
Step 3
Click Insert.
Extension Mobility
Extension Mobility allows a user to configure a Cisco IP Phone 7940 or
Cisco IP Phone 7960 to appear as that user phone temporarily. The user can log
in to a phone and their extension mobility profile (including line and speed dial
numbers) resides on the phone. This feature is used primarily in environments
where users are not permanently assigned to physical phones.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Extension Mobility in the Application Profiles pane.
Step 2
Select the appropriate criteria from the pull down menus or Click Select Profiles.
A list of available profiles displays at the bottom of the pane.
Step 3
Check the appropriate box.
Step 4
Click Update.
44-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 44
Adding a New User

SoftPhone
You can associate a device (line) to a user as a Cisco IP SoftPhone. This will
enable the user to use their desktop PC to place and receive telephone calls and to
control an IP telephone.
Include the IP Address or host name in the Associated PC field.
For more information, refer to the Cisco IP SoftPhone Administrator Guide
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/voice/c_ipphon/softphon/

78-13310-01
44-7
Chapter 44
Adding a New User
44-8
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
45
Searching the Global Directory

The Global Directory for Cisco CallManager contains every user within a Cisco
CallManager directory. Cisco CallManager uses Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP) to interface with a directory that contains user information. This
is an embedded directory supplied with Cisco CallManager. Its primary purpose
is to maintain the associations of devices with users.
Using either a basic or an advanced user search, you can access the Global
Directory.
Refer the Adding a New User section on page 44-1 for details on adding and
configuring a new user.
This chapter includes the following topics:

78-13310-01
45-1
Chapter 45
Using Basic Search
Using Basic Search

The Basic User search utility searches the first name, last name, and user ID fields
for matches of any substring that you enter as search criteria. For example, if you
enter li in the search field, the search results would include users whose first
name, last name, or user ID matches that substring, as indicated in the following
list:
Last name
First Name
User ID
Johnson
Charlie
cjohnson
Ni
Liang
lni
Collins
Manny
mcollins
Lin
Mike
michaell
Ivey
Gabriel
Gabrieli
If you enter two or more substrings separated by spaces, the search will look for
matches for any substring in any of the three search fields.
The following procedure contains information about how to use the Global
Directory Basic User Search engine.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose User > Global Directory.

The User Search pane appears.
Step 2
In the User Search field, enter the first name, last name, user ID, or substring of
the user for whom you are searching.
Step 3
From the resulting list of matching names, click on the desired name to get
specific information on that user.
45-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 45

Using Advanced Search
Step 4
To modify this user information, update the appropriate fields as described in

Table 44-1 and click Update.
Step 5
To view or modify this user device assignment, refer to the Associating Devices
to a User section on page 44-4 for more information.
Related Topics

With the Advanced User Search utility, you can enter search criteria using three
search fields and built-in Boolean logic to perform more complex searches.
If you enter two or more names or substrings separated by spaces in any one field,
the search will interpret the request with the OR relationship operator, and will
look for matches where any of your specified criteria is true. For example, if you
enter john jerry, the search will return all users whose first names are John or
Jerry.
If you enter a substring in two or more search fields, the search will interpret the
request with the AND relationship operator and look for matches where both
criteria are true. For example, if you enter Ling for first name and Chu for last
name, the search will return the user named Ling Chu.
Tips
Use ORs with multiple entries in a single field, and ANDs across fields. For
example, if you enter:
First Name: john jane
Last Name: jones smith
UserID: jjones jsmith
the search will be for (firstname=john OR 'jane) AND lastname=jones
OR smith) AND (userid=jjones OR jsmith).

78-13310-01
45-3
Chapter 45
The following procedure contains information about how to use the Global
Directory Advanced User Search engine.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose User > Global Directory.
Step 2
Click Advanced Search.

The Advanced User Search pane appears.
Step 3
In the appropriate fields, enter the first name, last name, and user ID search
criteria of the user for whom you are searching.
Step 4
Click Search.
Note
Click Refine Search if you want to further limit your search. When
refining a search, you can enter new search criteria and then click
Search, or click Reset to populate the fields with the last search
criteria. Click Clear to delete all entries from the fields.
Step 5
Once the desired user appears is the search list, click on the user ID or name.
Step 6
To modify this user information, update the appropriate fields as described in

Table 44-1 and click Update.
Step 7
To view or modify this user device assignment, refer to the Associating Devices
to a User section on page 44-4 for more information.
Related Topics
45-4
78-13310-01
A R T
C H A P T E R
46
Plugin Configuration
Application plugins extend the functionality of the Cisco CallManager. For
example, the Cisco WebAttendant plugin allows a receptionist to rapidly answer
and transfer calls within an organization, and the JTAPI plugin allows a computer
to host applications that access the CallManager via the Java Telephony
Application Programming Interface (JTAPI).
This section contains instructions on how to install plugins:
Installing Plugins, page 46-1
Installing Plugins
Perform the following procedure to install any plugin.
Step 1

The Install Plugins page displays all available plugin applications.
Step 2
Click the icon next to the plugin you want to install.
Step 3
To download the plugin, click Run this program from its current location or
Save this program to disk.
Step 4
Follow the instructions in the installation wizard to complete the installation.

78-13310-01
46-1
Chapter 46
Plugin Configuration
Installing Plugins
Related Topics
Cisco WebAttendant Configuration, page 24-1
Plugin Configuration, page 46-1
Cisco TAPI Service Provider Installation and Configuration, page 47-1
Cisco JTAPI Installation and Configuration, page 48-1
46-2
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
47
Cisco TAPI Service Provider

Installation and Configuration
The Cisco Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) solution allows
you to install multiple Cisco TAPI Service Providers (TSPs) on the same machine.
This configuration allows TAPI applications to increase the number of lines that
can be supported and to increase the amount of call traffic. Configure each Cisco
TSP with a different username and password that is administered in the
Cisco CallManager Directory. Configure each user in the Directory, so that no two
users are associated to the same device. TSPs in the multiple TSP system do not
communicate with each other and create a separate computer telephony
integration (CTI) connection to the Cisco CallManager.
Note
If you have upgraded to Cisco CallManager 3.1, you must upgrade the TAPI
client software on any application server or client workstation on which TAPI
applications are installed. If you do not upgrade the TAPI client, your
application will fail to initialize. If you need to upgrade, download the
appropriate client from the Cisco CallManager Administration as described in
the Installing the Cisco TSP section on page 47-3.
The upgraded TAPI client software does not work with older releases of
Cisco CallManager.

78-13310-01
47-1
Chapter 47
Cisco TAPI Service Provider Installation and Configuration
The following sections outline the installation of the Cisco TSP and describe
some of the issues you need to be aware of after installation:
Installing the Cisco TSP, page 47-3
Activating the Cisco TSP, page 47-4
Configuring the Cisco TSP, page 47-6
Cisco TSP Configuration Settings, page 47-7
Installing the Wave Driver, page 47-21
Saving Wave Driver Information, page 47-23
Verifying the Wave Driver Exists, page 47-24
Verifying the Cisco TSP Installation, page 47-25
Setting up Client-Server Configuration, page 47-26
Uninstalling the Wave Driver, page 47-26
Removing the Cisco TSP, page 47-28
Managing the Cisco TSP, page 47-29
47-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Installing the Cisco TSP
Installing the Cisco TSP

Install the Cisco TSP software either directly from the Cisco CallManager
CD-ROM or from Cisco CallManager Administration. For information on
installing plugins from the Cisco CallManager, see the Installing Plugins
To install the Cisco TSP from the Cisco CallManager CD-ROM, perform the
following steps.
Note
If you install TSP 3.1 on a system that contains a previous version of TSP, the
installation program deletes the old version and installs TSP 3.1. The
installation wizard varies depending on whether you have a previous version
of TSP installed.
Note
Installing multiple TSPs installs multiple CiscoTSPXXX.tsp and

CiscoTUISPXXX.dll files in the same Windows system directory.
Procedure
Step 1
Insert the Cisco CallManager CD-ROM.
Step 2
Double-click My Computer.
Step 3
Double-click the CD-ROM drive.
Step 4
Double-click the Installs folder.
Step 5
Double-click Cisco TSP.exe.
Step 6
Follow the online instructions.
Next Steps
You should install Cisco wave driver if you plan to use first-party call control. (Do
this even if you are performing your own media termination.) For more
information, see the Installing the Wave Driver section on page 47-21.

78-13310-01
47-3
Chapter 47
Activating the Cisco TSP

You can install up to 10 TSPs on a computer. Use the following procedure to
activate each of these TSPs. When you install a Cisco TSP, you add it to the set
of active TAPI service providers. The TSP displays as CiscoTSPXXX, where X is
between 001 and 010. If a TSP has been removed or if some problem has occurred,
you can manually add it to this set.
To manually add the Cisco TSP to the list of telephony drivers, perform the
following steps.
Procedure for Windows 2000
Step 1
Open the Control Panel.
Step 2
Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
Step 3
On the Phone and Modem Options dialog box, click the Advanced tab.
Note
If the Cisco TSP is either not there or you removed it previously and
want to add it now, you can do so from this window.
Step 4
Click Add.
Step 5
On the Add Provider dialog box, choose the appropriate TSP. Labels identify the
TSPs in the Telephony providers pane as CiscoTSPXXX, where XXX is between
001 and 010.
Step 6
Click Add.
The TSP you chose displays in the provider list on the Phone and Modem Options
window.
Step 7
Configure the Cisco TSP as described in the Configuring the Cisco TSP section
on page 47-6 or click Close to complete the setup.
47-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Procedure for Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95

Step 1
Step 2
Double-click Telephony.
Step 3
Click the Telephony Drivers tab.
Note
If the Cisco TSP is either not there or you removed it previously and
want to add it now, you can do so from this window.
Step 4
Click Add.
Step 5
On the Add Provider dialog box, choose the appropriate TSP. Labels identify the
TSPs in the Telephony providers pane as CiscoTSPXXX, where XXX is between
001 and 010.
Step 6
Click Add.
The Provider list on the Telephony Drivers window now includes the
CiscoTSPXXX range 001 - 010.
Step 7
Configure the Cisco TSP as described in the Configuring the Cisco TSP section
on page 47-6 or click Close to complete the setup.

78-13310-01
47-5
Chapter 47
Configuring the Cisco TSP
Configuring the Cisco TSP

You configure the Cisco TSP by setting parameters on the Cisco IP-PBX Service
Provider configuration window. Perform the following steps to configure
Cisco TSP.
Step 1
Step 2
Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
Step 3
Choose the Cisco TSP you want to configure.
Step 4
Click Configure.
The system displays the Cisco IP PBX Service Provider dialog box.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings as described in Cisco TSP Configuration Settings

Step 6
Click OK to save changes.
Note
After the TSP is configured, you must restart the telephony service
before an application can run and connect with its devices.

Step 1
Step 2
Double-click Telephony.
Step 3
Choose the Cisco TSP you want to configure.
Step 4
Click Configure.
The system displays the Cisco IP PBX Service Provider dialog box.
Step 5
Enter the appropriate settings as described in Cisco TSP Configuration Settings

47-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Cisco TSP Configuration Settings
Step 6
Click OK to save changes.
Note
After configuring the TSP, you must restart the telephony service
before an application can run and connect with its devices.

The following sections describe the fields on the Cisco_IP PBX Service Provider
dialog box:
General Tab, page 47-8
User Tab, page 47-9
CTI Manager Tab, page 47-11
Wave Tab, page 47-13
Trace Tab, page 47-16
Advanced Tab, page 47-19

78-13310-01
47-7
Chapter 47
General Tab
The General Tab displays TSP and TSPUI version information, as illustrated in
Figure 47-1.
Figure 47-1 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider General Tab
47-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

User Tab
The User tab allows you to configure security information, as illustrated in
Figure 47-2.
Figure 47-2 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider User Tab

78-13310-01
47-9
Chapter 47
Table 47-1 contains a list of the fields for the User tab that must be set and their
descriptions.
Table 47-1 User Tab Configuration Fields
Field
Description
User Name
Enter the user name of the user you want to give

access to devices. This TSP can access devices and
lines associated with this user. Make sure this user
is also configured in the Cisco CallManager, so that
TSP can connect to Cisco CallManager.
The TSP configuration registry keys store the user
name and password you enter.
Note
You can designate only one user name

and password to be active at a time for a
TSP.
Password
Enter the password associated with the user you

entered in the User Name field. The computer
encrypts the password and stores it in the registry.
Verify Password
Reenter the user password.
47-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

CTI Manager Tab

The CTI Manager tab allows you to configure primary and secondary
CTI Manager information, as illustrated in Figure 47-3.
Figure 47-3 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider CTI Manager Tab

78-13310-01
47-11
Chapter 47
Table 47-2 contains a list of the CTI Manager tab fields that must be set and their
descriptions.
Table 47-2 CTI Manager Configuration Fields
Field
Description
Primary CTI Manager

Location
Specifies the CTI Manager to which the TSP

attempts to connect first.
If the TSP is on the same computer as the primary
CTIManager, choose the Local Host radio button.
If the primary CTIManager is on a different
computer, choose the IP Address radio button and
enter the IP address of primary CTIManager or
choose the Host Name radio button and enter the
host name of primary CTI Manager.
Backup CTI Manager

Location
Specifies the CTI Manager to which the TSP

attempts to connect if a connection to the primary
CTI Manager fails.
If the TSP is on the same computer as the backup
CTIManager, choose the Local Host radio button.
If the backup CTIManager is on a different
computer, choose the IP Address radio button and
enter the IP address of backup CTIManager or
choose the Host Name radio button and enter the
host name of backup CTI Manager.
47-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Wave Tab
The Wave tab allows you to configure settings for your wave devices, as
illustrated in Figure 47-4.
Figure 47-4 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider Wave Tab
Table 47-3 contains a list of the Wave tab fields that must be set and their
descriptions.

78-13310-01
47-13
Chapter 47
Table 47-3 Wave Tab Configuration Fields
Field
Description
Automated Voice Calls
The number of Cisco wave devices you are using

determines the possible number of automated voice
lines. (The default is 5.) You can open as many CTI
ports as the number of Cisco wave devices
configured. For example, if you enter 5, you need
to create five CTI port devices in
Cisco CallManager. If you change this number, you
need to remove and then reinstall any Cisco wave
devices that you installed.
You can only configure a maximum of 255 wave
devices for all installed TSPs because Microsoft
limits the number of wave devices per wave driver
to 255.
When you configure 256 or more wave devices
(including Cisco or other wave devices), Windows
displays the following error when you access the
Sounds and Multimedia control panel: An Error
occured while Windows was working with the
Control Panel file
C:\Winnt\System32\MMSYS.CPL. TSP can still
handle the installed Cisco wave devices as long as
you have not configured more than 255 Cisco
devices.
The current number of possible automated voice
lines designates the maximum number of lines that
can be simultaneously opened using both
LINEMEDIAMODE_AUTOMATEDVOICE and
LINEMEDIAMODE_INTERACTIVEVOICE.
If you are not developing a third-party call control
application, check the Enumerate only lines that
support automated voice check box, so that the
Cisco TSP detects only lines associated with a CTI
port device.
47-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Table 47-3 Wave Tab Configuration Fields (continued)
Field
Description
Silence Detection
If you use silence detection, this check box notifies

the wave driver which method to use to detect
silence on lines that support automated voice calls
using the Cisco Wave Driver. If the check box is
checked (default), the wave driver searches for the
absence of audio-stream RTP packets. Because all
devices on the network suppress silence and stop
sending packets, this method provides a very
efficient way for the wave driver to detect silence.
However, if some phones or gateways do not
perform silence suppression, the wave driver must
analyze the content of the media stream and, at
some threshold, declare that silence is in effect.
This CPU-intensive method handles media streams
from any type of device.
If some phones or gateways on your network do not
perform silence suppression, you must specify the
energy level at which the wave driver declares that
silence is in effect. This value of the 16-bit linear
PCM energy level ranges from 0 to 32767, and the
default is 200. If all phones and gateways perform
silence suppression, the system ignores this value.

78-13310-01
47-15
Chapter 47
Trace Tab
The Trace tab allows you to configure various trace settings, as illustrated in
Figure 47-5. Changes to trace parameters take effect immediately, even if TSP is
running.
Figure 47-5 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider Trace Tab
47-16
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Table 47-4 contains a list of the Trace tab fields that must be set and their
descriptions.
Table 47-4 Trace Tab Configuration Fields
Field
Description
On
Allows you to enable Global CiscoTSP trace.

Check the check box to enable CiscoTSP trace.
When you enable trace, you can modify other trace
parameters in the dialog box. The CiscoTSP trace
depends on the other values you enter in these
fields.
Uncheck the check box to disable CiscoTSP trace.
When you disable trace, you cannot choose any
trace parameters in the dialog box, and TSP ignores
the values entered in these fields.
Max lines/file
Specifies the maximum number of lines the trace

file can contain. The default is 10,000. Once the file
contains the maximum number of lines, trace opens
the next file and writes to that file.
No. of files
Specifies the maximum number of trace files. The

default is 10. File numbering occurs in a rotating
sequence starting at 0. The counter restarts at 0 after
it reaches the maximum number of files minus one.
Directory
Specifies the location in which trace files for all

Cisco TSPs are stored. Make sure that the specified
directory exists.
The system creates a subdirectory for each Cisco
TSP. For example, the CiscoTSP001Log directory
stores Cisco TSP 1 log files. The system creates
trace files with filename TSP001Debug000xxx.txt
for each TSP in its respective subdirectory.

78-13310-01
47-17
Chapter 47
Table 47-4 Trace Tab Configuration Fields (continued)
Field
Description
TSP Trace
Activates internal TSP tracing. When you activate

TSP tracing, Cisco TSP logs internal debug
information that you can use for debugging
purposes. You can choose one of the following
levels:
ErrorLogs only TSP errors.
DetailedLogs all TSP details (i.e., log function
calls in the order they are called.)
The system checks the TSP Trace check box and
chooses the Error radio button by default.
CTI Trace
Traces all messages and function calls between

TAPI and Cisco TSP. The system leaves this check
box unchecked by default.
If you check the check box, TSP traces all the
function calls made by TAPI to Cisco TSP with
parameters and messages (events) from Cisco TSP
to TAPI.
TSPI Trace
Traces messages flowing between Cisco TSP and

CTI. Cisco TSP communicates with the CTI
Manager. By default, the system leaves the check
box unchecked.
47-18
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab allows you to configure timer settings, as illustrated in
Figure 47-6.
Note
These timer settings meant for advanced users only rarely change.
Figure 47-6 Cisco-IP PBX Service Provider Advanced Tab

78-13310-01
47-19
Chapter 47
Table 47-5 contains a list of the Advanced tab fields that must be set and their
descriptions.
Table 47-5 Advanced Configuration Fields
Field
Description
Synchronous Message
Timeout (secs)
Designates the time the TSP waits to receive a

response to a synchronous message. The value
displays in seconds, and the default is 15. Range
goes from 5 to 60 seconds.
Requested Heartbeat
Interval (secs)
Designates the time the heartbeat messages are sent

from TSP to detect whether the CTI Manager
connection is still alive. TSP sends heartbeats when
no traffic exists between the TSP and CTI Manager
for 30 seconds or more. The default interval is 30
seconds. Range goes from 30 to 300 seconds.
Connect Retry Interval

(secs)
Designates the interval between reconnection

attempts after a CTI Manager connection failure.
The default is 30 seconds. Range goes from 10 to
300 seconds.
Provider Open Completed Designates the time the TSP waits for a Provider
Timeout (secs)
Open Completed Event. This event indicates the
initialization of CTI Manager is done and is ready
to serve TSP requests. This initialization time is
directly proportional to the number of devices
configured in the system. The default value is 30
seconds. Range goes from 5 to 300 seconds.
47-20
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Installing the Wave Driver

You can use the Cisco wave driver with Windows 2000 and Windows NT only.
Windows 98 and Windows 95 do not support it.
You should install Cisco wave driver if you plan to use first-party call control. (Do
this even if you are performing your own media termination.)
Caution
Because of a restriction in Windows NT, the software may overwrite or remove

existing wave drivers from the system when you install or remove the Cisco
wave driver on a Windows NT system. The procedures in this section for
installing and uninstalling the Cisco wave driver on Windows NT include
instructions on how to prevent existing wave drivers from being overwritten or
removed.
To install the Cisco wave driver, perform the following steps.
Step 1
Step 2
Double-click Add/Remove Hardware.
Step 3
Click Next.
Step 4
Click Add/Troubleshoot a Device and click Next.
Step 5
Click Add a New Device and click Next.
Step 6
Click No, I want to select the hardware from a list.
Step 7
Choose Sound, video and game controllers and click Next.
Step 8
Click Have Disk.
Step 9
Click Browse and change to the Wave Drivers folder in the folder where the
Cisco TSP is installed.
Step 10
Choose OEMSETUP.INF and click Open.
Step 11
In the Install From Disk window, click OK.
Step 12
The Cisco TAPI Wave Driver displays on the screen. Click Next.
Step 13
Click Next.

78-13310-01
47-21
Chapter 47
Step 14
Click Yes.
Step 15
Click Finish.
Step 16
Click Yes to restart.
Procedure for Windows NT

Step 1
Before you add the Cisco wave driver, you must save the wave driver information
from the registry in a separate file as described in the Saving Wave Driver
Information section on page 47-23.
Step 2
Step 3
Double-click Multimedia.
Step 4
Click Next.
Step 5
Click Add.
Step 6
Click Unlisted or Updated Driver.
Step 7
Click OK.
Step 8
Click Browse and change to the Wave Drivers folder in the folder where the
Cisco TSP is installed.
Step 9
Click OK. Follow the online instruction, but do not restart the system when
prompted.
Step 10
Examine the contents of the registry to verify the new driver was installed and the
old drivers still exist, as described in the Verifying the Wave Driver Exists
Step 11
47-22
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Saving Wave Driver Information
Saving Wave Driver Information

Use the following steps to save wave driver information from the registry in a
separate file. You must perform this procedure when installing or uninstalling the
Cisco wave driver on a Windows NT computer.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Start > Run.
Step 2
Enter regedit in the text box.
Step 3
Click OK.
Step 4
Choose the Drivers32 key located in the following path:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\
CurrentVersion
Step 5
Choose Registry > Export Registry File.
Step 6
Enter a filename and choose the location to save.
Step 7
Click Save.
The file receives a .reg extension.

78-13310-01
47-23
Chapter 47
Verifying the Wave Driver Exists
Verifying the Wave Driver Exists

When you install or uninstall the Cisco wave driver, you must verify whether it
exists on your system. Use these steps to verify whether the wave driver exists.
Procedure
Step 1
Click Start > Run.
Step 2
Enter regedit in the text box.
Step 3
Click OK.
Step 4
Choose the Drivers32 key located in the following path:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\
CurrentVersion
Step 5
If you are installing the wave driver, make sure the driver avaudio32.dll displays
in the data column. If you are uninstalling the wave driver, make sure the driver
avaudio32.dll does not display in the data column. This designates the Cisco
wave driver.
Step 6
Verify that the previously existing wave values appear in the data column for
wave1, wave2, wave3, and so on. You can compare this registry list to the contents
of the .reg file you saved in the Saving Wave Driver Information section on
page 47-23 by opening the .reg file in a text editor and viewing it and the registry
window side-by-side.
Step 7
If necessary, add the appropriate waveX string values for any missing wave values
that should be installed on the system. For each missing wave value, choose
Edit > New > String Value and enter a value name. Then, choose Edit > Modify,
enter the value data, and click OK.
Step 8
Close the registry by choosing Registry > Exit.
47-24
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Verifying the Cisco TSP Installation
Verifying the Cisco TSP Installation

You can use the Microsoft Windows Phone Dialer Application to verify that the
Cisco TSP is operational. For Windows NT and Windows 2000, locate the dialer
application in
C:\Program Files\Windows NT\dialer.exe
For windows 95 and Windows 98, locate the dialer application in
C:\Windows\dialer.exe
Procedure For Windows 2000
Step 1
Open the Dialer application by locating it in Windows Explorer and

double-clicking it.
Step 2
Choose Edit > Options.
Step 3
Choose Phone as the Preferred Line for Calling.
Step 4
In the Line Used For area, choose one of the Cisco Lines in the Phone Calls
drop-down menu.
Step 5
Click OK.
Step 6
Click Dial.
Step 7
Enter a number to dial, choose Phone Call in the Dial as box, and then click Place
Call.

Step 1
Open the Dialer application by locating it in Windows Explorer and

double-clicking it:
A dialog box appears requesting the line and address that you want to use. If no
lines are listed in the Line drop-down list box, a problem may exist between the
Cisco TSP and the Cisco CallManager.
Step 2
Choose one of the lines from the Line drop-down menu. Make sure Address is set
to Address 0.
Step 3
Click OK.
78-13310-01
47-25
Chapter 47
Setting up Client-Server Configuration
Step 4
Enter a number to dial.
If the call suceeds, you have verified that the Cisco TSP is operational on the
machine where the Cisco TSP is installed.
If you encounter problems during this procedure, or if no lines appear in the line
drop-down list on the dialer application, check the following items:
Make sure the Cisco TSP is configured properly.
Test the network link between the Cisco TSP and the Cisco CallManager by
using the ping command to check connectivity.
Make sure the Cisco CallManager server is functioning.
Setting up Client-Server Configuration

For information on setting up a client-server configuration (Remote TSP) in
Windows 2000, refer to the Microsoft Windows Help feature. For information on
client-server configuration in Windows NT, refer to Microsoft White Papers.
Uninstalling the Wave Driver

To remove the Cisco wave driver, perform the following steps.
Step 1
Step 2
Double-click Add/Remove Hardware.
Step 3
Click Next.
Step 4
Choose Uninstall/Unplug a device and click Next.
Step 5
Choose Uninstall a device and click Next.
Step 6
Choose Cisco TAPI Wave Driver and click Next.
Step 7
Choose Yes, I want to uninstall this device and click Next.
47-26
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Uninstalling the Wave Driver
Step 8
Click Finish.
Step 9
Procedure for Windows NT

Step 1
Before you uninstall the Cisco wave driver, you must save the wave driver
information from the registry in a separate file. For information on how to save
the wave drive information to a separate file, see the Saving Wave Driver
Information section on page 47-23.
Step 2
After the registry information is saved, open the Control Panel.
Step 3
Double-click Multimedia.
Step 4
Click the Devices tab.
Step 5
Click the + symbol next to Audio Devices to view all the audio devices.
Step 6
Click Audio for Cisco Sound System.
Step 7
Click Remove.
Step 8
Click Finish. Do not restart the system.
Step 9
Verify that the Cisco wave driver was removed and the old drivers still exist. For
information on how to do this, see the Verifying the Wave Driver Exists section
on page 47-24.
Note
Step 10
When you verify the removal of the driver, make sure that Cisco wave
driver avaudio32.dll does not appear in the data column.

78-13310-01
47-27
Chapter 47
Removing the Cisco TSP
Removing the Cisco TSP

This process removes the Cisco TSP from the provider list but does not uninstall
the TSP. To make these changes, perform the following steps.
Step 1
Step 2
Double-click the Phone and Modem icon.
Step 3
Click the Advanced tab.
Step 4
Choose the Cisco TSP you want to remove.
Step 5
Click Remove to delete the Cisco TSP from the list.

Step 1
Step 2
Double-click the Telephony icon.
Step 3
Click the Advanced tab.
Step 4
Choose the Cisco TSP you want to remove.
Step 5
Click Remove to delete the Cisco TSP from the list.
47-28
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Managing the Cisco TSP

You can perform the following actions on all installed TSPs:
Reinstall the existing Cisco TSP version
Upgrade to the newer version of the Cisco TSP
Uninstall the Cisco TSP
You cannot change the number of installed Cisco TSPs when you reinstall or
upgrade the CiscoTSPs.
Related Topics
Reinstalling the Cisco TSP, page 47-29
Upgrading the Cisco TSP, page 47-30
Uninstalling the Cisco TSP, page 47-31
Reinstalling the Cisco TSP

Use the following procedure to reinstall the Cisco TSP on all supported platforms.
Procedure
Step 1
Open the Control Panel and double-click Add/Remove Programs.
Step 2
Choose CiscoTSP and click Add/Remove.

The Cisco TSP maintenance install dialog box displays.
Step 3
Click Reinstall TSP 3.1(0.X) radio button and click Next.
Step 4
Note
The installation program prompts you to restart the computer if TSP

files are locked.

78-13310-01
47-29
Chapter 47
Upgrading the Cisco TSP

Procedure
Step 1
Double-click CiscoTSP.exe.
Step 2
The CiscoTSP maintenance install dialog box displays.

If CiscoTSP.exe contains different version of Cisco TSP than you have installed,
the installation program displays Upgrade from TSP 3.1(0.X) to 3.1(0.Y) or
Uninstall options.
Step 3
Choose Upgrade from TSP 3.1(0.X) to 3.1(0.Y) radio button and click Next.
Step 4
Note

files are locked.
47-30
78-13310-01
Chapter 47

Uninstalling the Cisco TSP

Procedure
Step 1
Open the Control Panel and double-click Add/Remove Programs.
Step 2
Choose CiscoTSP and click Add/Remove.

The Cisco TSP maintenance install dialog box displays.
Step 3
Choose Uninstall: Remove the installed TSP radio button and click Next.
Step 4
Note

files are locked.

78-13310-01
47-31
Chapter 47
47-32
78-13310-01
C H A P T E R
48
Cisco JTAPI Installation and

Configuration
Cisco Java Telephony API (JTAPI) implementation comprises Java classes that
reside on all client machines running Cisco JTAPI applications. Installation of the
Cisco JTAPI implementation must take place before Cisco JTAPI applications
will function correctly. Make sure the Cisco JTAPI classes are installed wherever
JTAPI applications will run, whether on Cisco CallManager, on a separate
machine, or on both. Installation requires 5 MB of local disk space.
Note
If you have upgraded to Cisco CallManager 3.1, you must upgrade the JTAPI
client software on any application server or client workstation on which JTAPI
applications are installed. If you do not upgrade the JTAPI client, your
application will fail to initialize. If you need to upgrade, download the
appropriate client from the Cisco CallManager Administration as described in
the Installing the Cisco JTAPI Software section on page 48-2.
The upgraded JTAPI client software does not work with older releases of
Cisco CallManager.
This section discusses the software installation and configuration required to
ready the Cisco JTAPI environment for programming and running applications.
Installing the Cisco JTAPI Software, page 48-2
Verifying the Installation, page 48-4

78-13310-01
48-1
Chapter 48
Cisco JTAPI Installation and Configuration
Installing the Cisco JTAPI Software
Configuring Cisco JTAPI Tracing, page 48-4
Administering User Information for JTAPI and TAPI Applications,

page 48-15

The Cisco JTAPI installation utility installs the following items on the local disk
drive:
Note
JTAPI java classes in %SystemRoot%\java\lib
JTAPI Preferences (jtprefs.exe) in Program Files\JTAPITools
JTAPI sample applications (makecall, jtrace) in Program Files\JTAPITools
JTAPI documentation in Program Files\JTAPITools\doc
To run JTAPI applications, you need a Java 1.1-compatible environment such

as the Sun JDK 1.1.x, JDK 1.2, or Microsoft Virtual Machine (bundled with
Internet Explorer 4.0 and higher). Cisco JTAPI will also run on Sun JDK1.2.
To use JTPREFS with Cisco JTAPI, however, requires Microsoft Java Virtual
Machine 5.00.3190 or later. For information on JTPrefs, see the Configuring
Cisco JTAPI Tracing section on page 48-4.
If you are installing Cisco JTAPI on a Windows 2000 workstation or server,
you already have a compatible version of the Microsoft Virtual Machine. On
all other Microsoft platforms such as Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows
NT, verify the current version of the Microsoft Virtual Machine by running the
command "jview /?" and noting the version printed at the top of the console.
You can download the latest version of the Microsoft Java Virtual Machine
from http://www.microsoft.com/java.
48-2
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Perform the following steps to install the Cisco JTAPI software.

Procedure
Step 1
Log in to the computer where you want to install the Cisco JTAPI client software.
Step 2
Close all Windows programs.
Step 3
Open a web browser.
Step 4
Go to the Cisco CallManager administration panes:

http://Name/CCMAdmin/main.asp
where:
Name specifies the name or IP address of the Cisco CallManager
Step 5
Step 6
Choose the Cisco JTAPI link.
Step 7
Save the file on your desktop.
Step 8
Follow the instructions in the popup windows.
Note
Install Cisco JTAPI software on the default drive as directed by the

installation software. When Windows NT is installed in C:\WINNT,
the default directory, for example, is C:\WINNT\Java\lib.

78-13310-01
48-3
Chapter 48
Verifying the Installation
Verifying the Installation

To verify the JTAPI installation, you can use the makecall application that allows
you to place a call via JTAPI. Perform the following procedure to use the makecall
application.
Procedure
Step 1
From the Windows NT command line, navigate to the directory where you
installed Cisco JTAPI Tools. By default, this directory is
C:\Program Files\JTAPITools.
Step 2
Execute the following command:

Jview makecall <server name> <login> <password> 1000 <phone1> <phone2>
where:
server name specifies the hostname or IP address of the Cisco CallManager
(for example, CTISERVER).
phone1 and phone2 designate directory numbers of IP phones or virtual
phones that the user controls according to the user configuration. See the
Adding a User section on page 44-2 for details.
For login and password, use the user ID and password that you configured in
the Cisco CallManager User Configuration pane.
Configuring Cisco JTAPI Tracing

Use the Cisco JTAPI tracing preferences application (JTPREFS.EXE) to
configure trace levels and trace destinations. Installation of the Cisco JTAPI
Preferences into the Program Files\JTAPITools directory utility takes place by
default. To open the Cisco JTAPI Preferences utility, choose Start > Programs >
Cisco JTAPI > JTAPI Preferences.
48-4
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

This section, which describes how to use the Cisco JTAPI preferences
application, discusses the following topics:
Trace Levels, page 48-5
Log Destination, page 48-7
Cisco CallManager, page 48-10
Advanced, page 48-11
Trace Levels
Figure 48-1 illustrates the Trace Levels tab of the Cisco JTAPI preferences
application. The window title shows the JTAPI version number.
Figure 48-1 Trace Levels Tab

78-13310-01
48-5
Chapter 48
The Trace Level tab allows you to enable or disable the following JTAPI trace
levels:
WARNINGLow-level warning events
INFORMATIONALStatus events
DEBUGHighest level debugging events
You may enable or disable additional debugging levels in the Debug Levels pane,
as described in the following list:
JTAPI_DEBUGGINGJTAPI methods and events trace
JTAPI_IMPLDEBUGGINGInternal JTAPI implementation trace
CTI_DEBUGGINGTrace Cisco CallManager events that are sent to the

JTAPI implementation
CTIIMPL_DEBUGGINGInternal CTICLIENT implementation trace
PROTOCOL_DEBUGGINGFull CTI protocol decoding
MISC_DEBUGGINGMiscellaneous low-level debug trace
48-6
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Log Destination
Figure 48-2 illustrates the Log Destination tab of the Cisco JTAPI preferences
application.
Figure 48-2 Log Destination Tab

78-13310-01
48-7
Chapter 48
The Log Destination tab allows you to configure how JTAPI creates traces and
how they are stored. Table 48-1 contains descriptions of the log destination fields:
Table 48-1 Log Destination Configuration Fields
Field
Description
Enable Alarm Service
When this option is enabled, JTAPI alarms go to an

alarm service running on the specified machine.
You must specify the host name and port number
when enabling this option.
Use Java Console
When this option is enabled, tracing goes to the

standard output or console (command) window.
Use Syslog
When this option is enabled, traces go to a UDP

port as specified in the Syslog Collector and Port
Number fields. Syslog collector service collects
traces and directs them to the CiscoWorks2000
server.
Use Rotating Log Files
This option allows you to direct the traces to a

specific path and folder in the system. No fewer
than two log files and no more than 99 files can
exist. Cisco JTAPI rotates through the log files in
numerical order, returning to the first log file after
filling the last. Log files increase in size in
1-megabyte increments.
Use the Same Directory
This option allows you to specify whether the same

folder name should be used for each instance of an
application.
When the option is enabled, JTAPI traces the log
files to the same directory. In this case, successive
instances of a JTAPI application will restart the log
files starting at index 01.
When the option is disabled, each application
instance, whether successive or simultaneous, will
cause the trace files to be placed in a new folder
sequential to the last folder written. Cisco JTAPI
detects the last folder present in the trace path and
automatically increments the numeric index.
48-8
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Table 48-1 Log Destination Configuration Fields (continued)
Field
Description
Path
This field allows you to specify the path name to

which the trace files are written. When the path is
not specified, JTAPI makes the default the
application path.
Directory Name Base
This field allows you to specify a folder name

where the trace files will be contained.
File Name Base and File

Name Extension
Use these values to create the trace file names with

a numerical index appended to the file base name to
indicate the order in which the files are created.
For example, if you enter jtapiTrace in the File
Name Base field and log in the File Name
Extension field, the trace files would rotate
between jtapiTrace01.log, jtapiTrace02.log and
jtapiTrace10.log. If the File Name Base and File
Name Extension fields are left blank, Cisco JTAPI
picks the trace files names as CiscoJtapi01.log,
CiscoJtapi02.log, and so on.

78-13310-01
48-9
Chapter 48
Cisco CallManager
Figure 48-3 illustrates the Cisco CallManager tab of the Cisco JTAPI preferences
application.
Figure 48-3 CallManager Tab
This tab allows you to define a list of Cisco CallManagers that a JTAPI
application can present to the user for optional Cisco CallManager connectivity.
48-10
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Advanced
Figure 48-4 illustrates the Advanced tab of the Cisco JTAPI preferences
application.
Figure 48-4 Advanced Tab
You can configure the parameters in Table 48-2 through the Advanced tab in the
JTPrefs application. You may need these low-level parameters for troubleshooting
and debugging purposes only.

78-13310-01
48-11
Chapter 48
Note
Cisco recommends that you not modify the parameters in Table 48-2 unless
instructed to do so by Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Table 48-2 Advanced Configuration Fields
Field
Description
Enable CTI Port Auto

Recovery
This setting specifies recovery treatment for CTI

ports under the control of the JTAPI application.
When this setting is enabled, JTAPI will reregister
the CTI port in case of a system failure. When this
setting is disabled, the application must reregister
CTI ports after a system failure. The default setting
is enabled.
Enable Periodic Wakeup
This setting enables a heartbeat in the internal

message queue that JTAPI uses. It causes the
thread to wake up if it has not received a message
in the time defined in the PeriodicWakeupInterval
and creates log an event. The default setting is
disabled.
Periodic Wakeup Interval

(sec)
This setting allows you to define a time of

inactivity in the JTAPI internal message thread. If
JTAPI has not received a message during this time,
the thread wakes up and logs an event. The default
is 50 seconds.
Enable Queue Stats
This setting causes JTAPI to log the max queue

depth over the specified number of messages
queued to JTAPI main event thread. In other words,
for every x messages processed, JTAPI logs a
DEBUGGING level trace reporting the maximum
queue depth over that interval, where x is the
number of messages specified in Queue Size
Threshold. The default setting is disabled.
Queue Size Threshold
This setting allows you to specify the number of

messages that define the time over which JTAPI
will report the maximum queue depth. The default
is 25 messages.
48-12
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Table 48-2 Advanced Configuration Fields (continued)
Field
Description
CTI Request Timeout

(sec)
This setting specifies the time in seconds that

JTAPI will wait for a response from a CTI request.
The default is 15 seconds.
Provider Open Request

Timeout (sec)

JTAPI will wait for a response for the Provider
Open Request. The default is 30 seconds.
Provider Retry Interval

(sec)

JTAPI will retry opening a connection to the
CallManager cluster in case of system failure. The
default is 30 seconds.
Server heartbeat Interval

(sec)
This setting specifies how often in seconds that the

connection between JTAPI and the
Cisco CallManager cluster will be verified to be
alive. If JTAPI fails to receive heartbeats, it will
establish a connection via the second CTIManager
specified in the provider open request.
Route Select Timeout (ms) This setting specifies the time in milliseconds that
JTAPI will wait for the application to respond to
the Route event. If the application does not
respond within this time, JTAPI will end the route
and send the corresponding RouteEnd event.

78-13310-01
48-13
Chapter 48
JTAPI Preferences on non-Microsoft environments
JTAPI Preferences on non-Microsoft environments

For non-Microsoft environments, you must create a jtapi.ini file manually and
place it in the CLASSPATH. The following list provides the parameter names
with sample values:
PROTOCOL_DEBUGGING=0
UseSameDirectory=1
JTAPIIMPL_DEBUGGING=0
UseSystemDotOut=0
QueueStatsEnabled=0
PeriodicWakeupInterval=50
RouteSelectTimeout=5000
UseTraceFile=0
ProviderOpenRequestTimeout=30
Directory=
DEBUG=0
DesiredServerHeartbeatInterval=30
AlarmServicePort=1444
CTI_DEBUGGING=0
SyslogCollector=
JTAPI_DEBUGGING=0
PeriodicWakeupEnabled=0
NumTraceFiles=10
AlarmServiceHostname=
MISC_DEBUGGING=0
TracePath=.
UseAlarmService=0
CTIIMPL_DEBUGGING=0
WARNING=0
Traces=WARNING;INFORMATIONAL;DEBUG
INFORMATIONAL=0
UseSyslog=0
CtiPortAutoRecovery=1
FileNameBase=CiscoJtapi
CtiRequestTimeout=15
TraceFileSize=1048576
Debugging=JTAPI_DEBUGGING;JTAPIIMPL_DEBUGGING;CTI_DEBUGGING;
CTIIMPL_DEBUGGING;PROTOCOL_DEBUGGING;MISC_DEBUGGING
FileNameExtension=log
QueueSizeThreshold=25
ProviderRetryInterval=30
CallManagers=cm1
SyslogCollectorUDPPort=514
48-14
78-13310-01
Chapter 48

Administering User Information for JTAPI and TAPI Applications
Administering User Information for JTAPI and TAPI

Applications
JTAPI and TAPI applications require that users be administered in the directory
and be given privilege to control one or more devices. Follow the procedures for
adding a user and assigning devices to a user in the Adding a New User section
before using a JTAPI or TAPI application. The list of devices assigned to the user
represents the phones that the user needs to control from the application (e.g.,
make calls, answer calls).

78-13310-01
48-15
Chapter 48
Administering User Information for JTAPI and TAPI Applications
48-16
78-13310-01
A R T
Appendix
A P P E N D I X
Personal Directory
Personal Directory provides a personal address book stored in the
Cisco CallManager LDAP directory, a Cisco IP Phone synchronizer, and two
Cisco IP Phone services: Personal Address Book and Personal Fast Dials.
This section contains the following sections:
Understanding Personal Directory, page A-1
System Requirements, page A-3
Configuring Personal Directory, page A-3
Downloading the Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer, page A-9
Preparing the Phone User for Personal Directory, page A-9
Understanding Personal Directory

With the stored personal address book, users can synchronize their Microsoft
Outlook and/or Outlook Express address book entries. The Personal Address
Book service accesses the stored entries. From a Cisco IP Phone 7960 or 7940,
users can look up entries, choose a selection, and press a softkey to dial the chosen
number.
With Personal Fast Dials, the Cisco IP phone user can assign index numbers (from
1 to 99) for quick dialing. The index numbers can be assigned to Personal Address
Book entries or to directory entries the user adds that do not correspond to the
address book. Users can assign and remove the Personal Fast Dials entries from
their phones.

78-13310-01
A-1
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Understanding Personal Directory
Figure A-1 illustrates how the Personal Address Book and Personal Fast Dials
services interact with other components in your system.
Figure A-1
Using Personal Address Book and Personal Fast Dials
Directory
server
IP phone services
Web server
IMAP server
(Exchange)
IP
Cisco IP phone
7960/7940
PC
PDA
58641
Personal
Assistant
server
IP
Cisco Personal Assistant allows users to synchronize their exchange server with
the Personal Address Book stored in the LDAP directory in Cisco CallManager.
With Personal Directory, the Cisco CallManager directory synchronizes with
Exchange Server (A) and with Microsoft Outlook clients on your users PCs (B).
A-2
78-13310-01
Appendix A
Personal Directory
System Requirements
System Requirements
Make sure your system contains the following components:
Note
Cisco IP Phones models 7960 or 7940
A PC running Cisco CallManager 3.1 or later
A PC running Windows 2000
A Microsoft IIS Server
Microsoft Outlook and/or Outlook Express
Microsoft Outlook must be set up in Internet-only mode and the Windows

Address Book must be configured to share entries.
Configuring Personal Directory

To configure the Personal Directory, perform the following procedures:
Configuring the Personal Address Book Service, page A-3
Configuring the Personal Fast Dials Service, page A-6
Configuring the Personal Address Book Service

You configure Personal Address Book by adding the service to
Cisco CallManager Administration and configuring the service parameters. To
configure the Personal Address Book service, perform the following steps.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Feature > Cisco IP Phone Services.

Step 2
In the Service Name field, enter the name of the service you want to display in the
menu of available services on the Cisco IP Phone User Options pane, for
example, My Address Book.

78-13310-01
A-3
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Step 3
In the Service Description field, enter a description of the content provided by the
service, for example, Personal Directory - Personal Address Book.
Step 4
In the Service URL field, enter the URL of the server where the application for
the Personal Address Book service is located:
http://<CallManager hostname or IP address>/ccmpd/xmlAddressBookInput.asp
Figure A-2 shows the service configuration entries for Personal Address Book.
Figure A-2
Personal Address Book Service Configuration
Step 5
Click Insert.
Step 6
The Configure Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter window appears.
Step 7
Add each parameter as described in Table A-1, beginning with UserID. When
specified, enter the parameter name exactly as it appears in the table.
Figure A-3 shows the UserID service parameter settings for this service.
A-4
78-13310-01
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Figure A-3
UserID Service Parameter Settings
Step 8
Click Insert to add the parameter.
Step 9
When you have added the last service parameter specified in Table A-1, click
Insert and Close to insert that parameter and close the window.
Step 10
Click Update Subscriptions.
Related Topics
Personal Address Book Service Parameter Settings, page A-6

78-13310-01
A-5
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Personal Address Book Service Parameter Settings

Table A-1 contains the service parameter settings for the three service parameters
required for the Personal Address Book service. When indicated, use the exact
parameter name.
For a general description of these fields, see Table A-1.
Table A-1
Personal Address Book Service Parameter Settings
Field
Definition
Parameter Name
UserID
UserPIN
(Use this exact name.)
PreDial
Parameter Display Name User Identification
PIN
Outside Access code
Default Value
None
None
None
Parameter Required
Yes
Yes
No
Parametetr Description
Same user
identification used with
the Cisco IP Phone User
Options pane
Same user PIN used

with the Cisco IP
Phone User Options
pane
This access code is

added as a prefix to the
stored directory number
to provide access to an
outline line.
Configuring the Personal Fast Dials Service

You configure Personal Fast Dials by adding the service to Cisco CallManager
Administration and configuring the appropriate service parameters. To configure
the Personal Fast Dials service, perform the following steps.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Feature > Cisco IP Phone Services.

Step 2
In the Service Name field, enter the name of the service you want to display in the
menu of available services on the Cisco IP Phone User Options pane, for
example, My Fast Dials.
A-6
78-13310-01
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Step 3
In the Service Description field, enter a description of the content provided by the
service, for example, Personal Directory - Personal Fast Dials.
Step 4
In the Service URL field, enter the URL of the server where the application for
the Personal Address Book service is located:
http://<CallManager hostname or IP address>/ccmpd/xmlFastDials.asp
Step 5
Click Insert.
Step 6
The Configure Cisco IP Phone Service Parameter window appears.
Step 7
Add each parameter as described in Table A-2, beginning with UserID. When
specified, enter the parameter name exactly as it appears in the table.
Step 8
Click Insert to add the parameter.
Step 9
When you have added the last service parameter specified in Table A-2, click
Insert and Close to insert that parameter and close the window.
Step 10
Click Update Subscriptions.
Related Topics
Personal Fast Dials Service Parameter Settings, page A-8

78-13310-01
A-7
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Personal Fast Dials Service Parameter Settings

Table A-2 contains the service parameter settings for the three service parameters
required for Personal Fast Dials service. When indicated, use the exact parameter
name.
For a general description of these fields, see Table A-2.
Table A-2
Personal Fast Dials Service Parameter Settings
Field
Definition
Parameter Name
UserID
UserPIN
PreDial
Parameter Display Name User Identification
PIN
Outside Access code
Default Value
None
None
None
Parameter Required
Yes
Yes
No
Parametetr Description
Same user
identification used with
the Cisco IP Phone User
Options pane
Same user PIN used

with the Cisco IP
Phone User Options
pane
This access code will be

added as a prefix to the
stored directory number
to provide access to an
outline line
A-8
78-13310-01
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Downloading the Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer
Downloading the Cisco IP Phone Address Book

Synchronizer
Users must install the Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer plugin on their
computers before they can use the Personal Directory. Use the following
procedure to download the Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer
installation file. Once you download the file, you can distribute it to the users in
your network.
Procedure
Step 1
Choose Applications > Install Plugins.
Step 2
Choose Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer.
Step 3
Step 4
Make the installation file available to the end users so they can install the
Cisco IP Phone Address Book Synchronizer application on their own work
stations.
Preparing the Phone User for Personal Directory

Once you have added the Personal Directory services and configured the service
parameters, provide the phone user with the following information:
Notification of the features availability
Access to the installation file for the Cisco IP Phone Address Book
Synchronizer for users to install on their own work stations
Their user ID and PIN, if they do not already have it
The URL for the Cisco IP Phone User Options web page for the user, if they
do not already have it
Information on using the Personal Directory services. Direct them to the

Cisco IP Phone 7960/7940 Quick Start Guide.

78-13310-01
A-9
Appendix A
Personal Directory
Preparing the Phone User for Personal Directory
A-10
78-13310-01
I N D E X
AA 44-6
called party
admission control
implementing with locations 10-1
application profiles 44-3
assistance
obtaining xxvii
TAC xxvii
autogenerated device profiles
configuring directory numbers 39-7
transformations settings 20-21

transformations settings (table) 20-21
calling party
transformations settings 20-19
transformations settings (table) 20-20
calling search spaces
adding 13-3
configuration settings (table) 13-7
Automated Attendant (AA) 44-6
configuring 13-1
auto-registration
copying 13-5
deleting 13-6
configuring 11-1
finding 13-2
disabling 11-3
updating 13-4
enabling 11-1
reusing auto-registration numbers 11-7
call park
adding a number 33-2
configuring 33-1
deleting a number 33-4
buttons
speed dial, configuring 42-20
updating a number 33-3

call pickup
adding a group number 34-2
assigning directory numbers to a group 34-6

78-13310-01
IN-1
Index
configuring 34-1
deleting 4-5
deleting a group number 34-4
updating 4-3
group configuration settings (table) 34-5
introduction 1-1
updating a group number 34-3
key features 1-2
CD-ROM
more information 1-2
documentation xxv
characters, special
overview 1-1
server configuration 2-1
configuring 20-1
starting and stopping 32-1
described (table) 20-2
updating 3-3
Cisco.com
described xxvii
Cisco CallManager
audience xxii
conventions xxiii
adding 3-1
organization xxii
benefits 1-2
preface xxi
component versions 3-8
purpose xxi
related documentation xxiii
configuring 3-1
deleting 3-4
groups
Cisco IP Phones
templates, phone button
configuring 43-1
adding 4-2
Cisco IP phones
configuration overview 4-1
adding 42-4
address book synchronizer A-9
copying 4-4
configuring
explained 42-2
overview 42-1
copying existing 42-6
deleting 42-10
directory numbers 42-27
displaying MAC address 42-3
IN-2
78-13310-01
Index
finding and listing 42-26
Trace Level tab (figure) 48-5
resetting 42-7
verifying installation 48-4
updating 42-9
preferences on non-Microsoft
environments 48-14
Cisco IP phone services

adding a service 35-2
adding a service parameter 35-6
configuration settings (table) 35-5, 35-9
configuring 35-1, 42-22
deleting a service 35-4
deleting a service parameter 35-8
subscribing 42-23
unsubscribing 42-25
updating 42-24
updating a service 35-3
updating a service parameter 35-7
Cisco IP SoftPhone
user information 44-7
Cisco Java Telephony API (JTAPI) 48-1
Cisco JTAPI
administering user information 48-15
configuring tracing 48-4
installation and configuration 48-1
installing
Advanced configuration (table) 48-12
Advanced tab (figure) 48-11
Cisco CallManager tab (figure) 48-10
Log Destination configuration (table) 48-8
Log Destination tab (figure) 48-7
overview 48-2
Cisco Messaging Interface (CMI) 22-1

Cisco TAPI
Cisco TAPI Service Provider (TSP) 47-1
Cisco TFTP
configuring 23-1
configuring parameters 23-4
deleting service 23-3
inserting service 23-2
Cisco TSP
activating 47-4
configuration settings
Advanced tab (table) 47-20
CTI Manager tab (figure) 47-11
CTI Manager tab (table) 47-12
general tab (figure) 47-8
overview 47-7
Trace tab (figure) 47-16
Trace tab (table) 47-17
user tab (figure) 47-9
user tab (table) 47-10
Wave tab (figure) 47-13
Wave tab (table) 47-14
configuring 47-6
78-13310-01
IN-3
Index
installing 47-3
Cisco WebAttendant
installing the wave driver 47-21
client, configuring settings 24-18
managing 47-29
client, installing 24-16
overview 47-1
client configuration settings (table) 24-20
reinstalling 47-29
hunt groups
removing 47-28
adding members 24-9
setting up the client-server

configuration 47-26
uninstalling 47-31
uninstalling the wave driver 47-26
upgrading 47-30
verifying the installation 47-25
Cisco uOne
configuring linked 24-12

deleting members 24-13
updating members 24-13
viewing members 24-13
overview 24-1
performance monitors 24-27
MWI device, configuring 38-9

Cisco voice mail
adding a new server and ports 38-2
adding ports 38-12
adding ports with the wizard 38-6
configuring 38-1
copying ports 38-15
deleting ports 38-13
deleting ports with the wizard 38-8
port configuration settings (table) 38-16
ports, configuring 38-11
port wizard 38-2
port wizard device information configuration
settings 38-3
port wizard pilot number configuration
settings 38-4
updating ports 38-14
pilot points, configuring 24-4

server configuration pane (figure) 24-23
setting up wauser shared directory 24-24
starting TCD 24-26
users, adding 24-2
users, configuration settings (table) 24-4
users, configuring 24-2
users, deleting 24-3
users, updating 24-3
users, viewing 24-3
CMI
adding service 22-2
configuring 22-1
configuring service parameters 22-5
IN-4
78-13310-01
Index
CMLocal date/time group 5-1
call park
component versions 3-8
adding a number 33-2
conference bridges
deleting a number 33-4
adding a hardware device 25-5
overview 33-1
adding a meet-me number pattern 25-10
settings (table) 33-5
adding a software device 25-2
updating a number 33-3
configuring 25-1
call pickup
deleting a conference device 25-8
assigning directory numbers to group 34-6
deleting a meet-me number pattern 25-13
group settings (table) 34-5
hardware configuration settings (table) 25-6
overview 34-1
software configuration settings (table) 25-4
Cisco CallManager
updating a conference device 25-7
adding 3-1
updating a meet-me number pattern 25-12
deleting 3-4
updating conference bridge parameters 25-9
list of topics 3-1
configuring
analog access gateway settings (table) 41-44
auto-registration

updating 3-3
Cisco CallManager groups
disabling 11-3
adding 4-2
enabling 11-1
copying 4-4
overview 11-1
deleting 4-5
updating 4-3
calling search spaces

adding 13-3
Cisco IP phone button templates 43-1

Cisco IP phones
copying 13-5
explained 42-2
deleting 13-6
overview 42-1
finding 13-2
overview 13-1
updating 13-4

78-13310-01
IN-5
Index
CMI
overview 35-1, 42-22
adding service 22-2
subscribing 42-23
unsubscribing 42-25
overview 22-1
updating 42-24
service parameters 22-5

Cisco TFTP
conference bridges
adding a hardware device 25-5
adding a meet-me number pattern 25-10
adding a software device 25-2
deleting a conference device 25-8
overview 23-1
deleting a meet-me number pattern 25-13
parameters 23-4
hardware settings (table) 25-6
Cisco TSP 47-6
overview 25-1
Cisco voice mail
software settings (table) 25-4
overview 38-1
updating a conference device 25-7
ports 38-11
updating a meet-me number pattern 25-12
updating parameters 25-9
Cisco WebAttendant
CTI route points
adding 37-2
configuration pane (figure) 37-2
client settings 24-18
deleting 37-4
find and list configuration pane

(figure) 37-6
server 24-22
starting TCD 24-26
client-server configuration using Cisco
TSP 47-26
finding 37-5
modifying 37-3
overview 37-1
resetting 37-6
IN-6
78-13310-01
Index
date/time groups
overview 42-27
adding 5-2
deleting 5-3
updating 42-29
updating 5-2
E & M port settings (table) 41-52
DDI 20-5
E1/T1 gateway settings (table) 41-21
device defaults
external route plan wizard
overview 6-1
confirming the external route plan 19-10
creating an external route plan 19-2
device pools
deleting an external route plan 19-12
adding 8-2
entering location information 19-5
finishing the external route plan 19-11
deleting 8-5
generating the external route plan 19-9
overview 8-1
overview 19-1
updating 8-4
providing gateway information 19-8
device profiles
providing tenant information 19-4
adding a user 39-3
selecting gateways 19-6
configuring directory numbers for

autogenerated device profiles 39-7
setting the routing options 19-3
deleting a user profile 39-6

directory number settings (table) 39-8
finding 39-2
overview 39-1
updating a user profile 39-5
devices
adding 36-2
overview 36-1
restarting or resetting 36-2
directory numbers
adding 42-28
FXS/FXO gateway settings (table) 41-18

gatekeeper
adding 40-2
deleting 40-3
resetting 40-4
gateways
adding 41-2
adding analog access 41-13
adding FXO ports to MGCP 41-8
adding FXS ports to MGCP 41-6
adding H.323 41-12
deleting 42-30
78-13310-01
IN-7
Index
adding non-IOS MGCP 41-10
IP phones, Cisco
adding ports 41-13
explained 42-2
adding ports to MGCP 41-6
overview 42-1
adding T1-CAS ports to MGCP 41-9

adding T1 PRI or E1 PRI ports to
MGCP 41-10
deleting 41-66
overview 41-1
resetting 41-67
restarting 41-67
updating 41-68
ground start port settings (table) 41-51
group call pickup
assigning directory numbers to group 34-6
group settings (table) 34-5
overview 34-1
H.323 gateway settings (table) 41-35
hunt groups
adding members 24-9
configuring linked hunt groups 24-12
overview 24-9
IP phone services, Cisco

overview 42-22
subscribing 42-23
unsubscribing 42-25
updating 42-24
keypad templates 43-1
locations
adding 10-2
deleting 10-3
overview 10-1
updating 10-3
loop start port settings (table) 41-49
media resource group lists
adding 29-2
copying 29-4
deleting 29-5
overview 29-1
updating 29-3
media resource groups
adding 28-2
copying 28-4
deleting 28-6
overview 28-1
intercluster trunk settings (table) 41-35
IN-8
78-13310-01
Index

updating 28-3
meet-me number patterns
MGCP gateway settings (table) 41-16
MOH
MWI device
parameters
overview 30-1
updating 30-4
partitions
adding audio sources 27-2
adding 12-3
adding servers 27-12
deleting 12-5
audio sources 27-2
overview 12-1
audio source settings (table) 27-9
copying audio sources 27-4
updating 12-4
copying servers 27-14
personal address book
deleting audio sources 27-6
illustrated (figure) A-4
deleting servers 27-16
overview A-3
fixed audio source 27-7
parameter settings (table) A-6
fixed audio source settings (table) 27-8
personal directory A-3
overview 27-1
personal fast dials
resetting servers 27-17
overview A-6
server configuration settings (table) 27-19
servers 27-12
phone button templates
updating audio sources 27-3
adding 43-2
updating servers 27-13
deleting 43-5
MTP
modifying 43-3
adding 26-2
overview 43-1
deleting 26-4
renaming 43-4
overview 26-1
updating 43-6
updating 26-3
phone button templates (table) 43-3

78-13310-01
IN-9
Index
phones
adding 42-4
updating 7-3
route filters
adding 14-4
deleting 42-10
adding clauses 14-8
explained 42-2
copying 14-6
find and list pane (figure) 42-8, 42-10
deleting 14-10
finding 14-2
overview 42-1
operators (table) 14-14
resetting 42-7
operators explained 14-13
overview 14-1
updating 42-9
removing clauses 14-9
pilot points
adding 24-5
tags 14-11
tags (table) 14-11
deleting 24-6
updating 14-5
route groups
updating 24-6
adding 15-3
viewing 24-6
adding devices 15-4
plugins 46-1
deleting 15-7
ports
finding 15-1
updating 41-68
overview 15-1
port settings (table) 41-45
removing devices 15-5
POTS port settings (table) 41-46
regions
updating 15-6
adding 7-2
route lists
deleting 7-4
adding 16-3
overview 7-1
adding route groups 16-4

changing the order of route groups 16-7
IN-10
78-13310-01
Index
deleting 16-8
services
finding 16-2
adding 30-2
overview 16-1
deleting 30-3
removing route groups 16-6
route patterns
adding 17-3
using Windows 32-2

settings
copying 17-6
called party transformations 20-21
deleting 17-7
calling party transformations 20-19
finding 17-1
overview 17-1
special characters
overview 20-1
speed dial buttons 42-20
updating 17-5
speed dial settings (table) 42-22
route plan report

overview 21-1
T1-CAS gateway settings (table) 41-33

TFTP
viewing all records 21-2
viewing in a file 21-3
servers
adding 2-2
adding a new service 30-2
overview 23-1
parameters 23-4
transcoders
deleting 2-4
copying 31-4
deleting 31-5
list of topics 2-1
described 31-2
overview 31-1
updating 2-3
updating 31-3
service parameters
translation patterns
overview 30-1
adding 18-3
updating 30-4
copying 18-5
deleting 18-6
finding 18-1

78-13310-01
IN-11
Index
overview 18-1
route points
adding 37-2
updating 18-4
TSP 47-6
configuring 37-1
user information
deleting 37-4
adding a new user 44-1, 44-2
finding 37-5
modifying 37-3
associating devices 44-4
resetting 37-6
Automated Attendant 44-6
CTI ports
extension mobility 44-6
adding 42-4
SoftPhone, Cisco IP 44-7
voice mail
custom phone button templates
overview 38-1
adding 43-2
ports 38-11
deleting 43-5
modifying 43-3
WebAttendant, Cisco
renaming 43-4
updating 43-6

client settings 24-18
server 24-22
D
date/time groups
adding 5-2
starting TCD 24-26
configuring 5-1
conventions xxiii
deleting 5-3
CTI
updating 5-2
find and list CTI route points configuration

pane (figure) 37-6
route point configuration pane (figure) 37-2
DDI
configuring 20-5
explained (table) 20-5
IN-12
78-13310-01
Index
defaults
devices
defining common characteristics 8-1

gatekeeper, configuring 40-1
gateways 41-1
configuring 6-1
MWI configuration settings (table) 38-10
updating 6-2
restarting or resetting 36-2
with non-firmware loads 6-4
with non-default firmware loads 6-4
device defaults
directory
personal
configuring 6-1
configuring A-3
updating 6-2
overview A-1
device pools
preparing phone user A-9
adding 8-2
system requirements A-3
understanding A-1
configuring 8-1
deleting 8-5
updating 8-4
device profiles
directory number
directory numbers
adding 42-28
adding a user 39-3
configuring 39-1
configuring 42-27
configuring directory numbers for

autogenerated device profiles 39-7
deleting 42-30
deleting a user profile 39-6

directory number configuration settings
(table) 39-8
finding 39-2
updating a user profile 39-5
devices
adding 36-2
Cisco IP phones, configuring 42-1, 42-2
updating 42-29
discard digits instructions (DDI)
configuring 20-5
document
audience xxii
conventions xxiii
organization xxii
configuring 36-1

78-13310-01
IN-13
Index
preface xxi
selecting gateways 19-6
purpose xxi
setting the routing options 19-3
documentation
feedback xxvi
obtaining xxv
on CD-ROM xxv
feedback on documentation xxvi
ordering xxvi
fields
related xxiii
World Wide Web xxv
Domain Name System (DNS) 2-1
requiring route patterns (table) 20-4

firmware loads
devices with non-default 6-4
FXO ports 41-8
FXS ports 41-6
E
E1 PRI ports 41-10
enterprise parameters
configuring 9-1
extension mobility
user information 44-6
G
gatekeeper
adding 40-2
external phone number mask 11-5
configuring 40-1
external route plan wizard
deleting 40-3
configuring 19-1
modifying 40-3
confirming the external route plan 19-10
resetting 40-4
creating an external route plan 19-2

deleting an external route plan 19-12
gateways
adding 41-2
entering location information 19-5
H.323 41-12
finishing the external route plan 19-11
non-IOS 41-10
generating the external route plan 19-9
adding analog access gateway 41-13
providing gateway information 19-8
adding intercluster trunk 41-12
providing tenant information 19-4
IN-14
78-13310-01
Index
adding ports 41-13

analog access configuration settings
(table) 41-44
configuring 41-1
deleting 41-66
E & M port configuration settings
(table) 41-52
POTS port configuration settings

(table) 41-46
PRI 41-21
providing gateway information using
external route plan wizard 19-8
resetting 41-67
restarting 41-67
searching
E1/T1 configuration settings (table) 41-21
by calling search space 41-60
by description 41-58
FSX/FXO configuration settings

(table) 41-18
by device name 41-56
ground start port configuration settings

(table) 41-51
by directory number 41-59
H.323 configuration settings (table) 41-35

intercluster trunk configuration settings
(table) 41-35
ISDN 41-21
loop start port configuration settings
(table) 41-49
MGCP
by device pool 41-62

by route group 41-64
selecting using external route plan
wizard 19-6
T1-CAS configuration settings (table) 41-33
updating 41-68
Global Directory
advanced search 45-3
adding Cisco IOS 41-3
basic search 45-2
adding FXO ports 41-8
LDAP 45-1
adding FXS ports 41-6
overview 45-1
adding ports 41-6
group call pickup
adding T1-CAS ports 41-9
adding a group number 34-2
adding T1 PRI or E1 PRI ports 41-10
assigning directory numbers to a group 34-6
configuring 34-1
modifying 41-65
deleting a group number 34-4
group configuration settings (table) 34-5

updating a group number 34-3

78-13310-01
IN-15
Index
groups
IP phones, Cisco
Cisco CallManager
address book synchronizer A-9

configuring 4-1

IP phone services, Cisco
date/time
configuring 42-22
subscribing 42-23
overview 5-1
unsubscribing 42-25
updating 42-24
ISDN, gateway configuration 41-21
H
H.323
adding gateways 41-12
hunt groups
J
JTAPI
adding members 24-9
installing
Advanced configuration (table) 48-12
configuring 24-9
Cisco CallManager tab (figure) 48-10
configuring tracing 48-4
Log Destination configuration

(figure) 48-8
Log Destination tab (figure) 48-7

overview 48-2
Trace Level tab (figure) 48-5
intercluster trunks
adding 41-12
verifying installation 48-4

preferences on non-Microsoft
enviroments 48-14
introduction
to Cisco CallManager 1-1
IP address 2-1
IN-16
78-13310-01
Index
deleting 28-6
updating 28-3
keypad templates
configuring 43-1
Media Termination Point (MTP) 26-1

meet-me number pattern
meet-me number patterns
adding 25-10
LDAP parameters 9-1
deleting 25-13
locations
updating 25-12
adding 10-2
configuring 10-1
messaging
Cisco Messaging Interface (CMI) 22-1
MGCP
deleting 10-3
adding Cisco IOS 41-3
updating 10-3
adding FXO ports 41-8

adding FXS ports 41-6
M
media resource group lists
adding gateways 41-3

adding non-IOS gateway 41-10
adding ports 41-6
adding 29-2
adding T1-CAS ports 41-9
adding T1 PRI or E1 PRI ports 41-10
configuring 29-1
copying 29-4
deleting 29-5
updating 29-3
media resource groups
adding 28-2
configuring 28-1
copying 28-4
MOH
audio source configuration settings
(table) 27-9
audio sources 27-2
audio sources, adding 27-2
audio sources, copying 27-4
audio sources, deleting 27-6
audio sources, updating 27-3
configuring 27-1

78-13310-01
IN-17
Index
fixed audio source

described 27-7
obtaining documentation xxv
server configuration settings (table) 27-19
ordering documentation xxvi
servers 27-12
organization xxii
servers, adding 27-12
overview
of Cisco CallManager 1-1
servers, copying 27-14

servers, deleting 27-16
servers, resetting 27-17
servers, updating 27-13
MTP
P
parameters
adding 26-2
configuring 30-1
CiscoIpVoiceMediaStreamingApp 26-1
enterprise 9-1
configuring 26-1
LDAP 9-1
deleting 26-4
updating 30-4
IpVoiceMediaStreamer 26-1
updating 26-3
partitions
adding 12-3
music on hold (MOH) 27-1
MWI
configuring 12-1
MWI device configuration settings

(table) 38-10
MWI device for uOne 38-9
deleting 12-5
finding 12-1
updating 12-4
personal address book
configuring
illustrated (figure) A-4

number patterns, meet-me
overview A-3
adding 25-10
deleting 25-13
userID parameter settings (figure) A-5
updating 25-12
using (figure) A-2
IN-18
78-13310-01
Index
personal directory
configuring A-3

overview A-1
preparing phone user A-9
system requirements A-3
understanding A-1
deleting 42-10
personal fast dials
directory numbers 42-27
configuring A-6
directory numbers, configuring 42-27
displaying MAC address 42-3
using (figure) A-2
find and list pane (figure) 42-8, 42-10
phone button templates
adding 43-2
resetting 42-7
updating 42-9
configuring 43-1
pilot points
deleting 43-5
adding 24-5
modifying 43-3
renaming 43-4
updating 43-6
configuring 24-4
phones
deleting 24-6
adding 42-4
updating 24-6
button templates
viewing 24-6
configuring 43-1
plugins
configuring 46-1
installing 46-1
ports
adding 38-12
configuring 35-1
copying 38-15
deleting 38-13

78-13310-01
IN-19
Index
modifying 41-65
updating 38-14, 41-68
preface xxi
tags
explained 14-11
preferences
updating 14-5
Cisco JTAPI in non-Microsoft

environments 48-14
PRI, gateway configuration 41-21
route groups
adding 15-3
adding devices 15-4
configuring 15-1
deleting 15-7
regions
finding 15-1
adding 7-2
removing devices 15-5
updating 15-6
configuring 7-1
route lists
deleting 7-4
adding 16-3
updating 7-3
adding route groups 16-4
related documentation xxiii
changing the order of route groups 16-7
route filters
configuring 16-1
adding 14-4
deleting 16-8
adding clauses 14-8
finding 16-2
removing route groups 16-6
configuring 14-1
route patterns
copying 14-6
adding 17-3
deleting 14-10
finding 14-2
configuring 17-1
operators
copying 17-6
deleting 17-7
explained 14-13
fields in Cisco CallManager (table) 20-4
removing clauses 14-9
finding 17-1
IN-20
78-13310-01
Index
updating 17-5
wildcards 20-1
route plans
confirming using the external route plan
wizard 19-10
deleting using the external route plan
wizard 19-12
external route plan wizard 19-1
finishing using the external route plan
wizard 19-11
generating using the external route plan
wizard 19-9
report
configuring 21-1
service parameters
adding a new service 30-2
configuring 30-1
adding Cisco IP phone services 35-6
deleting Cisco IP phone services 35-8
updating Cisco IP phone services 35-7
updating 30-4
services
adding 30-2
Cisco IP phone configuration settings
(table) 35-5, 35-9
configuring
viewing all records 21-2
adding Cisco IP phone services 35-2
viewing in a file 21-3
deleting Cisco IP phone services 35-4

updating Cisco IP phone services 35-3
deleting 30-3
searching using Global Directory 45-1
starting and stopping using Windows 32-2
servers
updating service parameters 30-4
adding 2-2
adding CMI 22-2
settings
called party transformations
configuring 20-21
configuring 2-1
deleting 2-4
calling party transformations
deleting CMI 22-4
configuring 20-19
updating 2-3

configuring 20-1

78-13310-01
IN-21
Index
special characters
TFTP
configuring 20-1
configuring 23-1
configuring parameters 23-4
explained 20-1
speed dial
buttons, configuring 42-20
time zones 5-1
transcoders
starting services 32-2
stopping services 32-2
copying 31-4
deleting 31-5
updating 31-3
translation patterns
T1-CAS ports 41-9
adding 18-3
T1 PRI ports 41-10
TAC
configuring 18-1
contacting xxviii
copying 18-5
described xxvii
deleting 18-6
obtaining assistance xxvii
finding 18-1
telephone contacts xxviii
updating 18-4
website xxviii
TSP
activating 47-4
TAPI
configuration settings
TCD
starting 24-26
Advanced tab (table) 47-20
technical assistance xxvii
CTI Manager tab (figure) 47-11
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) xxvii
CTI Manager tab (table) 47-12
Telephony Call Dispatcher (TCD) 24-26
general tab (figure) 47-8

overview 47-7
Trace tab (figure) 47-16
IN-22
78-13310-01
Index
Trace tab (table) 47-17
extension mobility 44-6
user tab (figure) 47-9
SoftPhone, Cisco IP 44-7
user tab (table) 47-10

Wave tab (figure) 47-13
Wave tab (table) 47-14
configuring 47-6
versions of Cisco CallManager

components 3-8
installing 47-3
voice gateways 41-1
installing the wave driver 47-21
voice mail
managing 47-29
adding a new server and ports 38-2
overview 47-1
adding ports 38-12
reinstalling 47-29
adding ports with the wizard 38-6
removing 47-28
configuring 38-1
setting up client-server configuration 47-26
copying ports 38-15
uninstalling 47-31
deleting ports 38-13
uninstalling the wave driver 47-26
deleting ports with the wizard 38-8
upgrading 47-30
verifying the installation 47-25
ports, configuring 38-11

port wizard 38-2
port wizard device information configuration

settings 38-3
uOne, Cisco
port wizard pilot number configuration

settings 38-4
MWI device, configuring 38-9
updating ports 38-14
user information
adding a new user 44-1, 44-2
administering for JTAPI and TAPI 48-15
associating devices to a user 44-4
Automated Attendant 44-6

78-13310-01
IN-23
Index
users, deleting 24-3
users, updating 24-3

wauser shared directory 24-24
wave driver
users, viewing 24-3

wildcards
installing 47-21
saving information 47-23
for route patterns 20-1
uninstalling 47-26
wizards, Cisco voice mail port wizard 38-2
verifying wave driver exists 47-24

WebAttendant, Cisco
client,configuration settings (table) 24-20
client, configuring settings 24-18
hunt groups
adding members 24-9
overview 24-1
pilot points, configuring 24-4
starting TCD 24-26
users, adding 24-2
users, configuration settings (table) 24-4
users, configuring 24-2
IN-24
78-13310-01

(Cisco Press) CallManager Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Cisco Press) CallManager Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(Cisco Press) CallManager Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cisco CallManager

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Server Configuration 2-1

Cisco CallManager Configuration 3-1

Cisco CallManager Group Configuration 4-1

Date/Time Group Configuration 5-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Device Defaults Configuration 6-1

Region Configuration 7-1

Device Pool Configuration 8-1

Enterprise Parameters Configuration 9-1

Location Configuration 10-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Auto-Registration Configuration 11-1

Partition Configuration 12-1

Calling Search Space Configuration 13-1

Route Filter Configuration 14-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Route Filter Configuration Settings 14-7

Route Group Configuration 15-1

Route List Configuration 16-1

Route Pattern Configuration 17-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Copying a Route Pattern 17-6

Translation Pattern Configuration 18-1

External Route Plan Wizard 19-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Special Characters and Settings 20-1

Route Plan Report 21-1

Cisco Messaging Interface Configuration 22-1

Cisco TFTP Configuration 23-1

Cisco WebAttendant Configuration 24-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Configuring Pilot Points 24-4

Conference Bridge Configuration 25-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Deleting a Meet-Me Number/Pattern 25-13

Media Termination Point Configuration 26-1

Music On Hold Configuration 27-1

Media Resource Group Configuration 28-1

Deleting a Media Resource Group 28-6

Media Resource Group List Configuration 29-1

Service Parameters Configuration 30-1

Transcoder Configuration 31-1

Starting and Stopping Services 32-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Call Park Configuration 33-1

Call Pickup and Group Call Pickup Configuration 34-1

Cisco IP Phone Services Configuration 35-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Device Configuration 36-1

CTI Route Point Configuration 37-1

Cisco Voice Mail Configuration 38-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide

Device Profile Configuration 39-1

Gatekeeper Configuration 40-1

Gateway Configuration 41-1

Cisco CallManager Administration Guide